^ ^ • "W •*$" 5>. "^o* w $A < *0' o V a V * ^ *°«* o « » PRACTICAL INSTRUCTION IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM BY J. P? F. DEUEUZE. ci__ TRANSLATED FROM THE PARIS EDITION BY THOMAS C. HARTSHORN. Second € & i t i a n • PROVIDENCE : B. CRANSTON & CO 1837. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year one thousand eight hundred and thirty-seven, by B. Cranston & Co. in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Rhode-Island. INTRODUCTION. Seveiial persons have requested me to publish upon the subject of magnetism, plain and simple instructions, free from all theory, and proper in all cases to direct those who are convinced of the reality of the agent, and who are at a loss how to make use of it. I am now going to fulfil this task, solely with the view of being useful. It is not the object of this work to convince men who, otherwise well informed, still doubt the reality of magnetism; it is intended chiefly for those who are not engaged in medicine, physiology, or physics', who believe upon oral testimony, without having seen any person magnetized, and who, being persuaded that I know more than themselves upon the subject, wish to try my method in order to succeed, as I have had the happiness of doing, in healing and ameli- orating the ills of their fellow-creatures. I shall lay down principles which I believe true, without entering into any discussion to prove their truth. I shall avoid pronouncing upon that which appears doubtful; and if I err v of explaining things, my errors, apr theory which I have adopted to reK^ : ngr them to the samr tion of tiiv^ ans to v and derive ad IV INTRODUCTION. facts in support of my doctrine. I shall limit myself to the citing of a few of those which I have myself observed, whenever examples shall appear necessary to the better understanding of my subject. For the purpose of obtaining a more orderly arrangement, T shall divide this instruction into chapters. I shall first lay down certain principles, in order to make my instructions more plain and simple. If my manner of announcing these principle be somewhat hypothetical, there can be no change in the results. Thus, I shall employ the expression magnetic fluid, because I believe in the existence of a fluid, the nature of which is unknown to me ; but those who deny the existence of this fluid, who compare the action of magnetism in living beings, to that of attraction in inanimate bodies, or who admit a spiritual influence without a particular agent, cannot, on that account, contradict the consequences to which I shall arrive. The knowledge of the processes and of all the conditions necessary for the efficient use of magnetism, is independent of the opinions which serve to explain the phenomena, and of which, up to the present time, none are susceptible of demonstration. My first chapter shall contain an enunciation of the prin- ciples which are general and applicable to all cases. In the second chapter, I shall teach the various processes u *re employed in magnetizing, when somnambulism "eak of the indications which the 'V the choice of processes nation conc^^g tne ^cusm may be ^tic virtue to INTRODUCTION. V certain bodies, or by patting magnetism in motion and circu- lation, so that several persons may at the same time experi- ence the action, under the direction of one magnetizer. In the fifth, I shall treat of somnambulism, and of the manner of proceeding with somnambulists. In the sixth, I shall speak of the precautions which the patient ought to take in choosing a magnetizer. In the seventh, of the application of magnetism to various diseases, and of its association with medicine. In the eighth, of the dangers of magnetism, and of the means of preventing them. In the ninth, of the methods of developing and fortifying in one's self the magnetic power, and of drawing from it all the advantages possible. In the tenth and last, I shall speak of the studies which are appropriate to those who wish to acquire a profound k: ov/ledge of magnetism. Persons who read these ten chapters in course, will ob- serve that some things said in the first are repeated in the others, in almost the same terms. I would have avoided these repetitions, if I considered my work as a literary production. I have left them thus, that those who consult only one article, may find all the advice relative to the subject in question, without my being obliged to refer him to what has been already said. If in some places I permit myself to speak in a dogmatic style, it is not because I hold my own opinions in too great esteem ; it is merely for the purpose of being more clear and precise, and of not leaving in uncertainty whoever shall consent to take me for a guide. No person feels the imperfection of the work more than myself, since there VI INTRODUCTION. must be in it many omissions. I will receive with gratitude any critical observations addressed to me, and will profit by them in the correction of my faults, and in adding to my second edition whatever may appear to be wanted in this first essay. Among the men who have devoted themselves to the practice of magnetism, there is a great number who have more intelligence and more knowledge than myself. I have a lively desire that the reading of this work may determine them to execute the plan I proposed to myself, better than I have been able to do it. I invite them to take from my instructions all that appears to them worthy of being pre- served, and not to quote me except to rectify the errors which may have escaped my diligence. Our wish is to do good. This wish unites us, it identifies us, so to speak, one with another. When success is obtained, let us enjoy it equally, whoever may be the author of it. It is possible for self-love to be gratified in the discovery of a truth, but never in having done good deeds. A physician who has already become celebrated, would perhaps increase his reputation, by publishing a good work upon magnetism. He would call attention to an order of phenomena which belongs to animated nature ; he would found a school ; he would find disciples among his brethren in the profession. This kind of success is impossible for us. Our adversaries condemn us without examination, and they exercise a great influence upon public opinion. We have no partisans except among those to whom we have rendered service, and the greater part of them dare not raise their voice. Happily their number increases every day ; and that should sustain our courage and our hopes. Let us continue, then, to work in concert, to spread abroad INTRODUCTION. VU the knowledge of magnetism, without disputation, without fear, and without the spirit of system. Let us banish the abuses and the dangers which may attend the use of it* Let us collect the materials of a*beneficent science. The time will arrive when a man of genius will reunite all these materials, and rear an edifice which time cannot overthrow.* * This was written in 1825. Since that time, in 1831, the Royal Academy of Medicine, through their committee, whose report is worthy of study as a model of accurate philosophical investigation, pronounced upon the subject an opinion, which has changed the popular feeling in France in relation to it. Its existence, as a pe- culiar faculty of the human mind, is no longer a matter of question among men of science who have witnessed its phenomena. The extent of its utility is now a question worthy of profound investiga- tion, and not to be settled by men who never think, and who decide without looking into its merits. The evidences in favor of its utility are so abundant in European works of high authority, that an igno- rance of its true history, which is not to be found in the Encyclo- pedias, may be deemed singular in men of good information ; and disgraceful, if they suffer themselves to oppose it through incurious prejudice. In this vicinity, it receives the support of medical prac- titioners of unquestionable skill. It should always be in the hands of such, or administered under their direction. To promote this object, and to recal the public attention from the curious phenomena to the true use of it, the translator has given the instructions of the venerable Deleuze an English dress. A* ANIMAL MAGNETISM. CHAPTER I. GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. 1. Man has the faculty of exercising over his fellow- men a salutary influence, in directing towards them by his will, the vital principle. 2. The name of magnetism has been given to this facul- ty ; it is an extension of the power which all living beings have, of acting upon those who are submitted to their will. 3. We perceive this faculty only by the results ; and we make no use of it, except as far as we will to use it. 4. The first condition of action, then, is to exercise the will. 5. As we cannot comprehend how a body can act upon another at a distance, without there being something to establish a communication between them, we suppose that a substance emanates from him who magnetizes, and is conveyed to the person magnetized, in the direction given it by the will. This substance, which sustains life in us, we call the magnetic fluid. The nature of this fluid is unknown; even its existence has not been demonstrated ; but every thing occurs as if it did exist, and that warrants us in ad- 10 GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. [CHAP. I. mitting it, while we are indicating the means of employing magnetism. 6. Man is composed of a body and a soul ; and the influence he exerts, participates the properties of both. It follows that there are three actions in magnetism : first, physical ; second, spiritual ; third, mixt action. It will soon be seen how easy it is to distinguish the phenomena which belong to each. 7. If the will is necessary to direct the fluid, belief is necessary to induce one to make a firm and steady use of the faculties he possesses. Confidence in the power we possess, makes us act without effort and without distraction. As to the rest, confidence is only the consequence of belief: it differs in this only — one believes himself to be endowed with a power, whose reality he does not doubt. 8. In order that one individual may act upon another, there must e£ist between them a moral and physical sym- pathy ; as there is between all the members of an animated body. Physical sympathy is established by means which we shall indicate ; moral sympathy by the desire of doing good to one who desires to receive it ; or by ideas and wishes which, occupying them both equally, forms between them a communication of sentiments. When this sympathy is well established between two individuals, we say, they are in communication. 9. Thus the first condition of magnetizing is the will ; the second is the confidence which the magnetizer has in his own powers ; the third is benevolence, or the desire of doing good. One of these qualities may supply the others to a certain point ; but to have the action at the same time energetic and salutary, the three conditions must be united. CHAP. I,] GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. 11 10. The magnetic fluid may not only act directly upon the person whom we wish to magnetize, but it may also be conveyed to him by an intermediate body, which we have charged with this fluid, to which we have given a determi- nate direction. 11. The direct action of magnetism ceases when the magnetizer ceases to will ; but the direction given by mag- netism does not cease in that case, and the most trifling cir- cumstance sometimes suffices to renew the phenomena which it first produced. 12. A constant will supposes continued attention ; but attention is sustained without effort when one has entire confidence in his powers. A man who makes towards a designated goal, is always attentive to avoid obstacles, to move his feet in a proper direction ; but this sort of attention is so natural to him as to be easy, because he has first determined his movement, and feels in himself the 'force necessary to continue it. 13. The action of the magnetic fluid, being relative to the direction given it, will not be salutary only so far as it is accompanied with a good intention. 14. Magnetism, or the action of magnetism, springs from three things ; first, the will to act ; second, a sign, the expression of that will : third, confidence in the means employed. If the desire of doing good be not united to the will to act, there will be some effects, but these effects-will be irregular. 15. The fluid which emanates from the magnetizer, exercising a physical influence upon the patient, it follows that the magnetizer ought to be in good health. This influence exerting, in the course of time, an effect upon the moral condition of the patient, it follows that the magnetizer 12 GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. [CHAP. la ought to be worthy of esteem for the uprightness of his mind, the purity of his sentiments, and the honesty of his character. The knowledge of this principle is equally important for those who magnetize, and for those who are the subjects of magnetism. 16. The faculty of magnetizing exists in all persons ; but all do not possess it in the same degree. This difference of magnetic power in various individuals, arises from the superiority which some have over others, in moral and physical qualities. Among the moral qualities, are, confi- dence in one's own power, energy of will, facility in sustain- ing and concentrating the attention, the sentiment of benev- olence which unites us to every suffering being, strength of mind enabling one to remain calm in the midst of the most alarming crises, patience which prevents uneasiness in a long and painfjul struggle, disinterestedness which makes one forget himself and devote himself to the being whom he attends, and which banishes vanity and even curiosity. Of physical qualifications, the first is good health, the next a peculiar power, different from that which raises burthens or moves heavy bodies, and of which we recognise the existence and the degree of energy in ourselves, only by the trial we make of it. 17. Therefore there are men who have a magnetic power very superior to that of others. It is so great in some persons, that they are obliged to moderate it. 18. The magnetic virtue developes itself by exercise, and a person uses it with more facility and success, when he has acquired the habit of exerting it. 19. Although the magnetic fluid escapes from all the body, and the will suffices to give it direction, the external CHAP. I.] GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. 13 organs by which we act are the most proper to throw it off with the intention determined by the will. For this reason we make use of our hands and of our eyes to magnetize. The word which indicates our will, can often exert an ac- tion when the communication is well established. The very accents of the magnetizer being produced by the vital ener- gy, acts upon the organs of the patients. 20. The magnetic action can be conveyed to very great distances, but it acts in that manner only with persons who are perfectly in communication. 21. All men are not sensible to the magnetic action ; and the same persons are more or less so, according to the temporary dispositions in which they are found. 22. Magnetism generally exercises no influence upon persons in health. The same man w r ho was insensible to it in a state of good health, will experience the effects of it when ill. There are diseases in which the action of magnetism is not perceived ; there are others in which it is evident. We do not yet know enough of- it to determine tlse cause of these anomalies, nor to pronounce beforehand, whether magnetism will or w r ill not act. We have only certain probabilities in regard to it ; but that should not create an objection to the reality of magnetism, since at least three-fourths of the patients feel the effects of it. 22. Nature has established a communion or a physical sympathy between certain individuals. It is for this reason that many magnetizers act much more promptly and more efficaciously upon certain patients than upon others; and that the same magnetizer does not agree equally with all patients. There are even some of them who are better calculated to heal certain diseases. Some persons think 14 GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. [CHAP. I. themselves insensible to the action of magnetism, because they have not met a magnetizer congenial to them. 23. The magnetic virtue exists equally and in the same degree in the two sexes ; and women ought to be preferred as magnetizers of women, for several reasons which we shall mention. 24. Many persons feel much fatigue when they magnet- ize ; others do not feel any. This is not owing to the movements that are made, but to the loss of the vital prin- ciple or magnetic fluid. He who is not endowed with great magnetic force, would exhaust himself in the course of time if he were to magnetize every day for several hours. Gen- erally speaking, every one in good health and not enfeebled by age, might undertake the treatment of a single patient, and give him a sitting of one hour each day. But every one has not the" strength necessary for magnetizing several persons, nor several hours in succession. As to the rest, the more one exercises himself in it, the less he is fatigued ; because he employs only just as much force as is necessary. .25. Children over seven years of age magnetize very well, when they have witnessed the operation. They act by imitation, with an entire confidence, with a determined will, without effort, without being distracted by the least doubt, or by curiosity, and they very well and very quickly remove a casual ailment. They learn to magnetize as they learn to walk, and they are moved by the desire of soothing him for whom they have an affection ; but they ought not to be permitted to do it, because it would injure their growth and weaken them. 26. Confidence, which is an essential condition with the magnetizer, is not necessary in the person magnetized. CHAP. I.] GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. 15 One can act equally upon those who believe, and upon those who do not believe in magnetism. It suffices if the patient yields himself up passively, making no resistance. Never- theless confidence contributes to the efficaciousness of mag- netism, as it does to that of most remedies. 27. In general, magnetism acts in a more sensible and efficacious manner upon persons who have led a simple and frugal life, and who have not been agitated by passions, than upon those with w T hom the course of nature has been troubled, either by habits of luxury, or by remedies. Mag- netism does no more than to employ, regulate, and direct the forces of nature. The more the course of nature has been interrupted by foreign agents, the more difficult it is for the magnetizer to re-establish it. Magnetism, therefore, cures much more promptly and much better, persons who reside in the country, and children, than those who have lived in the world, who have taken much medicine, and whose nerves are irritated. Nervous persons, when mag- netism has once gained empire over them, present the most singular phenomena, but much fewer cures, especially radi- cal cures. 28. Magnetism having for its object the developement of what physicians call the forces medicatrices, that is to say, the seconding of the efforts that nature makes to relieve itself, and the facilitating of the cures to which it is disposed, it is essential to act with constancy in aid of nature, and never to oppose it. Whence it follows that people ought not to magnetize through curiosity, nor to exhibit the power with which they are endowed, nor to produce surprising effects, nor to convince the incredulous ; but solely for the purpose of doing good, and in cases where it is thought to b* 16 GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. [CHAP. I. be useful. It follows also that the magnetizer ought to em- ploy his power gradually, and by little and little. He ought to be exempt from vanity, from curiosity, from interest. One only sentiment ought to animate him, the desire of do- ing good to him whose cure he undertakes, and with whom he ought to occupy himself wholly, all the time he is mag- netising him. He ought not to search out any extraordi- nary effect, but to know how to take advantage of the cri- ses which nature, sustained by magnetism, produces of itself for promoting the cure. 29. Although the choice of this or of that process is not essential in order to direct the action of magnetism, it is useful to adopt a method, and to follow it habitually without thinking of it, so as never to be embarassed, and to lose time in searching what motions it is most proper to make. 30. When one has acquired the habit of concentrating his attention, and of abstracting himself from every thing foreign to the object he has in view, he will feel in himself an instinctive impulse to convey the action to this or to that organ, and to modify it according to circumstances. It is necessary to obey this impulse, without searching into the cause of it. When the patient yields himself entirely to the action of magnetism, without being distracted by other ideas, it often happens that a similar instinct causes him to indicate the processes which are the most proper for him ; the magnetizer should then suffer himself to be directed. 31. Magnetism often excites pain in that part of the body where the seat of the disease is found. It renews old and slumbering pains. These pains are produced by the CHAP. I.] GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. 17 efforts which nature makes to triumph over the malady. We ought not to be troubled on their account; 1 they are but transient, and the patient always finds himself better after having experienced them. This is what distinguishes the pains which are called critical, from those which are pro- duced by the progress of the disease. 32. When any crisis takes place, it is very danger- ous to interrupt or trouble it. We will explain what we mean by crises, and designate the various kinds of them. 33. Before undertaking a magnetic treatment, the mag- netizer ought to examine himself. He ought to ask himself whether he can continue it, and whether the patient or those who have influence over him, will put any obstacle in the way. He ought not to undertake it if he feels any repug- nance, or if he fears to catch the disease. To act effica- ciously, he should feel himself drawn towards the person who requires his care, take an interest in him, and have the desire and the hope of curing, or at least relieving him. As soon as he has decided, which he should never do lightly, he ought to consider him whom he magnetizes as his brother, as his friend ; he should be so devoted to him as not to perceive the sacrifices that he imposes upon himself. Any other consideration, any other motive than the desire of do- ing good, ought not to induce him to undertake a treat- ment. 34. The faculty of magnetizing, or that of doing good to our fellow-creatures by the influence of the will, by the communication of the principle that sustains our health and life, being the most delightful and most precious that God has given to man, he ought to regard the employment of 18 GENERAL VIEWS AND PRINCIPLES. [CHAP. ' I. magnetism as a religious act, which demands the greatest self-collectedness, and the greatest purity of intention. — Hence it is a sort of profanation to magnetize for amuse- ment, through curiosity, or through the desire of displaying singular effects. They who demand experiments to see a spectacle, know not what they demand ; but the magnetizer ought to know it, to respect himself, and to preserve his dignity. CHAPTER II. OF THE PROCESSES IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. The principles we have given in the preceding chapter are essential, invariable ; and, in all cases, the power and efficacy of magnetism depends upon their application. The processes of which w T e are about to speak, are not alike employed by all magnetizers. Many of them follow pe- culiar ones ; but, whatever method they pursue, the results are nearly the same. The processes, however, ought to be diversified according to circumstances. We are often de- termined in the choice, not only by the kind of disease, but by a regard to convenience and other circumstances, and even by the desire of avoiding what might appear extraor- dinary. What I am about to say, is useless to persons who have acquired the habit of magnetizing. Let them continue to follow the method which has constantly issued in the com- forting or the curing* of their patients, I write for those who, not yet knowing any thing about it, are embarrassed in the exercise of a faculty whose existence they do not doubt ; and I am about to teach them the manner of mag- izing which I adopted after having received instruction, and after having collected and made observations during thirty- five years. * I add the words comforting and curing, because every method having for its object the production of surprising effeets s or to show the power of the magnetizer, is essentially vicious. 20 OF THE PROCESSES [CHAP. IT. When a sick person desires you to attempt to cure him by magnetism, and neither the family nor the physician make objection to it, if you feel the desire to second his wishes, and are resolved to continue the treatment so long as it shall be necessary, settle with him the hour of the sittings, make him promise to be exact, not to limit himself to an attempt of a few days, to conform himself to your advice in relation to regimen, and not to speak of the undertaking except to persons who ought naturally to be informed of it. When you are once agreed, and determined to treat the thing seriously, remove from the patient all persons who would be troublesome ; do not keep near you any except necessary witnesses, (one only, if it can be so,) and request of them not to occupy themselves at all with the processes you employ, nor with the effects that follow, but to unite with you in the intention of doing good to the patient. Ar- range things so as not to be too cold nor too warm, so that nothing shall interfere with the freedom of your movements, and take precautions to prevent all interruptions during the sitting. Cause your patient to sit down in the easiest position pos- sible, and place yourself before" him, on a seat a little more elevated, so that his knees may be between yours, and your feet by the side of his. Demand of him in the first place, that he give himself up entirely, that he think of nothing, that he do not trouble himself by examining the effects which he experiences, that he banish all fear, and indulge hope, and that he be not disquieted or discouraged if the ac- tion of magnetism produces in him temporary pains. After you have brought yourself to a state of self-collect- edness, take his thumbs between your two fingers, so that the inside of your thumbs may touch the inside of his. Re- CHAP. II.] IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 21 main in this situation five minutes, or until you perceive there is an equal degree of heat between your thumbs and his; that being done, you will withdraw your hands, re- moving them to the right and left, and waving them so that the interior surface be turned outwards, and raise them to his head ; then place them upon his two shoulders, leaving them there about a minute ; you will then draw them along the arm to the extremity of the fingers, touching lightly. You will repeat this pass* five or six times, always turning your hands and sweeping them off a little, before reascend- ing ; you will then place your hands upon the head, hold them there a moment, and bring them down before the face, at the distance of one or two inches, as far as the pit of the stomach ; there you will let them remain about two min- utes, passing the thumb along the pit of the stomach, and the other fingers down the sides. Then descend slowly along the body as far as the knees, or farther ; and, if you can conveniently, as far as the ends of the feet. You may repeat the same processes during the greater part of the sitting. You may sometimes draw nearer to the patient so as to place your hands behind his shoulders, descending slowly along the spine, thence to the hips, and along the thighs as far as the knees, or to the feet. After the first passes you may dispense with putting your hands upon the head, and make the succeeding passes along the arms be- ginning at the shoulder ; or along the body commencing at the stomach. When you wish to put an end to the sitting, take care to draw towards the extremity of the hands, and towards the * I employ here the word pass, which is common to all magnet- izers ; it signifies all the movements made by the hand in passing over the body, whether by slightly touching, or at a distance. 22 OF THE PROCESSES [CHAP. II. extremity of the feet, prolonging your passes beyond these extremities, and shaking your fingers each time. Finally, make several passes transversely before the face, and also before the breast, at the distance of three or four inches ; these passes are made by presenting the two hands together and briskly drawing them from each other, as if to carry off the superabundance of fluid with which the patient may be charged. You see that it is essential to magnetize, always descending from the head to the extremities, and never mounting from the extremities to the head. It is on this account that we turn the hands obliquely when they are raised again from the feet to the head. The descending passes are magnetic ; that is, they are accompanied with the intention of magnetizing. The ascending movements are not. Majiy magnetizers shake their fingers slightly after each pass. This method, which is never injurious, is in certain cases advantageous, and for this reason it is good to get the habit of doing it. Although you may have at the close of the sitting taken care to spread the fluid over all the surface of the body, it is proper, in finishing, to make several passes along the legs from the knees to the end of the feet. These passes free the head. To make them more conveniently, place your- self on your knees in front of the person whom you are mag- netizing. I think it proper to distinguish the passes that are made without touching, from those which are made with the touch, not only with the ends of the fingers, but with all the extent of the hand, employing at the same time a slight pressure. I give to these last the name of magnetic frictions. They are often made use of to act better upon the arms, the legs, and the back, along the vertebral column. CHAP. II.] IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 23 This manner of magnetizing by longitudinal passes, directing the fluid from the head to the extremities, without fixing upon any part in preference to others, is called mag- netizing by the long pass, (magnetiser a grands courans). It is more or less proper in all cases, and it is requisite to employ it in the first sitting, when there is no special reason for using any other. The fluid is thus distributed into all the organs, and it accumulates naturally in those which have need of it. Besides the passes made at a short distance, others are made, just before finishing, at the distance of two or three feet. They generally produce a calm, refreshing, and pleasurable sensation. There is one more process by which it is very advan- tageous to terminate the sitting. It consists in placing one's self by the side of the patient, as he stands up, and, at the distance of a foot, making with both hands, one before the body and the other behind, seven or eight passes, commenc- ing above the head and descending to the floor, along which the hands are spread apart. This process frees the head, re-establishes the equilibrium, and imparts strength. When the magnetizer acts upon the patient, they are said to be in communication, (rapport). That is to say, we mean by the word communication, a peculiar and induced condi- tion, which causes the magnetizer to exert an influence upon the patient, there being between them a communication of the vital principle. This communication is sometimes established very soon, and sometimes after a long trial. This depends upon the moral and physical conditions of the two individuals. It is rare not to have it established at the first sitting. Experi- enced magnetizers generally perceive it in themselves when this takes place. c 24 OF THE PROCESSES [CHAP. II. When once the communication is well established, the action is renewed in the succeeding sittings, at the instant of beginning to magnetize. Then if you wish to act upon the breast, the stomach, or the abdomen, there is no utility in touching, provided it is not found more convenient. Ordi- narily magnetism acts as well and even better in the interior of the body, at the distance of one or two inches, than by the touch. It is enough at the commencement of the sitting to take the thumbs a moment. Sometimes it is necessary to magnetize at the distance of several feet. Magnetism at a distance is more soothing, and some nervous persons cannot bear any other. In making the passes it is unnecessary to employ any greater muscular force than what is required to lift the band aad prevent it from falling. The movements should be easy and not too rapid. A pass from the head to the feet may take about half a minute. The fingers ought to be a little separated from each other, and slightly bent, so that the ends of the fingers be directed towards the person magnetized. It is by the ends of the fingers, and especially by the thumbs, that the fluid escapes with the most activity. For this reason it is, we take the thumbs of the patient in the first place, and hold them whenever we are at rest. This process generally suffices. to establish the communication; to strengthen which there is also one other process. It consists in placing your ten fingers against those of the patient, so that the inside of your hands are brought near to the inside of his, and the fleshy part of your fingers touch the fleshy parts of his, the nails being outwards. The fluid seems to flow less copiously from the back of the hands than from the inside ; and this is one of the reasons for / CHAP. II.] IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 25 turning the hands in raising them, without carrying them off too far from the body. The processes I have now indicated, are the most regular and advantageous for magnetism by the long pass, but it is far from being always proper, or even possible to employ them. When a man magnetizes a woman, even if it were his sister, it might not be proper to place himself before her in the manner described ; and also when a patient is obliged to keep his bed, it would be impossible to make him sit, in order to sit in front of him. In the first case, you can place yourself by the side of the person whom you wish to magnetize. First, take the thumbs, and, the better to establish the communication, place one hand upon the stomach, and the other upon the back, then lower the two hands opposite to each other, one down the back and the other at a distance down the forepart be body, one hand descending to the feet. You may magnetize the two arms, one after the other, with one hand only. In case the patient cannot raise himself, take your station near his bed in the most convenient manner ; take his thumbs, make several passes along the arms, and, if he can support himself upright, several along the back ; then, not to fatigue yourself, use only one hand, placing it upon the stomach, and making longitudinal passes, at first slightly touching through the clothes, then at a distance. You can hold one hand fixed upon the knees or upon the feet, while the other is in motion. Finish by passes along the legs, and by transversal passes before the head, the breast, and the stomach, to scatter the superabundant fluid. When the communication is established, one can magnetize very well by placing himself at the foot of the patient's bed, and in 26 OF THE PROCESSES [CHAP. II. front of him ; then directing at that distance both hands from the head to the feet, dashing them aside after each pass, so as not to conduct the fluid to himself. I have pro- duced somnambulism by this process, without establishing the communication by touching. This is what I have to say about magnetism by the long pass, with which it is always proper to commence, and to which a person may confine himself until he has a reason for employing other processes. Let us now consider the circumstances which point out particular processes. When any one has a local pain, it is natural, after estab- lishing a communication, to carry the magnetic action to the suffering part. It is not by passing the hands over the arms that we undertake to cure a sciatic ; it is not by putting the hand upon^the stomach that we can dissipate a pain hi the knee. Here are some principles to guide us. The magnetic fluid, when motion is given to it, draws along with it the blood, the humors, and the cause of the complaint. For example, if one has the headache, owing to the tendency of the blood to the head, if the forehead be hot and the feet very cold, by making a few passes from the head to the feet, and others along the legs, the head is relieved, and the feet become warm. If one has a pain in the shoulder, and the magnetizer makes passes from the shoulder to the end of the fingers, the pain will descend with the hand ; it stops sometimes at the elbow, or at the wrist, and goes off by the hands, in which a slight perspiration is perceived ; before it is entirely dissipated, a pain is sometimes felt in the lower part of the bowels. Magnetism seems to chase away and bear off with it what disturbs the equilibrium, and its action ceases when the equilibrium is CHAP. II.] IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 27 restored. It is useless to search out the .causes of these facts, it is sufficient that experience has established them, for us to conduct ourselves accordingly, when we have no reason to do otherwise. The following rules, with some exceptions, may thence be established. Accumulate and concentrate the magnetic fluid upon the suffering part ; then draw off the pain towards the extrem- ities. For example, do you desire to cure a pain in the shoul- der ? hold your hand upon the shoulder for several minutes, then descend, and after having quitted the ends of the fin- gers, recommence patiently the same process. Would you cure a pain in the stomach ? place your hands several min- utes upon the stomach, and descend to the knees. You will accumulate the fluid by holding your hands still ; by bring- ing them down, you will draw away both the fluid and the pain at the same time. If your patient be troubled with an obstruction, place your hand upon the seat of it, leave it there for some time, either immovable or making a circular motion, and draw it along towards the extremities. If the obstruction does not occupy a great space, present your fingers near, without uniting them, because it is principally by the points that the fluid escapes. Turn them aside when you bring them away, and then wave them towards the extremities. You may be assured that the motions you make externally, will operate sympathetically in the interior of the patient's body, wher- ever you have sent the fluid into it. If any one has received a blow behind the head, produc- ing a contusion, take the head between your two hands, conveying the action of your will to the seat of the injury. 28 OF THE PROCESSES [CHAP. II. Then bring your hand down along the back, if the contu- sion is behind the head ; or down the forepart of the body to the knees, if it is in the front of it ; or along the arm, if it is on the side. You will thus prevent the blood from tend- ing to the head ; you will avoid the danger of inflammation, and probably render bleeding unnecessary. If you wish to cure a burn, chilblains, or a felon, follow the same process. The examples I have just cited may be applied to most cases. I think that, in general, contact is useful to concen- trate the action, and that passes at a short distance, are pre- ferable for establishing and maintaining the magnetic cur- rents. Magnetic frictions are employed with advantage in pains of the limbs. In the headache, if the pain is very great, and if there be heat, after having placed your hands upon the head for some time, withdraw them as if you believed the fluid you have introduced to be united to that of the patient, that the mingled fluid stuck to your hands, and that in separating your hands and shaking your fingers, you could draw it off again ; it is in effect what you will see verified. If the headache proceed from the stomach, this process alone will not succeed ; it will be necessary to act upon the stomach. If the blood tends to the head, it will be requisite, as I have said, to draw it down, and repeat the passes over the legs and over the feet. I have said that the fingers brought near and pointed towards the part, act more powerfully, and concentrate the fluid better than the extended hand. There is one other process, the action of which is much stronger, and which may be employed with success for local pains and for ob- structions. CHAP. II.] IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 29 Place a piece of linen several times folded, or a fragment of woollen or cotton cloth, upon the suffering part ; apply the mouth above it, and breathe through it ; it excites a lively sensation of heat ; and the breath, which is charged with the magnetic fluid, introduces it into the system. It is also observed that the heat is not merely at the surface, as that of hot iron would be, but it penetrates into the inte- rior. After having employed this process, make the usual passes to draw off and expel the pain. Blowing cold air from the mouth at a distance, produces a refreshing effect. It helps to dissipate the heat, which is withdrawn by presenting the fingers, taking care to separate them as you draw them off, in the usual manner. The head may also be cooled by putting the palm of the hands upon it, and holding the fingers elevated and separate. The fluid passes off at the ends of the fingers. It is often impossible to draw a pain far from the part where it is fixed ; and you will succeed solely by driving it off progressively, by little and little. A pain upon the top of the head will be lessened at first in the center, by waving the hands downward and outward, on the right and left. At every pass a portion will be dislodged and carried off. It will take more or less time to dissipate it entirely. I will not here relate the details given by M. Kluge, Professor in the Medical School of Berlin, upon the various kinds of manipulation.* What has been said suffices to indicate the processes that may be employed when no sen- sible effect has been produced. I will merely add that the action is more lively and penetrating by the digital manipu- * In the German work, entitled " Animal Magnetism as a cura- tive means." Vienna. IS" 1 * 30 OF THE PROCESSES [CHAP. II. lation, that is, when one presents the end of the fingers, than when he presents the hands open and the fingers straight, so as to have the fluid pass from all the interior surface. Manipulation with the open hand at a distance, is a process generally used to soothe; it is often sufficient to appease the sharpest pains, The fingers united to a point, concen- trate the action upon the part towards which they are di- rected. I am now going to recapitulate, in few words, what I have said upon magnetism with the long pass, by indicating the processes which are the most convenient at the commence- ment, during, and at the termination of the sitting. 1st. Establish the communication by holding the thumbs, placing the hands upon the shoulders, and making passes along the arms with a light pressure, and placing the hands upon the stomach. 2d. Direct the current from the head to the feet, or at least to the knees. Touching is useless. 3d. Make passes, or else magnetic frictions along the legs to the extremity of the feet ; soothe the patient by several passes at a distance with the open hand ; and finally, throw ofT the superabundant fluid by a few transversal passes. The first sittings ought to be about an hour in duration, w r hen there is no reason to prolong or abridge them. I say the first sittings, because a part of the time is consumed in establishing the communication. As soon as that has been once well established, the action of magnetism is manifested at the first moment ; then a sitting of half an hour or three- quarters, provided the labor commenced is duly sustained, will be sufficient. It is iv cessary to order the treatment in the most uniform and regular manner possible. The sittings must be period- ical, and equal in duration. The magnetizer must be calm CHAP. II.] IX ANDIAL MAGNETISM. 31 and self-collected ; all foreign influence must be banished ; all curious persons excluded, and also every other witness except the one chosen at first. There must be a similar degree of magnetic power exerted at each sitting, and the mode of procedure first adopted, must be continued. Nev- ertheless, when the patient experiences sensations, these often determine the operator to vary or to modify the processes. This then is the place to speak of these effects, and of the indications they afford of the manner of proceeding.* Before entering upon the details, I think it important to combat an opinion which appears to me entirely erroneous, although it is maintained by men well versed in the knowl- edge of magnetism, namely, that the processes are in them- selves indifferent : that they serve only to fix the attention, and that the will alone does all. People have been led to adopt this idea at the sight of a phenomenon which some somnambulists present, and by the application of a particular case to a general theory. There are some somnambulists perfectly concentrated, whose interior faculties are so energetic as to act upon themselves by their own power, and conformably to the will communicated to them by their magnetizer. The magnet- izer causes a headache or a side-ache to cease, simply because he icills it. There are likewise men endowed with such magnetic power, that they can act upon patients who are very susceptible and in perfect communication with them, while directing the action upon this or that part, by -lany magnetizers experience sensations which ought of neces- sity to govern them in the choice of processes. But as this precious faculty is not common to all, I shall in another chapter speak of the means of developing it in ourselves, and of the advantages arising from it. 32 OF THE PROCESSES [CHAP. II. the thought and by the look ; but these cases are extremely rare, and no conclusions can be drawn from them for ordi- nary practice. The processes are nothing if they are not in unison with a determined intention. We may even say they are not the cause of the magnetic action ; but it is indisputable that they are necessary for directing and concentrating, and that they ought to be varied according to the end one has in view. Somnambulists point out for themselves processes alto- gether different, according to the seat of the disease ; and when they advise a patient to have recourse to magnetism, they take great care to prescribe to him the processes he ought to employ. It is certain, that by proper processes, and not by the will only, one is able to displace a pain, to make it descend, to accelerate the circulation of the blood, to dissipate an obstruction, and to restore the equilibrium. There are cases when one does much good by placing his hands upon the knees, though he would do much injury by holding them long upon the stomach. Numbness, heaviness, disagreeable sensations, are produced by charging the head too much. It is often necessary to spread out the magnet- ism at the close of a sitting, and to withdraw the fluid by the extremities, in order to relieve him who is overcharged with it. When I said that a method different from mine might succeed equally well, I intended to say that each one might modify the processes according to his own views and prac- tice ; but not that he could omit them, or employ them in a manner contrary to the general rules. For example, vari- ous magnetizers act equally well by passes, more gentle, or more rapid ; by contact, or at a distance ; by holding the CHAP. II,] IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 33 hands to the same place, or by establishing currents. But it is absurd to believe one can cure chilblains on the feet, by placing the hands on the breast. There are some general processes that are employed at the commencement ; there are others that are suggested by circumstances, or by the effects first produced. We shall discourse of these in the next chapter. NOTE I. I have often remarked that persons who are not in the habit of magnetizing, think they ought to exert a great deal of force. For which purpose, they contract their muscles, and make efforts of attention and will. This method is not good ; it is often injurious. When the will is calm and constant, and the attention sustained by the interest we take in the patient, the most salutary effects ensue, without our giving ourselves the least pain. There are cases when it is necessary to make a violent effort, to oppose a false di- rection, to vanquish an obstacle, to sustain or terminate a crisis. We may then have need of extraordinary power ; but it is never at the commencement of a treatment, that we are obliged to have recourse to it. A person ought not to fatigue himself by magnetic processes ; he will experience fatigue enough from the loss of the vital fluid. NOTE II. I have said that at the close of each sitting, it is proper to relieve the patient of the superabundant fluid, by making transversal passes, and passes beyond the extremities ; and 34 OF THE PROCESSES. [CHAP. II. have hinted that it is sometimes better to draw off the fluid from the patient, instead of charging him with that of another ; but I neglected to insist upon this point, and to show the case where that negative method is of great im- portance. I will explain my views on this subject. When there is a great excitement of the nervous system, a great irritation, or a tendency to inflammation, you will always produce a soothing effect in drawing away the fluid. Jt also frequently happens that the ailment is drawn away with the fluid. Thus in the inflammation of the brain, it is proper to begin the passes at the lower part of the head, to draw it out either by the sides, or by the top. I will cite a remarkable fact, to which I was an eve -witness. M. H***, a mate of a vessel, went several days ago to see M. N***, of whom I shall soon make mention. About five years ago, he had a stroke of the sun, (coup de soleil,) and since that p*eriod, he has frequently felt violent pains in the head. One day when this pain caused him intense suf- fering, T. N*** thought of filling a glass with magnetized water, of covering it with linen cloth, so that in turning it over, the water might not spill out ; and he applied it, thus inverted, to the back part of the head of M. H***, who leaned dow T n for that purpose. Then he made passes from the head to the tumbler, to draw off the fluid and make it enter the water. M. H*** felt something pass from his head towards the inverted glass. He told me it was just like drawing out a fine stream of water. In five minutes the pain ceased entirely. I do not know whether it will ever return ; but there is no doubt that the same means will succeed in causing it to disappear. You might, in many circumstances, apply this process, which ought to be accompanied with the proper intention. CHAP. II.] IN ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 35 I believe that if, after the operation, any one had drunk the water contained in the glass, he would have experienced very disagreeable effects from it. NOTE III. A short time after Mesmer, who explained all the phe- nomena of magnetism by causes purely physical, some per- sons going into the opposite extreme, substituted in the place of this theory, a system of spiritualism. M.Ie Chevalier de Barbarin, a very pious man, but probably too much devot- ed to mystical ideas, pretended that all processes were use- less, and that faith and the will were sufficient to operate prodigies. Those who adopted his opinions, had recourse to prayers at the patients' bed-side, and often succeeded in curing them. The success they obtained proves nothing to support their principles ; and the state of concentration which this method demands, might give rise to bad consequences. Our spirit is the principle of voluntary movements ; it gives impulse to the nervous fluid ; but so long as it is united to organized matter, it is destined to act externally by the aid of the organs, either immediately, or by the emanation which is conveyed to a distance, like the rays from a luminous body. I have interdicted myself from all theory, and I would have been silent upon the opinions of the spiritualists, if there were not at this time men of good intentions, who, disdaining magnetism, undertake to treat patients by prac- tices which they think more powerful, and more efficacious. They obtain cures, undoubtedly ; they produce ecstatic som- nambulism ; and their somnambulists are persuaded they are inspired. This may lead into errors, and disturb the d 36 OF THE PROCESSES. [CHAP. II. imagination not only of the patients, but also of those who consult them. Let any one recal the singular ideas enter- tained by those who witnessed the somnambulists of Suede, and he will see that nothing can be more contrary to rea- son. Let us not then consider somnambulism as a super- natural state, in which they have celestial visions and inspi- rations ; but let us see in it the extension of our faculties, and perhaps the developement of an interior sense, which is t active when the external senses are slumbering. Let us employ magnetism as a means of aiding nature, of reani- mating strength, of establishing the equilibrium, of facilitat- ing the circulation ; and let us not imagine that man can give to himself or to others, the power of working miracles. If no other advantages were derived from the processes than that of curbing the imagination, it would still be necessary to make use of them. CHAPTER III. OF THE EFFECTS, AND THEIR INDICATIONS. Of the effects by which the action of magnetism is manifested, and of the modifications which the observation of these effects indi- cates in the processes. There are some patients upon whom magnetism does not act, owing either to peculiarity of constitution, to the kind of disease, or to a want of analogy with the magnetizer ; but this is very rare. It is less rare that the communication cannot be established until after several sittings ; whence one cannot presume that magnetism does not act, till after 1 of five days. In order to found this presumption even after this lapse of time, it is not enough that the patient has felt nothing when you have attempted to magnetize him. It is to be considered whether he has experienced no change in his condition; whether he does not find himself better, or whether his disease is not rendered worse by pursuing the ordinary course. It frequently happens that magnetism gradually re-establishes the harmony of the system without producing any sensation, and its influence is perceived only in the restoration of health. In that case you ought to continue zealously to follow the processes I have pointed out, without troubling yourself about the manner in which the magnetism acts, and without seeking for any apparent effect. By making efforts of the attention and of the will, and trying processes which are thought more active, you would fatigue 38 OF THE EFFECTS, [CHAP. III. yourself uselessly, and perhaps disturb the gradual and peaceful course of nature. The happiest thing that can happen to him who for the first time attempts to magnetize, is, to encounter a subject who is not insensible to the action of magnetism, and who nevertheless feels only slight and gradual effects from it. If the first patient whose case is undertaken is absolutely Unsensible to the action, one is apt to imagine he has not conducted the process aright, or else he doubts his own power, and in proportion as one doubts it, it really becomes enfeebled. If one were at first to see wonderful effects produced, he would be apt to yield to curiosity and enthu- siasm ; and the attention would be drawn from the essential object, which is a cure. To magnetize well, it is necessary to be very attentive, to be surprised at nothing, and to observe the effects produced, only the better to direct the action of magnetism. The instruction which I here give, has for its principal ob- ject, to prevent false ideas and exaggerated opinions, to which persons are liable to be exposed, for want of experience. They who adopt my principles, will not lose confidence in their powers because they have not at first succeeded ; they will not be precipitated into exaggeration because they have seen surprising things. They will know how to modify both the influence of their will, and the processes which they first employed. * There are patients in whom the influence of magnetism is displayed in two or three minutes ; others, who do not feel it for a long time. There are some in whom the effects are constantly increasing ; others, who experience at the first time all that they will experience in the course of a long treatment. We sometimes meet with persons who obtain CHAP. III.] AND THEIR INDICATIONS. 39 from it, the first day, results the most remarkable and salu- tary, but who finally become accustomed to it, and receive not the least advantage nor the least impression. The effects by which magnetism manifests its action, are greatly varied ; sometimes only one effect takes place, some- times several show themselves together, or successively, in the same patient. When these effects have been once pro- duced, it is very common to have them promptly renewed at each sitting. They change sometimes, in proportion to the change wrought in the malady. I will now describe the effects which are most commonly exhibited. The magnetized person perceives a heat escaping from the ends of your fingers, when you pass them at a little dis- tance before the face, although your hands appear cold to him, if you touch him. He feels the heat through his clothes, in some parts, or in all parts of his body before which your hands pass. He often compares it to water moderately warm, flowing over him, and the sensation precedes your hand. His legs become numb, especially if you do not carry your hands as low as his feet ; and this numbness ceases when, towards the close, you make passes along the legs to the toes, or below them. Sometimes, instead of communicating heat, you communicate cold ; sometimes also you produce heat upon one part of the body, and cold upon another. There is often induced a general warmth, and a perspira- tion more or less considerable. Pain is felt in the parts where the disease is seated. These pains change place, and descend. Magnetism causes the eyes to be closed. They are shut in such a manner that the patient cannot operkthem ; he feels a calm, a sensation of tranquil enjoyment ; he grows d* 40 OP THE EFFECTS, [CHAP. III. drowsy, he sleeps ; he wakes when spoken to, or else he wakes of himself at the end of a certain time, and finds him- self refreshed. Sometimes he enters into somnambulism, in which state he hears the magnetizer and answers him with- out awaking. As the state of somnambulism ought entirely to change the manner of magnetizing, and as it does not take place except in a small number of cases, we shall speak of it in a chapter by itself. Now, we are merely describing what occurs when there is no somnambulism, and pointing out the conduct to be observed in various circumstances. I said in the preceding chapter that one of the most ordi- nary effects of magnetism is to dislodge the pain, and make it pass down in the direction of the current given to the fluid. If when this is dislodged it does not at first reach the ex- tremities, you wjll succeed in forcing it thither in the subse- quent sittings. But there are cases, when this result requires uninterrupted action. For example, if the gout were seated in the head, and if in descending it is arrested at the breast or the stomach, it is essential to continue the action until it is conducted to the feet. The displacement of the malady is always a proof of the efficacy of magnetism ; but this displacement sometimes pro- duces very sharp pains ; instead of being troubled about these, it is necessary to magnetize during the succeeding days until they are entirely dissipated. I once saw a lady, who had a catarrh with a severe cough. At the first sitting the catarrh was cured ; but there remained in her limbs violent pains, which lasted three days, because she did not again have recourse to magnetism. The action of magnetism is sometimes accompanied with nervous movements, and very often a disposition to yawn ; CHAP. III.] AND THEIR INDICATIONS. 41 sometimes the patient experiences pains at the stomach, and nausea, which is even followed by vomiting ; at other times he experiences colic pains. These crises ought to give the magnetizer no disquiet. He ought to know how to calm those which are nervous, and to aid the tendencies of nature. It sometimes happens that the patient desires to have the sitting prolonged, sometimes to have it suspended, because he feels a species of irritation. In these cases it is well to follow his inclination as far as possible. I here repeat, that what I have just described are insu- lated effects, exhibited in various circumstances, with various individuals, at different times ; and are rarely united in the same case. Now let us see what modifications the observation of these effects ought to suggest in the processes. If the patient feels the sensation of heat or coolness from your fingers, content yourself with magnetizing with long passes, If the action of magnetism excites pain in any organ, concentrate the action upon that organ, in order to draw it away afterwards. If there be manifested any heat or heaviness at the head, attract it to the knees. If magnetism produces a sense of suffocation, or an irri- tation of the lungs, make passes, beginning below the breast, and continuing to the knees. If colics take place, and if they indicate, as they often do with women, that the circulation ought to be accelerated, avoid letting the hands stop at the breast, or even at the stomach ; carry the action to the sides and below them ; make passes along the thighs, and let the hands remain some time upon the knees. 42 OF THE EFFECTS, [CHAP. III. If the patient have pains at the back, make passes along the vertebral column. If you see any nervous movements, calm them by your will, first taking the thumbs or the wrists, and afterwards making passes at the distance of several inches, or even of several feet, with the open hand. If magnetism seems to act too powerfully, moderate the action, and render it more soothing, by making the passes at a distance. If the patient sleep, let him sleep tranquilly while you continue to magnetize him. When you wish to rest your- self, take the thumbs of the patient, or place your hands upon his knees. If the sitting has been long, and you are obliged to quit, rouse the patient gently, by telling him to awake, and by making passes sideways across the eyes. If the e}^es are closed fast, not attended with sleep, open them by some passes sideways, but not till the termination of the sitting. If after being roused, the patient feels anew the desire of sleeping, you will leave him to sleep alone, taking precau- tions that no one shall trouble him. Here I ought to observe, that the magnetic sleep is of itself essentially restorative. During this sleep, nature unassisted works a cure ; and it is often sufficient to re-establish the equilibrium, and cure nervous complaints. When you have ended the sitting, you will agree with the patient upon the hour when the next one shall take place, and you will endeavor to be exact. It is advantageous to magnetize every day at the same hour, and above all, not to change the hour agreed upon for many days in succes- sion. CHAP. III.] AND THEIR INDICATIONS. 43 Should the patient whose treatment you have undertaken, appear to have any contagious disease, you will take care to be always active while near him, so as always to impart, and not to receive ; that is to say, to sustain your attention, and employ your will, that you may constantly throw off the fluid from you. You will also avoid, as much as pos- sible, immediate contact. After each sitting, if you have the opportunity, you will cause yourself to be magnetized for some minutes to free yourself from the bad fluid with which you may be charged. If you cannot do this, you should pass your own hands along your arms to withdraw it and shake it off. If you experience fatigue, the open air, and especially the sun, will in a few minutes restore your energies. You should not magnetize when you have eaten heartily, and during digestion ; but it is often useful to take some- thing before the sitting to increase your strength. He who undertakes a treatment, ought in general to live temperately, avoiding all excesses, and to guard as much as possible against all things which tend to interrupt or disturb the ex- ercise of his physical and moral powers. I have laid it down as a principle, that when magnetism produces crises, it is dangerous to interrupt them. I will now explain what is meant by crises. Physicians give the name of crises to every sudden change which, supervening in a disease, modifies its progress or cha- racter, and enables us to foresee the result of it. These crises appear to be the effort of nature to free herself of the morbific principle. They are salutary when they operate completely ; they are injurious when the pa- tient has not strength to sustain them. They are manifest- ed by symptoms ; such as a removal of the seat of **>*» 44 OF THE EFFECTS, [CHAP. III. malady, a remarkable change in the pulse, evacuations, ex- cretions, eruptions, the gathering of humors, pains in certain parts, nervous motions, &c. In acute diseases, these crises generally operate on determinate days, which are called the critical days. Mesmer says there are no cures without crises. If, by this, he meant that the patient does not recover his health except by a change of state, it is so clear as to require no notice. If he meant that the cure is wrought by sudden change manifested by evident symptoms, it is not always true. For many diseases are cured by slow and gradual amelioration, without any one's being able to mark the mo- ment when they assumed a favorable character. A fever diminishes day by day and entirely ceases ; and a hundred other diseases are soothed and disappear when no one can determine the csruse of the cessation, any more than that of the attack. But it is true that in most acute diseases, the cure takes place by an evident change, which occurs all at once, in the state of the patient. Magnetizers have given the name of crises to the re- markable changes which the action of magnetism produces upon those who are subjected to it, or to that state which is different from the natural one, into which they are thrown by its influence ; and as, of all the changes of state which are produced by magnetism, somnambulism is the most sin- gular and most characterized, they have generally desig- nated it as a crisis, and they have called somnambulists, crlsiacs. The expression, thus limited, loses much of the significa- tion usually given to it by physicians ; but it suffices to be informed of it, that it mav not be mistaken. CHAP. III.] AND THEIR INDICATIONS. 45 I thought this explanation necessary, in order to let the reader understand the principle I have laid down. We come to the application. The magnetic action has put your patient into a state different from the ordinary state, which displays itself by divers symptoms, such as sharp pains in a part of the body, the sense of suffocation, nervous movement, spasms, a con- siderable perspiration, the impossibility of opening the eyes, drowsiness, sleep, somnambulism. You ought to allow the crisis time to develope itself, to calm the spasm by degrees, to concentrate the action upon the seat of the pain, then to draw it off, taking care that nothing check the perspiration, to dissipate by little and little the drowsiness or the sleep, if it be too much prolonged. But you ought never to wake your patient suddenly, nor permit any one to trouble him, nor ought you to quit him until the singular state into which you have thrown him has entirely ceased. The term magnetic state has been given to every state different from the natural one, and resulting from the mag- netic influence. This word is more general than the word crisis, and is not equivocal. You ought to avoid leaving the patient so long as he is in this state, during which a crisis rarely occurs. It is essential not to disturb the process of nature. When a patient is put into a profound sleep by magnetism, if he is touched by any one who rouses him roughly, he feels much evil from it. I have seen this thing produce convulsions or violent pains, render the return of somnam- bulism impossible, and even change to such a degree the condition of the patient, that he could not afterwards endure the action of magnetism ; and it was necessary to leave his restoration to time and regimen. 46 OF THE EFFECTS, [CHAP. III. Persons who have been for the first time put into som- nambulism, have been known to lose all at once the faculty of entering into it again, by being rudely roused from it. General rule. — Whenever any crisis is manifested, the magnetizer ought to develope it, to second the work of nature, and not to quit the patient until the crisis is at an end, and until he is brought back to his natural state. It is important to have the magnetizer free from anxiety on account of the pains which he may excite in the abdomen, and which are often renewed during several sittings ; these critical pains will disappear of themselves when nature has re-established harmony, and triumphed over the obstacle which is the cause of them. I ought here to speak of an effect happily very rare, but of which it is proper to forewarn those who are commencing the practice of magnetism, so that if it takes place, they may not be alarmed, and commit any act of imprudence. It often happens that the first impression of magnetism, produces a crisis accompanied with convulsive motions, stiffness of the limbs, and fits of laughing or of crying. In this case it is essential that the magnetizer be not alarmed. He ought first to take the thumbs of the patient, and tell him to be calm ; then he should make passes along the legs and feet, and withdraw himself in order to mag- netize him at a distance by the long pass. If he keeps him- self collected, suffers no one to approach, takes merely the necessary precautions, and trusts in his own powers, and the action of his will, the crisis will terminate, and the per- son magnetized will not be fatigued, and perhaps retain but a faint recollection of what has passed. If he wishes to continue to magnetize him, which will be very proper, he must, at the next sitting, as soon as he has CHAP. III.] AND THEIR INDICATIONS. 47 put himself in communication by holding the thumbs, mag- netize him by the long pass, with the intention of soothing, and not augment the action too fast, taking care not to shake the fingers. Above all, it is important for the mag- netizer to have a mind free from all inquietude, to act as if the patient were as free from it as himself, and to banish all witnesses who might trouble him. The effect of which I am about to speak is so rare, ex- cept in nervous and convulsive diseases, that I have not pro- duced them myself but three or four times, in the course of a practice of thirty-five years. I know very well that it has taken place many times, and been attended with bad consequences ; but it was in the hands of persons who mag- netized to make experiments, to exhibit phenomena, and not with calmness and the pure intention of doing good. I should hardly have dreamed of noticing this effect, if I had not recently seen an example of it which I am going to give an account of, the better to make myself understood, although this work is not intended to report facts in support of what I advance. I was desired several days ago, to instruct a lady who wished to magnetize her daughter, while laboring under a slight but long-seated disease, the cause of which was un- known. I caused the mother to sit by my side, and, to show her the processes, I attempted to magnetize her daugh- ter, who experienced not the slightest effect. The mother having told me that she herself had been once magnetized, and had felt the necessity of closing her eyes, I wished to see if I could act upon her. After trying the long pass four or five minutes, and pla- cing my hand upon her stomach, she cried out, " O, what E 48 OF THE EFFECTS, [CHAP. Ill- an agreeable sensation !" One minute after, she was seized with convulsive movements, her limbs were stiffened, her neck became swollen, and she threw her head back, uttering shrieks. I took her thumbs, and repeated to her several times with a tone of authority, "be calm." I made passes along the legs. I then withdrew a little, to magnetize by the long pass. Finally, keeping at a distance, I attempted to make transverse passes, in order to draw off and chase away the fluid. Her appearance then changed, but a laughing fit succeeded which lasted several minutes. She gradually became calm. She told me she felt very well, and that she did not believe she had suffered. Now if I had called in any one to hold her, or if I had been frightened, it is probable that the lady thus magnetized would have suffered for several days. If it is rare to produce convulsive movements by the method generally employed, after the instructions given by M. de Puysegur, it is not rare to meet with persons upon whom magnetism produces a nervous irritation, which leaves them, after the sittings, in an uneasy state of feeling. When you meet with subjects who are thus susceptible, it is proper to make use of the most soothing action, and to act from a distance. If, after three or four sittings, the same effect takes place, you may presume that magnetism is not good for the patient, or that the fluid of the magnetizer does not agree with him, and you ought not to persist in it. One might merely try, two or three times, other magnetizers. Many things remain to be said about the indications which may direct one in the choice of processes. These indications are of two kinds ; the first are furnished by the state of the patient, and will naturally find their place when CHAP. III.] AND THEIR INDICATIONS. 49 I speak of the application of magnetism to various diseases; the other belongs to the sensations which a practised and attentive magnetizer frequently experiences. I shall not discourse of these last, until I have mentioned the details relative to the employment of magnetism, to the crises it produces, and to the precautions that ought to be taken to obtain salutary results. But before ending this chapter, I ought to say a word upon the advantages one might obtain from a very feeble magnetic action, exerted by persons who have no idea of it, and by processes much more simple than the ones I have described. We often see, in the most laborious class of people, pa- tients to whom we presume that magnetism would do the greatest good, and whose treatment it is impossible for us to undertake. I will now explain how, and to what extent we can make their relations and friends supply our place for their service. Although I have thrown all the light I could into the ex- planation of the processes, it would be useless to cause it to be read by peasants and laborers, who are never occupied in any thing but their work. They would not understand it, or at least they would not know how to apply it. But one might give them verbal instructions which they will perfectly comprehend, and which will suffice to put them in the way of doing more or less good to the patient who in- spires them with a real interest. Here is the way to effect it. Say to the person who appears to you to have the great- est afrection for the patient, and who is with him the most, that he can soothe him by making slight frictions ; that these frictions make the blood circulate ; that the heat which escapes from the hand is salutary ; that by holding the 50 OF THE EFFECTS, [CHAP. III. hand upon the suffering part, the pain is lessened ; and that by passing the hand over the body, he may draw off the disease. Tell him that one person may communicate health to another who is sick, as we communicate disease to a well man, when we ourselves are diseased. You can even assure him that the heat produced by breathing through a linen cloth, is very good to relieve an obstruction ; and that blowing from the mouth at a distance, assists in soothing a local inflammation. You may add that the processes you are teaching produce no effect, when the person who em- ploys them is thinking of any thing else. If the persons to whom you address yourself are pious, you have a sure means of sustaining their attention, of directing their will, and of exciting their confidence. It is, to recommend to them to pray to God for the restoration of the patient, while they are engaged in acting upon him. When they are per- suaded that you give such advice through goodness, and that you do not doubt its efficacy, you will have little trouble In making them follow it. Then show them how they ought to put it in practice, by magnetizing for a quarter of an hour, and gaining the assistance of the person you are in- structing. While you are making this essay, guard well against seeking to produce any phenomenon. Try only to soothe pains, to bring heat to the extremities, and ease to the patient. Finally, warn them that, if the patient should fall asleep during the operation of passing the hands over him, they must not awaken him. It is desirable that no phenomenon may be manifested so remarkable as to aston- ish the one who is magnetizing him, but merely such effects as augment his confidence. Among the persons whom you have thus instructed, you will meet with some who, after CHAP. III.] AND THEIR INDICATIONS. 51 a few days, will magnetize very well, without any suspicion of what they are about. Ignorant people being often disposed to have faith in the efficaciousness of certain practices, one might point out to them as a curative means, a particular sign, or a form of prayer, objects which have received the benediction of a priest, or a sort of amulet. But this is what no one ought to do, because it is practising deception upon them, and the paramount obligation, is, to say nothing which we do not believe to be true : besides, the abuse of means, innocent in themselves, may keep up ignorance, and favor superstition. I have frequently obtained the most happy results from the sort of instruction which I have just proposed. The action of magnetism thus directed, is doubtless more feeble than it would be in the hands of one who is acquainted with the power of it ; it does not produce surprising effects, but it is salutary, and accompanied with no danger. I have often seen a man soothing the pains of a wife, and a wife soothing those of her husband, by conforming with simplicity and confidence to the directions I had given them. Two examples may be cited. 1. Oudin, an old soldier, whose case has been described by M. Ollivier, in his work " On the spine and its diseases," was paralysed from the hips to the feet. He could walk only by the aid of crutches, and his legs trembled continu- ally. He had most violent pains in the loins. He had been treated unsuccessfully at the Hotel -Dieu, afterwards in the fourth dispensary of the Philanthropic Society, when I directed his wife, although she was very feeble, to make slight frictions, almost without touching, from his hips to his feet. From the first day, the feet, which were very cold E* 52 APPENDIX. " We read in Chronicles, that the ghost of Hermotimus Clazomenius was accustomed to abandon his body for a time, and wandering up and down in far countries, used to bring home news from remote places, of such things as could not possibly be known, unless it had -been present there ; and all the while his body lay, as it were, half dead in a trance. This practice it continued so long, that at last the Cantharidse, who were his mortal enemies, took his body and burnt it to ashes ; and by that means disappointed his poor soul when it came back again, of that sheath, as it were, or case, where she meant to bestow herself." — Pliny, look 7, chap, 52. There is some similarity between the above relation, and the following, which is extracted from Watson's " Annals oT Philadelphia," page 235, edition of 1830. The good people of Caledonia have so long and exclu- sively engrossed the faculty of second sight, that it may justly surprise many to learn that we also have been favored with at least one case as well attested as their own. I re- fer to the instance of Eli Yarnali, of Frankford. Whatever were his first peculiarities, he in time lost them. He fell into intemperate habits, became a wanderer, and died in Virginia, a young man. He was born in Bucks county, and with his family, emigrated to the neighborhood of Pitts- burg. There, when a child seven years old, he suddenly burst into a fit of laughter in the house, saying he saw his father (then at a distance) running down the mountain side, trying to catch a jug of whiskey which he had let fall. He saw him overtake it. When the father came home, he confirmed the whole story, to the great surprise of all. The boy after this excited much wonder and talk in the neighborhood. Two or three years after this, the family was visited by Robert Verree, a public Friend, with other visiting Friends from Bucks county. I have heard in a very direct manner, from those who heard Verree's narra- tive, that he, to try the lad, asked him various questions about circumstances then occurring at his own house, in Bucks county ; all of which he ascertained to have been APPENDIX. 53 really so at that precise time! Some of the things men- tioned were these, viz.: "I see your house is made partly of logs and partly of stone; before the house is a pond which is now let out ; in the porch sits a woman, and a man with grey hairs ; in the house are several men," &c. When Verree returned home, he ascertained that his mill-pond before his house had been just let out, to catch muskrats ; that the man in the porch was his wife's brother, Jonathan ; that the men in his house were the mowers, who had ail come in because of a shower of rain. In short, he said every iota was exactly realized. The habit of the boy, when he sought for such facts, was, to sit down, and hold his head downwards, his eyes often shut ; and after some waiting, declared what he saw in his visions. He has been found abroad in the fields, sit- ting on a stump and crying ; on being asked the reason, he said he saw great destruction of human life by men in mu- tual combat. His descriptions answered exactly to sea- fights and army battles, although he had never seen the sea, nor ships, nor cannon ; all of which he fully described as an actual looker-on. Some of the Friends who saw him, became anxious for his future welfare, and deeming him possessed of a peculiar gift and a good spirit, desired to have the bringing of him up. He was therefore com- mitted to the mastery of Nathan Harper, engaged in the business of tanning, in Frankford. There he excited con- siderable conversation ; and so many came to visit him as to be troublesome to his master, who did what he could to discourage the calls. Questions, on his part, were there- fore shunned as much as he could. He lost his faculty by degrees, and fell into loose company, which of itself pre- vented serious people from having any further wish to interrogate him. To instance the kind of inquiries which were usually presented to him, it may be stated, that wives who had missed their husbands long, supposed by shipwreck for in- stance, would go to him and inquire. He would tell them, it is said, of some still alive, what they were about, &c. Another case was, a man, for banter, went to him to inquire E* 54 OF THE EFFECTS. [CHAP. III. When a patient has an issue, it frequently happens that it closes after several sittings. This ought to give the op- erator no anxiety. It is a proof that the humors have taken another course. I directed the treatment of a lady who had been very ill for many years. Two issues which she had been advised to keep open, closed in a few days. She was at first alarmed at it ; but very soon she found herself bet- ter, and in six weeks she was restored to health. CHAPTER IV. OF SOMNAMBULISM, AND OF THE USE TO BE ■ MADE OF IT. It is a well known fact that certain persons walk, speak and act in their sleep ; and that when they are awakened, they have no recollection of what they have been doing. These persons are called somnambulists ; that is, sleep- walkers ; and the state in which they are, is called somnam- bulism. The disposition to walk in the sleep, has been considered as a nervous affection which we should endeavor to counteract, because of the accidents which might spring from it. The apparent resemblance between spontaneous som- nambulism, and the crises which are often produced by magnetism, has induced men to call the latter magnetic somnambulism. A more appropriate name might have been found ; but as this has been received for forty years, it is useless to change it. Magnetic somnambulism, which we call, s\m\Ay^omnam- bulism, because that term cannot be equivocal in this work, is a mode of existence during which the person who is in it appears to be asleep. If his magnetizer speaks to him, he answers without waking; he can also execute various movements, and when he returns to the natural state, he retains no remembrance of what has passed. His eyes are closed ; he generally understands those only who are put in communication with him. The external organs of 56 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. sense are all, or nearly all, asleep ; and yet he experiences sensations, but by another means. There is roused in him an internal sense, which is perhaps the center of the others, or a sort of instinct, which enlightens him in respect to his own preservation. He is subject to the influence of his magnetizer, and this influence may be either useful or inju- rious, according to the disposition and the conduct of the magnetizer.* Somnambulism presents phenomena infinitely varied. A description of them may be found in a great number of works published upon this subject. This is not the place to de- scribe them. My design is solely to teach the means of obtaining the most useful results from this crisis, without exposing one's self to the least inconvenience. Of all the discoveries which have excited attention, from the remotest antiquity, that of somnambulism certainly gives us the most insight into the nature and the faculties of man. The phenomena to which it has drawn our attention, de- monstrate the distinction of two things ; the two-fold exist- ence of the internal and the external man in a single indi- vidual. They offer a direct proof of the spirituality of the soul. They make evident the truth known to ancient sages, and so well expressed by M. de Bonald, that man is an in- telligenc^erved ly organs. This advantage cannot be too highly appreciated, especially in an age when audacious minds do not fear to employ the researches of physiology to shake the certainty of the interior sentiment which reveals to us the dignity of man, his supremacy in the order of cre- ation, and his moral liberty ; a sentiment which is the basis * There are exceptions to the character here given, but they are extremely rare. CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 57 of social life, and which engages to the practice of virtue, by pointing out to us in a future life the developement of our earthly existence, and the recompense of sacrifices made to obey the dictates of conscience. On the other hand, somnambulism makes known to us the means of cur- ing diseases which are curable, and of relieving those which are not. It serves to rectify the errors of medicine as well as those of metaphysics. Finally, it points out the origin of a great number of opinions prevalent anterior to the exper- iments which have confirmed their correctness ; and it re- stores to the order of nature, a multitude of facts which phi- losophers have disdained to examine, either because igno- rance and credulity had altered some of their circumstances, or because, in the dark ages, they were made to serve as the foundation of superstition. Yet the discovery of somnambulism having been made, or rather renewed in our time, without our being prepared for it, and the application which can be made of it, demand- ing a meditative mind, great prudence, severe manners, re- ligious dispositions, gravity of character, positive knowl- edge, and other qualities which do not accord with the ami- able levity and excitable imagination of Frenchmen, it may be doubted whether its sudden propagation has not produced as much evil as good, and whether it would not have been better that this marvellous phenomenon had not been at first observed, and that people had confined themselves merely to magnetism as Mesmer taught it, and as many persons before him practised it, without knowing whether they em- ployed a particular agent, or a faculty common to all men. But it was impossible that they who devoted themselves to the practice of magnetism, should not be struck sooner or later with a phenomena which would not fail to present 58 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. itself. It was equally impossible that they should not have been seized with enthusiasm at the sight of the wonderful things which accompany it, and make it a secret. It was, finally, impossible that men who were strangers to the true principles of magnetism, should not seek to produce the same wonderful things, to exercise their power and satisfy their curiosity, and should know how to confine themselves within proper bounds to avoid dangers and errors. Hence it has resulted that magnetism has often been employed, not to cure diseases, but to procure somnambulism. And as somnam- bulists have faculties and means of knowledge which we have not, people have imagined they ought to know every thing, and have consulted them as oracles. If instead of yielding to enthusiasm, they had examined the phenomena by the lights of physiology, they would have perceived the danger of pushing too far a state during which an inexpli- cable change occurs in the functions of the nervous system, in the play of the organs, and in the manner of perceiving and transmitting sensation ; that the more the sensibility is exalted, the more ought they to be on their guard against what might increase that exaltation ; that at the extremity of the course which nature has marked out for herself, and which she has strengh to run over, preserving the harmony of all the faculties and the control of reason, an immense field is open to the imagination, in which illusions take the place of truth ; that somnambulism is only a transient crisis, of which it is necessary to make use without wandering from the design for which nature has produced it ; and that somnambulism too much prolonged, would give us habits which would not be in accordance with our ordinary desti- nation, and of itself would become a disease. CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 59 I will not insist upon these considerations, the develope- ment of which would carry me to a great extent. I propose to teach what it is necessary to know in practice, without entering into any discussion. Somnambulism is known ; it presents itself often in the magnetic practice ; let us see what are the means of always deriving from it the greatest advantage, and avoiding all misuse of it. The first advice I shall give, is, that you never seek to produce somnambulism, but to let it come naturally, in order to profit by it when it takes place. Many magnetizers, in order to produce it, charge the head very much ; and by this means, they often succeed in obtaining a false slumber, a reflux of blood towards the brain, and partial crises which are of no utility. This method is not without danger. It is much better simply to employ magnetism by the long pass, and not to charge the head more than the other parts. If nature is disposed to this crisis, the fluid will, of itself, be carried to the brain, and the tendency to somnambulism will be manifested by the patient's being in a state of tranquillity, by his closing his eyes, and by his sleeping. You may then, without any inconvenience, pass the extremities of your fingers five or six times at a short distance before his eyes, in order to give more intensity to his sleep. You may then ask him how he is, or whether he sleeps well. Then one of these three things will take place ; he will wake, he will not answer, or he will answer. If he awakes, somnambulism has not taken place, and you must not think any more respecting it in the course of that sitting. If he continues to sleep, without answering, F 60 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. there is reason to suppose he is entering into the somnam- bulic state. If he answers without waking, and, after his waking, has no recollection of your speaking to him, the somnambulism is real. In case the patient continues to sleep without hearing you, you will continue to magnetize him as I have pointed out ; and you will wait, before you put him a second question, until the moment before that at which you think the sitting should be terminated. ^ If he makes no more answer to this question than to the first, you will leave him to sleep tranquilly, or if you judge it necessary to rouse him, you may merely make transversal passes at a distance, bidding him to awake, in a gentle voice, and not commanding him with a tone of authority. If the patient makes a sign that he understands you, yet without answering, you will beware of urging him to speak. It is a happy thing for him to be by himself, to collect himself, and accustom himself to his new condition, and to arrange his ideas. You will merely ask him to let you know by a motion of the head whether he desires to be awakened, or to sleep longer ; and you will conform your- self as much as possible to his wish. You will continue in the same manner during the suc- ceeding sittings. Yet if this state of mute somnambulism is prolonged, you will inquire of him whether he hopes very soon to acquire the faculty of speaking ; whether you magnetize him well ; if he finds himself better for it ; and you may make all inquiries of him which he can answer by a sign and without effort. Have a perfect command of yourself, and beware of employing your will to influence your patient to speak, or CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 61 to make his somnambulism more profound. Have but one intention, entertain but one wish, that of facilitating the cure ; and leave nature to employ, of herself, the increase of power which you give him. It may happen that his somnambulism will not proceed further ; but this is of no consequence ; it is not your object to render him a somnambulist, but to cure him. If som- nambulism were necessary, if his constitution rendered him susceptible of it, this state would spontaneously develope itself. Merely observe what peculiar precautions this demi- somnambulism requires ; such as, not suffering those to approach him who are not in communication with him, not to oppose him, not to awaken him roughly, and to continue to occupy yourself about him. If your patient speaks, and to the question, "Do )'0u sleep?" answers, "Yes;" he is a somnambulist, but it does not follow that he is endowed with clairvoyance. Some persons have distinguished many degrees or shades of somnambulism. It is useless to occupy your time with all that, and there is no need for me to enter into this examination, to point out to you the surest and the most simple path, and te instruct you how to draw all the advan- tages possible from somnambulism, at whatever degree it may occur. When your somnambulist shall have given an affirmative answer to your first question, " Are you asleep ?" you may address others to him. These questions should be simple, clear, well adapted, and concise ; they should be made slowly, with an interval between them, leaving the som- nambulist all the time he wishes to reflect upon them. If you have been able to suppress your curiosity, which is 62 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. always more or less injurious, if you do not suffer yourself to be astonished to see one who is asleep answer you with propriety, if you have no other end in view but the doing of good, if you do not think of collecting observations, you will put only those questions which are necessary, The response made to the first one, will suggest others to you, always in relation to the means of curing the patient. The following may serve as an example of the series of questions to be first put to your somnambulist. Do you feel well ? Does my manner of proceeding agree with you ? Will you point out any other mode ? How long shall I let you sleep ? How shall I wake you ? When shall I magnetize you again ? Have you anyMirections to give me ? Do you think I shall succeed in curing you ? These questions will assuredly be enough for the first day when somnambulism has been induced. At the next sitting it ought to be induced sooner ; but you will not try to bring it on immediately, by charging the head. You will first employ magnetism by the long pass, anJ when your som- nambulist assures you that he is sleeping, you will let him have a little time ionger to collect himself. Then, after having repeated some of the preceding ques- tions, you may ask him whether he sees where his disease is ; if he says yes, you may request him to describe it ; if he says no, you may persuade him to look for it, observing to keep his attention to the point. You will take care not to form your questions in such a manner as to suggest replies which he can make without reflection, through CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 63 indolence, or the desire of pleasing you ; you must let him be occupied wholly with himself, with his disease, and with the means of cure. When he has once explained to you what he thinks of the nature of his disease, of its causes, of its consequences, of the crises he expects, you should ask him to search out the remedial means proper to be pursued in connection with magnetism. You should listen to him attentively ; you should take notes of what he tells you, if you are fearful of forgetting it. You should ask him whether he is very sure of the effect which his prescriptions will produce. And if in them there is found any thing which appears to you im- proper, you should make known to him your objections. You should especially take care to inform yourself well of the crises which are to bring on the cure, that you may not be alarmed at such as he has announced, and that you may know well the mode of soothing them. You must be exact in magnetizing him at the hour indi- cated by him, and by the processes which he judges most appropriate. You must ask him what things you ought to let him forget, what things it is proper to warn him of, and what means it is proper to take to induce him to follow out his own prescriptions. When he is awake, you should let him be entirely igno- rant of his being a somnambulist, and not let him suspect that he has spoken, provided he has not of himself expressly recommended that you should inform him of it, either to in- spire him with confidence in regard to any thing that disturbs him, or to induce him to follow a course of regimen, or to do something useful, which when he is awake is counter to his inclination. But, in this case, you will merely tell him p* 64 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV* what he believed absolutely necessary to know, and you will entreat him not to speak about it to any person. It is very rare that a patient has the curiosity to be informed of what he has said in a state of somnambulism. I believe, also, that it never happens, when the magnetizer, during somnambulism, has forbidden him to meddle with it after waking. I have indicated the kind of conversation you ought to hold with your somnambulist. I cannot insist too much upon a point on which chiefly depends the developement and the direction of his faculties. I cannot give any advice in relation to the details, because it would not be equally applicable to all cases. But there is a general rule from which you ought never to depart ; which is, never on any account, to permit any question of curiosity, any attempt to prove the lucidity of your somnambulist ; to speak to him solely of his disease ; to direct all his attention to the means he ought to adopt for the restoration of his health. His cure is your essential object, your principal aim ; you should not desert it for a moment. I know that one may sometimes profit by the confidence of a somnambulist, to combine with him the means of cor- recting his faults, .and of rendering his conduct more regu- lar, to break off dangerous associations, and in fine to apply to his ordinary state, the elevated moral sensibility which he exhibits in somnambulism. In this, one will not depart from the rule I have perscribed ; he merely gives it a greater extension. For it is then, in effect, a question about pre- venting or curing a moral disease, more distinctive than a physical one, and which often aggravates the latter. You are doing right, since you have really no other object in CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 65 view, no other idea, than the intention of doing good to him whom you magnetize ; and do not engage him except in that which is most essential to him. The faculties of somnambulists are limited Their surpris- ing penetration may be regarded as the effect of a concen- tration upon one single class of sensations, upon one or- der of ideas ; the more their attention is distracted by va- rious subjects, the less of it will they give to the essential object. If your somnambulist appears to meddle with things which do not promote his return to health, employ your will to withdraw him from them ; do not hear him ; and especially do not appear as if you were astonished at the proofs which he affords of his lucidity. You will excite his vanity, and that is very dangerous ; for when you have once awakened in him this sentiment, to which somnambu- lists are in general very much inclined, you can no more depend upon any thing. In the state of somnambulism, the moral sensibility is or- dinarily much more lively, and the somnambulists are often disposed to abandon themselves to the ideas or the senti- ments which have affected them in their common state. Endeavor to withdraw them from these, or at least do not say or do any thing which might favor this disposition. There are some somnambulists endowed with a surpris- ing clairvoyance which is extended to objects which are very distant, and entirely foreign to what interests them in the wakeful state. But these somnambulists are rare, and it is only with a great deal of precaution and reserve that we should have recourse to them. I shall return to this subject after having finished what I have to say about ordi- nary somnambulists. 66 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. It would be advantageous to the somnambulist to be alone with his magnetizer. As in most circumstances that would be inconvenient or improper, you will be careful to have only one witness, who is always to be the same per- son, and who takes an interest in the patient. You will banish all useless witnesses, all who are excited by mere curiosity, and especially all the incredulous. All such, must of necessity, distract your attention. He who is con- scious that another is watching his motions, does not act with the same single-mindedness and the same freedom, as he does who thinks himself alone. The idea of the judg- ment which the spectators will form, seizes him from time to time in spite of himself, and that prevents him from con- centrating all his faculties upon a single object. The more you are observed, with the less advantage will you magnetize, If there is a physician to whom you have imparted your attempt to pursue a magnetic treatment, and whom you have also engaged to attend when wanted, you will cer- tainly have a desire to let him see your somnambulist, either to convince him of the effects which you produce, or to give him an opportunity of forming an opinion upon the charac- ter of the disease-; but guard well against yielding to this conceit, which appears to have a useful purpose, though it really has its source in vanity. Nothing is more hurtful to a somnambulist than the presence of a physician who is not familiarized to the processes and the phenomena of magnetism. The physician and the somnambulist do not speak the same language ; they do not see in the same manner. Your somnambulist would wish to convince the physician ; he will conduct his conversation with much ad- CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 67 dress ; he will seek to answer all difficulties ; he will lose that simplicity which is necessary for his clairvoyance ; he will depart from the line which nature lias traced out for him ; he will make use of all the resources of his mind ; and, in the same degree, he will cease to have the facul- ties which are really useful to him. Give an account to the physician of what takes place, and you will do well ; but limit yourself to a simple and sincere relation of facts. What he does not believe on your authority, he will be- lieve no better when he sees it, unless he has made ex- periments, and every experiment is extremely injurious. To the reasons which I have given for excluding all kinds of witnesses, I can add another, which is stronger than the others. There are in most somnambulists a developement of sen- sibility, of which we can have no conception. They are susceptible of receiving influence from every thing that sur- rounds them, and principally from living beings. They are not only affected by physical emanations, or the effluvia of living bodies ; but also, to a degree much more surprising, by the thoughts and sentiments of those who surround them, or who are busy with them. If you are alone with a somnambulist, and any one is permitted to enter, the somnambulist generally perceives it. Sometimes the person who enters is indifferent to him ; at other times he feels for him either a sympathy or an an- tipathy. In either case it diminishes his concentrativeness. If he entertains a sympathy, his attention is divided ; if an antipathy, he suffers. If the stranger is incredulous, and suspects the sincerity of the somnambulist, or makes a jest of what he sees, the somnambulist is troubled and loses his 68 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. lucidity. If many witnesses surround the somnambulist and are occupied about him, the fluid of each one of them acts upon his organization, and as these various fluids are not in harmony, he experiences discordant effects from them. If you have around you only the persons who de- sire the cure of the patient, and if you magnetize them all to put them in communication, and all are in good health, the somnambulist may not be in the least disquieted. But it will be difficult to prevent many of the spectators from often occupying themselves with other things besides the patient. For, every time they occupy themselves with something else, they will break the communication, and these interruptions produce shocks, (secousses,) which dis- turb the tranquil reign of somnambulism. There is some- times among the spectators, some one who inspires the som- nambulist with a particular affection, of the most exalted kind ; and that would turn him aside from his attention to himself; the will of the magnetizer being no longer active, he does not exert the same control, and the somnambulism takes an irregular character. The greater part of som- nambulists, even in the hands of good magnetizers, have lost a portion of their faculties, because many persons in succession have been permitted to see them. At the close of the preceding chapter I said that in a mag- netic treatment, there ought to be only one will active, to which all others ought to be subordinate. This rule is es- pecially to be observed when you have somnambulists. M. de Puysegur has not failed to call attention to this ; and yet many well-informed magnetizers do not pay sufficient regard to it. As to those who try it for the first time, it is almost impossible that they should feel the importance of it y CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 69 and that even the desire of enlightening themselves upon the means of doing more good, should not mislead them from the path which would conduct them most surely to the ac- complishment of their object. It is proper to enter into some details upon this head. When a person who has no experience, obtains for the first time some of the singular effects which generally pre- cede lucid somnambulism, he thinks it would be useful to get acquainted with an experienced magnetizer. If he finds one, he entreats him to come and assist at the sittings, to give him instructions. This conduct, which is inspired by a very praiseworthy motive, is nevertheless in need of precaution, and I cannot point out the precautions except by recalling attention to two phenomena, the reality of which a great number of magnetic experiments demon- strate. 1st. Somnambulists, or the persons who are in a mag- netic state, feel the influence of those who approach them, especially of those who have an active will. 2d. Persons who are in the habit of magnetizing, natu- rally emit the fluid from them, and act powerfully, even without a determinate intention, upon those who are in the magnetic state. From this it follows that the presence of a magnetizer is never a matter of indifference, and that in certain circum- stances it might be more hurtful than that of one who comes out of curiosity. If the magnetizer disapproves of any of your processes, if he counteracts your action in any man- ner whatever, he will do an injury to your somnambulist. This inconvenience can always be avoided if he provides against it, if he is attentive to himself, and if, on your part, you take the necessary precautions. 70 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. When then you desire to consult with a magnetizer, and call him in to see your somnambulist, this magnetizer must put himself in communication with you, must submit his will to yours, must beware of acting alone, must occupy him- self only in concurring to the good you wish to do, must not seek the reason of the processes you employ, must not pretend to direct you in any thing, so that nothing shall affect your somnambulist except through you. When the sitting is ended, the magnetizer can make his observations and give you advice ; and, after having reflected upon the principles he has given you, you can adopt and make use of them. In my Critical History, book first, chapter fourth, I have related what took place the first time I produced somnam- bulism. I was a mere novice. I invited a magnetizer, a pupil of Mesmer, and who had great power, to instruct me how to make my somnambulist speak. He came to see him ; he did not touch him, and yet he exercised such an influence upon him, that the course of the somnambulism was entire- ly deranged, and my young somnambulist who had exhibit- ed for several days the most extraordinary clairvoyance, ceased to manifest his different faculties, to acquire suddenly that of expressing himself by words, and made no progress afterwards. May the instruction which I now give, cause others to avoid the numerous faults I committed before I ac- quired experience of my own ! I might here enter into many details relative to the es- sential character of somnambulism, the general cause of the innumerable modifications it presents, the distinction be- tween the states of wakefulness, sleep, and delirium ; and to the transitions from one of these states to another ; but I CHAP, IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 71 resolved to abstain from all theory, and limit myself to the giving of precepts, which I believe correct, without explain- ing the reasons of my adopting them. I will then simply say : If your patient become a somnambulist, have near you only the witness whom you admitted at the commencement, and who is in communication with you. Refuse absolutely to show him to any curious person, and let no one approach him except when it will be of utility, and with the precau- tions which I shall soon indicate. Put no questions to him except such as relate to his health, and graduate these questions so as not to fatigue him. Do not seek for won- derful effects; refrain, by all means, from relating those which you have seen. You can give yourself this satisfac- tion when the treatment is ended ; but until then, you ought to think only of the cure. If your somnambulist prescribes remedies for himself, you will contrive with him the means proper to be followed to induce him to take them when he is awakened. If among the remedies there are some that you cannot procure, or whose application presents too great difficulty, you will induce him to substitute others. If he requests you to magnetize him at an hour or under circumstances which render it impossible to you, you will explain to him the reasons that oppose it, and determine him to search out the means of supplying your presence, at the moment when he thinks it would be necessary to him. Some somnambulists, after having announced that their condition is very serious, consider it with a sort of indiffer- ence, and do not wish to give themselves the trouble of looking for a remedy. Others manifest a reluctance to G 72 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. examine their disease. The sight of the disorder which they perceive in their internal organs, affrights them. When this is the case, you must not partake of the fears of your somnambulist. You must exert the power of your will to determine him to a very scrupulous examination of his complaint, to consider without affright the interior of his own body, as if it were not his own, and to make efforts to discover the means of cure. If you are calm, and know how to exert your will, your somnambulist will certainly obey you ; he will recover himself, and explain to you the actual danger, and the means of removing it. Perhaps you will not succeed in curing him ; but you will procure him all the soothing influence possible, and you will know to what you ought to direct your efforts. Do not lose hope, even when he assures you that his disease is incurable. Somnambulists ha¥e often said at the first sittings, that it was impossible to rescue them from death, and afterwards have found the means of restoration to health. When your somnambulist gives you a description of his disease, you must listen without interrupting him.* You may afterwards request him to explain more clearly and more in detail, what you were not able to understand. You may interrogate him about things which you ought to be acquainted with in order to perform your own duty well, but you should go no further. Ask him no anatomical questions. He perceives the seat of his own disorder ; he sees the lesion which existsin one part ; but it is rare that he sees the situation, the form, and the tissue of his organs, especially of those which are not affected. If you make him talk beyond this, you will obtain from him only vague and perhaps erroneous views. He will not make a mistake CHAP. IV.] AMD ITS MANAGEMENT. 73 either in foretelling a crisis, in pointing out a remedy, or in describing the effects it will produce ; but he could easily give you explanations which would be ridiculous in the ratio of the interest you display in hearing them. You do not interrogate your somnambulist to dissipate your doubts, for you ought not to have doubts ; if you have, you would magnetize very badly ; nor is it to satisfy your curiosity, for this would withdraw you from the principal object ; nor is it, finally, to acquire a knowledge of physiology, anatomy or medicine ; for what a somnambulist says is not applicable to any but himself. Confine yourself to the knowledge of what is requisite for his restoration, and take care not to let his imagination dwell upon things foreign to this object. If he busies himself about persons absent, bring him back to what concerns himself, without permitting yourself to wonder at the faculty he possesses of seeing at a distance, and without seeking new proofs of this faculty. Some circumstances authorize the magnetizer to admit some one to his treatment ; there are also some which make it his duty to do it. I will give examples, and show how one ought to conduct himself in such cases. If your som- nambulist often mentions to you a person who interests him, and desires you to bring him in, and you see no inconvenience in doing it, you may yield to his wish. Thus a woman in the magnetic state might be continually dwelling upon her daughter, whose state of health gives her anxiety, and to whom she wishes to give advice. Do not refuse to let her enter, and put her in communication. The same might be said of a husband, or an intimate friend. If your somnambulist gives proofs of remarkable lucidity, and affirms that he is able to know the disease of another, 74 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. as well as his own, and if a consultation would not fatigue him, you could consent to it, in order to render service to one who desires it, and has confidence. But these consul- tations ought to be rare, and you ought never to permit two to be held the same day. You ought also to avoid trusting the direction of many patients at a time to a somnambulist. He can hardly take the same interest in all, identify himself alternately with each, and manage them well. As to the rest, it depends upon the faculties of the somnambulists.* In all cases, it is necessary to avoid fatiguing them. Before introducing a patient to your somnambulist, you will let him touch something that the patient has worn, so that he may tell you whether he feels any repugnance to it, and whether he sees any danger in being put in communication wjth him. When you have introduced the patient, you will require him to speak only of his health, and if the conversation takes another turn, you will oppose it. You will not permit any one to give your somnambulist any token of gratitude ; he should not be moved by any other desire than that of doing good. You will not suffer your somnambulist to be magnetized indiscriminately by any person. The somnambulists who are in communication with several magnetizers, end by losing their lucidity. If indispensable business forces you to interrupt the treatment of your somnambulist, have an understanding with him to find some one to supply your place. Should * The sensibility, the clairvoyance, the power of attention, differ prodigiously in different somnambulists, and in the same somnam- bulists at various times. CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 75 the interruption be only for a few days, the magnetizer taking your place, should act only in your name, according to your views and your method, and under your direction. If the interruption is to be of long continuance, you should give up your somnambulist entirely. If your somnambulist has caprices, you will oppose them by letting him know your will, without dispute. Never suffer him to get the upper hand of you. You ought to yield all that will conduce to his good, and resist his fantastic notions. You are for him an attentive and benevolent? but a just and inflexible providence. If your somnambulist has pangs of conscience, (peines morales,) which aggravate his malady, seek with him the means of easing them. You will console him, and profit by his confidence to soften his chagrin, and destroy the cause. If he has any inclinations which you disapprove of, employ your ascendancy in vanquishing them. You must avoid most carefully, penetrating into the se- crets of your somnambulists, when it is not evidently useful to him to have these secrets known to you. I need not add, that if he tells you things which he would not have told you in the ordinary state, you will never permit your- self to impart it to any person, not even to your most inti- mate friend. I have already said, that if the somnambulist prescribes for himself, remedies which appear improper for his state, the magnetizer ought not to depend upon his first sugges- tion. I ought to insist upon this point. It is infinitely rare that a somnambulist orders for him- self a remedy which would be injurious to him, or mis- takes in regard to the doses ; yet this may happen, for there G* 76 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV, are instances of it ; and though it happen but once in a thousand times, it would be a sufficient reason for taking the greatest precautions. I am going to explain the possi- ble causes of mistakes, and the means of preventing the con. sequences. The state of somnambulism is not always accompanied with a perfect clairvoyance ; and that clairvoyance, when it is manifested id the most surprising manner, is often rela- tive to a certain order of ideas, and variable in its inten- sity. For the proper exercise of it, the somnambulist must concentrate his faculties upon a single object, without dis- traction, without trouble, without the intervention of any foreign influence to change the direction of his mind. It is necessary that the interest he takes in the object which oc- cupies his mind, should determine him to make efforts of attention, to vanquish his indolence, and free himself from all the prejudices of his ordinary state. One might te]l me that the interest which the somnambulist takes in his own health, will prevail with him over every other considera- tion ; that he will see his own body more distinctly than any thing else ; and if there be in him an instinctive faculty, he will exercise it upon his own wants. This would appear to be the case, but it is not always so. Many somnambulists, either through vanity or excess of benevolence, are more fond of being busy about others than about themselves. Others are unwilling to examine their own disease and the consequences it may have ; others again, seem to set little value upon their cure. They think they shall be more happy, when their souls shall be freed from the bondage of matter. The magnetizer, instead of being amazed at this species of exaltation, should employ CHAP* IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 77 all the power of his will to bring it to an end, and to induce the somnambulist to be occupied only with his own health. All that I have said in this chapter tends to show the im- portance of these principles, and if my readers have confi- dence in me, they will keep themselves free from enthusi- asm, which is much more dangerous than incredulity. But suppose a somnambulist is occupied only about his own physical state, and his own cure ; suppose his clairvoy- ance is real, and he speaks from his actual perceptions, and not from anterior impressions ; he may nevertheless com- mit an error in the treatment he prescribes for himself. This is owing to a cause to which it is proper to call atten- tion. It often happens that a patient when put into a state of somnambulism, is afflicted at the same time with several very dangerous diseases ; and that the treatment which is proper for one, is not proper for another. The somnambu- list at first is employed upon the organ the most affected, the most severe and painful malady ; he fixes his attention upon that which gives him the most uneasiness; and in consequence prescribes remedies for himself, without exam- ining whether they are not otherwise injurious. I have lately seen an instance of this. A somnambulist whose lungs were affected, and whose stomach was much impaired, ordered for her stomach, a remedy which would have probably aggravated the disease of the lungs. The mag- netizer made some observations to her about it ; she agreed that these observations were just ; she put off the use of the remedy she had prescribed for herself; and fifteen days afterwards she cried out of her own accord, " How glad I am that you did not permit me to take the medicine I 78 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. thought of taking ; now the state of my lungs allows me to make use of it." She was in fact cured. She would not have been, if the magnetizer had been less prudent. It may be laid down as a general rule, that when the som- nambulist is attacked by several diseases, he is naturally induced to fix his attention upon that which appears to him the most serious. Some precautions will now be given by which you may be sure of preventing the dangers springing from too much precipitation, or from blind confidence. When your somnambulist prescribes for himself a rem- edy which appears to be unsuitable to his condition, you will make your objections to him ; you will engage him to examine the state of his organs successively, and with the greatest attention, and give you an account of them. You will request him to explain the reasons which have induced him to choose the remedy in question, and to describe ac- curately the effects he anticipates from it. You will pre- sent him the medicine and make him touch and taste it. You will request him to tell what a dose should be, not only by the name of the measure or weight, but by show- ing you the quantity which he wishes to take. If after all these precautions, he persists, you may depend upon him. It seems impossible to me that, in the state of somnambu- lism, an individual should entertain the criminal project of putting an end to his own existence ; and I could not be- lieve that, after having carefully examined a deleterious substance, he would not reject it. Yet if it should happen that the prescription of a somnambulist may put his life in imminent danger, the magnetizer, it is evident, ought not to CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 79 conform to it. Repeated proofs of great clairvoyance and purity of intention, are doubtless powerful motives of con- fidence. But they do not give us the entire certainty, which alone may authorize us to make use of an unknown means, where an error would be attended with fatal conse- quences.* Somnambulists often prescribe for themselves remedies which they have heard spoken of, or of which they have formerly made trial ; in place of which one might substitute others much more efficacious. You should then call their attention to that which appears more proper for them, and discuss the motives of their choice. Many things might be added in relation to the direction of somnambulists; but I think they will be naturally deduced from the principles which I have laid down. I return to the manner of applying the processes when somnambulism has been induced. The somnambulist always indicates the processes which are proper for him ; so that there can be no uncertainty * An epileptic patient who was under magnetic treatment at the Saltpetriere Hospital, declared the only means of curing her, would be to excite in her, in the most critical circumstances, and by vio- lent means, a sudden fright, which would naturally put her life in the greatest danger. For three months she insisted upon the same thing. They finally resolved to follow her advice, and the result was a cure. But they who did this were able physicians. The}- knew the desperate state of the patient ; they had never seen her make mistakes ; they judged that the shock indicated might pro. duce a salutary crisis, which could not be obtained by any other means ; and their profession authorized them to calculate the chances of danger and success. A magnetizer, who was not a phy- sician, would not have been able to assume such a responsibility. 80 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [ciIAP. IV. about them. These processes, a re sometimes very laborious and very fatiguing to the magnetizer; they demand from him patience, courage, and devotedness ; yet they are indispensable to deveiope and happily terminate a crisis essential to the cure; but this is very seldom. The greater part of the time, nature labors alone during somnambulism, and you have no need of doing any thing more than to hold the thumbs of the somnambulist, or place your hand upon his knees, or even to be busy about him. You need not magnetize him longer than he judges useful, on the days and at the hour he intimates. If it is essential not to interrupt a crisis at its commencement, it is often injurious to prolong it beyond the necessary time. There are somnambulists who fear the impression of too strong a light. "I have seen some of them who caused themselves to be bandaged across the eyes ; but there are others who experience fatigue by closing the eyelids, and who request to have their eyes opened. The magnetizer succeeds in doing this by making passes across the eyes, without its diminishing the intensity of somnambulism. The somnambulist then seems to be in his natural state ; but it is necessary to watch over him with the precautions he indicates. There are cases when this non-apparent som- nambulism can be very useful, as we shall soon see. When we wish to ask the somnambulist a question, it is necessary to explain our will by words. Good somnam- bulists understand the will without our speaking to them. But why should we employ this mode when there is no need of it? It is an experiment, and it is a rule which every one ought to adopt, to interdict all experiment. I agree that there are cases where it is expedient to employ only CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 81 the influence of the will. For instance, there may be near you a third person, and you perceive your somnambulist, who thinks himself alone with you, about to say things which this third person ought not to know ; you will impose silence by your will. At the close of the sitting, when you wish to waken your somnambulist, you will first make passes along the legs to free the head, then you will make some across the eyes to open them, saying to him, wake ! The eyes often remain shut after the somnambulist is awakened. You will bring them from this condition, by patiently passing your fingers many times across them. Then you will disperse the fluid from the head, and from the rest of the body, by passes made crosswise at a distance, in order to scatter and shake it off. You will have the precaution to continue this until your somnambulist shall be perfectly roused from sleep. It is of the very greatest consequence to establish a line of demarkation, well defined, between the state of somnam- bulism, and the natural state of wakefulness. The som- nambulist, when he is awakened, ought to preserve nothing, positively nothing, of the sensations which he experienced, nor of the ideas which occupied him in somnambulism. Som- nambulism, prolonged beyond the necessary time, imparts a nervous susceptibility which is attended with great incon- veniences ; it ought to cease after the cure. If it should continue and renew itself spontaneously, it would itself be a disease. I have already noticed that it would always be expedient, as far as possible, to let the patient remain ignorant that he has been a somnambulist ; and that, excepting certain very rare cases, it is proper never to repeat what he may have 82 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. uttered. For it would establish between the ideas of the natural state, and those of somnambulism, a relation which is contrary to the natural order ; and which equally alters the habitual faculties, and the somnambulic faculties. If you know how to control yourself by your own will, your patient will never be informed of any thing which you think ought to be kept from him. Somnambulists perfectly abstracted, whose interior facul- ties have acquired great energy, are often found in a frame of mind of which you might avail yourself advantageously to make them follow a course of regimen, or to make them do things useful for them, but contrary to their habits and inclinations. The magnetizer can, after it has been mutu- ally agreed upon, impress upon them, while in the somnam- bulic state, an idea or a determination which will influence them in the natural state, without their knowing the cause. For instance, the magnetizer will say to the somnambulist, " You will return home at such an hour ; you will not go this evening to the theatre ; you will clothe yourself in such a man- lier ; you will take your medicines without being obstinate ; you will take no liquor ; you will drink no coffee ; you will occupy yourself no longer in such a thing ; you will drive away such a fear ; you will for gej, such a thing" The somnambulist will be naturallv induced to do what has been thus prescribed. He will recollect it without suspecting it to be any thing more than a recollection of what you have ordered for his benefit ; he will have a desire for what you have advised him, and a dislike to what you have inter- dicted. Take advantage of this empire of your will and of this concert with him, solely for the benefit of the patient. Your will probably acts merely in modifying his, and you CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 83 might obtain from him the performance of indifferent things to which he would devote himself to please you ; but this would be contrary to the spirit and design of magnetism. You may often find it in your power, while your patient is in the somnambulic state, to induce him to take a medi- cine for which he has a repugnance. I have seen a lady, who had a horror at the sight of leeches, cause them to be applied to her feet during somnambulism, and say to her magnetizer, " Prevent me from looking at my feet when I awake." In fact she never suspected that any one had applied leeches to her. Many somnambulists are endowed with inconceivable address, and can perform certain operations as well as the best surgeons. I am acquainted with a lady, who, in the state oY somnambulism, opened a swelling beneath her breast, and dressed the wound until it was healed. This address of somnambulists, can be useful to others as well as to themselves, especially when it is accompanied with clairvoyance ; there are some cases even, when they can render the greatest service, I will instance a midwife who, having become a somnambulist during a disease for which she caused herself to be magnetized, preserved the same faculties after her restoration to health. When she is called upon to exercise her profession, if the case appears to present any difficulties, she goes to her magnetizer, who puts her into somnambulism, and opens her eyes. She de- clared to me, that in this state, she could act with much more address, strength, and certainty. In January last, she in this manner very successfully delivered of three children, a woman whose state was very dangerous. Among the phenomena which somnambulism often pre- sents, there is one from which persons might, under certain 84 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [cHAP. IV. circumstances, derive a great advantage. It is that of ab- solute insensibility. There are many somnambulists that one could pinch and prick very hard without their feeling it. One of the somnambulists that was in the Saltpetriere Hospital received no impression from a bottle of sal volatile applied to her nose ; and when experiments in magnetism were made at the Hotel Dieu Hospital, moxas were applied to two somnambulists who were not awakened by them. Persons have concluded from these dangerous experiments, that if a surgical operation were necessary to a patient susceptible of magnetism, it might de done without causing pain ; and it is true in certain cases. But although this in- sensibility is displayed by nearly all somnambulists, which have been at the Hotel Dieu and the Saltpetriere, it is far from being general. I am even inclined to think it would never occur, if the magnetizers did not overcharge their subjects, and if they took care to preserve the barroonj the system. My somnambulists have never exhibited it to me. On the contrary, their sensibility was more delicate than in the natural state ; the contact of a body not m netized was disagreeable to them ; and the touch of a stran- ger gave them a great deal of paifl. 1 am also certain that somnambulists have experienced convulsions, and ha\ awaked, by having been roughly touched by some one who was not in communication. I know that a magnetizer can by his will paralyze any limb of his somnambulist; but he ought never to permit himself the trial of this experiment. As to the rest, if a patient has need of an operation that is painful, we should learn from him whether it ought to be performed during somnambulism, or during the natural state, and what pre- cautions ought to be taken to insure success. CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 85 The absolute insensibility of the organs of sense and of those of motion, united to the exaltation of sentiment and of thought, are sometimes symptoms that life is drawing towards the brain and the epigastrium. The spirit seems then to disengage itself from the organs, and the somnam- bulist becomes independent of the will of the magnetizer. This state, to which the name of ecstasy, or magnetic exaltation has been given, and which many German authors have considered as the most elevated state of magnetism, is exceedingly dangerous. You could not suddenly wake one who is in it, and if you should succeed in doing it, he would remain in a state of excessive weakness, and perhaps of paralysis, which you could not put an end to without great exertion. I know not how, then, to recommend too highly to magnetizers to oppose the developement of this crisis. 1 believe even that it would hardly ever present its If, if the somnambulist were to busy himself only about his own health, and if one were to take care to free the head and to re-establish harmony, when he sees the limbs stiffen and become insensible. I shall return hereafter to this subject. The details into which I have entered, appear sufficient to make you acquainted with somnambulism, as it frequently presents itself in the course of a magnetic treatment, and of the means of directing it to a useful purpose, and of avoiding its inconveniences. I have also said with sufficient distinctness, that this crisis, if you oppose the workings of nature, might become as hurtful as it would be salutary if you have the wisdom to listen to her and aid her. I know that some instances of success obtained by imprudent rash- ness, might be cited ; but these instances are rare. Wise 86 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV, cautiousness can never be a disadvantage ; and when we desert it, we expose ourselves to the greatest dangers. There remains, then, nothing essential to say upon the application of somnambulism to the treatment of diseases ; and when I commenced writing this chapter, it did not enter into my plan to go farther.* I resolved to pass over in silence the extraordinary phenomena. I thought that those who had not seen analogous ones, would regard me as a visionary ; and that such a reputation would not only be afflictive to me, but might also put an obstacle in the way of my doing the good which I wish to do ; for people will be guided by the counsels of a man subject to illusions, no more than by those of a man void of good faith. But after having devoted reflection to it, I thought it my duty to yield to more important considerations, and to elevate myself above the fears excited by self-love. I am determined then to speak of a very singular state, because it may be presented to others as it has been to me and to many of my friends, and which it is important to know, that it may not * Various somnambulists exhibit very different phenomena ; and the only distinctive and constant character of somnambulism, is, the existence of a new mode of perception. For instance, there are abstracted somnambulists; there are others who are not. Some of them exhibit a species of attraction like magnetic needles ; others have only the internal faculties. Some of them have all the sensa- tions concentrated at the epigastrium ; others make use of some of their senses. There are, finally, some of them, who? after wakino-, preserve for a certain time the recollection of the impressions they have received, and of the ideas they have had during the crisis. I was obliged to limit myself to explain what takes place most com- monly, and to teach what it is necessary to know to assist nature, and to derive from somnambulism the greatest advantage. CHAP. IV.] AND ITS MANAGEMENT. 87 be confounded with the exaltation of which I have already pointed out the danger, and that its developement may not be counteracted. I am first going to describe the species of somnambulism of which I wish to speak. I will then tell how one ought to conduct himself with those who have reached that state, if he would derive any advantage from it, to them or to himself. In this state the circulation is regular, the heat is equal through all the body, and the members preserve their sensibility. The somnambulist is so thoroughly in com- munication with his magnetizer as to read his thoughts, but receives no impression through the organs of sense. It is no longer the sensation which produces ideas ; on the contrary it is the ideas which produce sensations. In the ordinary state every thing parts from the circumference to reach the center ; in this, every thing parts from the center to reach the circumference ; and this circumference sometimes extends to illimitable distances. But it is not this which characterizes the degree of somnambulism of which I speak. It is the absolute indifference to what appertains to terrestrial objects, to the interests of fortune or of reputation. It is the absence of the passions and the opinions by which one is governed in the ordinary state, and of even all acquired ideas, of which they can very well preserve the recollection, but to which they no longer attach importance. It is the little interest that they take in life ; it is a novel manner of viewing objects ; it is a quick and direct judgment, accompanied with an intimate conviction. The somnambulist appears to have lost the faculties by which we are directed ; the impressions and notions which H* ^6 OF SOMNAMBULISM, [CHAP. IV. come from without, do not reach him ; but during the silence which he observes in regard to what is foreign to his soul, he feels within himself the developement of a new lifj whose rays are darted upon all that < in him a real interest. At the same time the sentiment of conscientious- ness is aroused, and determines the judgment which he ought to form. Thus |] nnambulist po same time the torch which him his light, ami the compass that points out hi . Tlii i and compass are not the product of somnambulism; tli always in us; but the distfl s of this world, passions, and above all pride and attachment to ible things, prevent us from per* the other. When the somnambulist has f ex- altation, his manner of speaking is almost alwaj from that which he has in hi pure and simp . r uniini uncea in hi a distinct vi'-w of that of which i, and a* convict v. Jfou the least of what is e . in the success of the attempt, impossible as it had been to restrain her in the use of those articles. I accordingly en- joined upon her in the most impressive manner not to in- dulge herself in their use. The day following, having pro- cured an apple, she wished to eat it, but found herself under the control of a mysterious influence which rendered it mor- ally impossible. It seemed to her that a person told her while asleep not to eat such things, " and," said she, " I do not think I shall be able to eat one all summer." I soon found that I had not included in my prohibition one important item, namely, tea, in the use of whieh she had for years been in the practice of freely indulging, and which I believed to exert so unfavorable an influence upon her nerves, that I had for a long time employed every means to induce her to abandon it, but without success. I therefore issued the order, and, as every law has usually its appropriate penalty, I annexed it as follows, namely, that the use of the smallest quantity should be followed by nausea. The experiment was perfectly successful, all succeeding attempts to take tea being followed by distress- ing sickness. As long as she remained in the family where she then was, she continued unable to take either tea, or the interdicted articles of food. I was two months after- wards informed that those habits remained corrected, and it is to be hoped that they are permanently cured. Another somnambulist I had observed to have the habit of conveying air into the stomach in the act of swallowing. Suspecting that the practice tended to increase the distress which she sometimes experienced at the stomach, I directed her to swallow no more air, or, if she did so, that she should be seized with a pain in the throat. This pain was actually observed by the inmates of the family where she was boarding, to seize her twice on the day following, and she afterwards informed me in somnambulism, that she believed she was getting cured of the habit. A third patient had long indulged freely in the use of tea and coffee, and they had become, as she supposed, absolutely necessary to enable her to continue her labor. Endowed, as she was in her somnambulism, with the faculty of pre- APPENDIX. 109 vision of a character almost perfect in regard to the exacer- bations of her own disease, and the effects which were to result from different agents, I desired her to examine the influence upon her system of tea and coffee. The result of her examination was an acknowledgment of their bad effect, and her consent that I should break her of the habit of using them. I accordingly issued the prohibition, ac- companied with the penalty that they should taste unpleas- antly, and be followed by nausea. The next day, to her utter astonishment, (for she retained while awake no trace of what had occurred in her somnambulism,) both her tea and coffee were not only offensive to her taste, but the forced introduction of small quantities into the stomach from the conviction that she could not do without them, was fol- lowed by distressing sickness of considerable duration. The various attempts which she has at intervals made to take them have for months been followed by the same re- sults. A similar course was subsequently pursued in regard to snuff. She had long been in the habit of using this arti- cle in considerable quantities. The result of her examina- tion of it during her somnambulism was that it was deci- dedly prejudicial, but that its use ought not to be at once abandoned. She accordingly consented that I should re- strict her to the use of six pinches daily. I did so, adding the injunction that whatever she should take beyond the prescribed number should seem extremely nauseous and offensive. She assented, but went on for some time after waking, in its use as before. At length, after taking a pinch, the sudden contortions of her countenance, and her strong exclamations of loathing and disgust, plainly indicated what had occurred. She had unwittingly transgressed her lim- its ; she had taken the prohibited pinch, and could take no more during the day. The following day she could take it, but her passion for it daily diminished, as she was several times dreadfully annoyed by the seventh pinch. The habit was thus entirely broken, and but a trifle in comparison, has been used in several months. She attributed the effect to the constant use of magnetized water. K 112 APPENDIX. incisors cut off to a level with the gums, and holes v. drilled into the roots of them, preparatory to inserting arti- ficial ones. She afterwards had seven artificial teeth in- serted. The operation was not all performed at one time, but at two or three different sittings. Every part of the work usually attended with any pain, was done while was asleep ; and, according to all appearances, and her own testimony, she was not sensible of any pain. She was several times asked by Dr. Brownell, during the most painful part of the operation, if it hurt her ; she ys replied by saying, u Does what hurt ?" W. T. ESTEN. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn. The readers of the Boston Medical and Surgical Journal will remember a similar case detailed at length by Dr. Ben- jamin H. West, in the twenty-second number of the four- teenth volume of that valuable work. The operation - performed by Dr. Harwood, Surgeon Dentist, or; an epileptic patient of Monsieur Bugard, an accomplished French tee er of that city, in the presence of Professor Tread well, of Harvard University, Doctors Ware, Lewis, Lodge, A. D. Parker, Esq., and Messrs. Ware, and West, medical students. The latter gentleman, the writer of the article, had previously extracted a molar tooth from the same pa- tient, who was a girl of nearly thirteen years old, without producing the slightest indication of feeling on her part. Trie Taunton Whig, of September 13th, gives an account of a similar operation by Dr. Nahum Washburn, upon an intelligent young gentleman, now a medical student of that town. The character of the witnesses who are named, pre- cludes the possibility of a doubt in regard to the literal cor- rectness of the relation. It is bo it singular that in Taunton almost all the somnambulists are men. A gentleman who had a carious tooth, was desirous of ngit extracted while under the magnetic influence, and seated himself for that purpose. He was put into a state of perfect magnetic sleep in the course of five minutes, at a APPENDIX. 113 distance of eight feet, by a friend who had magnetized him many times before. In that state he remarked that the room was too light, and a silk handkerchief was therefore bound over his already closed eyelids. Being then asked if he wished to have his tooth extracted, he answered that he did. After a lapse of a few minutes, the magnetizer, standing at a distance, willed him to open his mouth, which he did, ask- ing at the same time if it was wide enough. " The magnetizer then retired to an adjoining room, and the operation was performed during his absence.* I was near the patient, watched him closely, and did not observe any sign of suffering. There was not the slightest contrac- tion of a muscle either of his face or limbs during the oper- ation ; no change of the countenance or of the respiration. His whole body remained as perfectly composed as in the most quiet natural sleep. A bowl was placed under his chin, but he made no effort to free his mouth from the blood which flowed out between his lips, until the magnetizer re- turned, and loilled him to do so. " He inquired ' what made him spit so much ;' and shortly after complained of the 'stuff running down his throat.' Being asked what it was, he replied, after tasting, that he 1 did not know.' * Dr. Cleveland, of Pawtuxet, mentioned to the translator a cu- rious fact, which fully agrees with what has been asserted in a pre- vious note, namely, the somnambulist always appears to know what his magnetizer is doing. Having put one of his patients into the somnambulic state, for the purpose of performing a slight surgical operation, he found that he could not do it himself, because the patient, though insensible to the touch of others, exhibited towards himself a perfect conscious- ness and sensibility, which he could not annihilate long enough to continue the operation. The moment his mind was fixed upon the object, it was withdrawn from the exertion of the will, so that con- sciousness and sensation instantly returned to baffle his purpose. It may be further observed, that in Cloquet's excision of a cancer- ated ulcer, mentioned in part first, the patient was magnetized by another person. If this should be discovered to be a general prin- ciple, we shall see one more reason for Deleuze's instruction to keep the intention well sustained. 112 APPENDIX. incisors cut off to a level with the gums, and holes were drilled into the roots of them, preparatory to inserting arti- ficial ones. She afterwards had seven artificial teeth in- serted. The operation was not all performed at one time, but at two or three different sittings. Every part of the work usually attended with any pain, was done while she was asleep ; and, according to all appearances, and her own testimony, she was not sensible of any pain. She was several times asked by Dr. Brownell, during the most painful part of the operation, if it hurt her ; she always replied by saying, '" Does what hurt?" W. T. ESTEN. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn. The readers of the Boston Medical and Surgical Journal will remember a similar case detailed at length by Dr. Ben- jamin H. West, in the twenty-second number of the four- teenth volume of that valuable work. The operation was performed by Dr. Harwood, Surgeon Dentist, on an epileptic patient of Monsieur Bugard, an accomplished French teach- er of that city, in the presence of Professor Treadwell, of Harvard University, Doctors Ware, Lewis, Lodge, A. D. Parker, Esq., and Messrs. Ware, and West, medical students. The latter gentleman, the writer of the article, had previously extracted a molar tooth from the same pa- tient, who was' a girl of nearly thirteen years old, without producing the slightest indication of feeling on her part. The Taunton Whig, of September 13th, gives an account of a similar operation by Dr. Nahum Washburn, upon an intelligent young gentleman, now a medical student of that town." The character of the witnesses who are named, pre- cludes the possibility of a doubt in regard to the literal cor- rectness of the relation. It is somewhat singular that in Taunton almost all the somnambulists are men. " A gentleman who had a carious tooth, was desirous of having it extracted while under the magnetic influence, and seated himself for that purpose. He was put into a state of perfect magnetic sleep in the course of five minutes, at a APPENDIX, 113 distance of eight feet, by a friend who had magnetized him many times before. In that state he remarked that the room was too light, and a silk handkerchief was therefore bound over his already closed eyelids. Being then asked if he wished to have his tooth extracted, he answered that he did. After a lapse of a few minutes, the magnetizer, standing at a distance, willed him to open his mouth, which he did, ask- ing at the same time if it was wide enough. « The magnetizer then retired to an adjoining room, and the operation was performed during his absence.* I was near the patient, watched him closely, and did not observe any sign of suffering. There was not the slightest contrac- tion of a muscle either of his face or limbs during the oper- ation ; no change of the countenance or of the respiration. His whole body remained as perfectly composed as in the most quiet natural sleep. A bowl was placed under his chin, but he made no effort to free his mouth from the blood which flowed out between his lips, until the magnetizer re- turned, and ivilled him to do so. " He inquired ' what made him spit so much ;' and shortly after complained of the ' stuff running down his throat.' Being asked what it was, he replied, after tasting, that he ' did not know.' * Dr. Cleveland, of Pawtuxet, mentioned to the translator a cu- rious fact, which fully agrees with what has been asserted in a pre- vious note, namely, the somnambulist always appears to know what his magnetizer is doing. Having put one of his patients into the somnambulic state, for the purpose of performing a slight surgical operation, he found that he could not do it himself, because the patient, though insensible to the touch of others, exhibited towards himself a perfect conscious, ness and sensibility, which he could not annihilate long enough to continue the operation. The moment his mind was fixed upon the object, it was withdrawn from the exertion of the will, so that con- sciousness and sensation instantly returned to baffle his purpose. It may be further observed, that in Cloquet's excision of a cancer- ated ulcer, mentioned in part first, the patient was magnetized by another person. If this should be discovered to be a general prin- ciple, we shall see one more reason for Deleuze's instruction to keep the intention well sustained* K* H4 APPENDIX, " He was permitted to sleep a few minutes more, when the magnetizer went into an adjoining room, and willed him to awake m ten minutes. In precisely that time there was a considerable movement of the eyelids. The sleep continued three minutes longer. Soon after awaking, he observed the bowl containing the blood, in a chair by his side, and immediately placing his finger upon the cavity, asked with the appearance of great surprise, if his tooth had been extracted. He declared that he was not until then aware that the operation had been performed. " The tooth was a large one, had two stout fangs, and came out unusually hard. It was one of the molar teeth of the under jaw. " I have shown this communication to Messrs. C. R. At- wood, Hiram M. Barney, Samuel C. West, Horatio Gilbert, Francis S. Munroe, and Jonathan Hodges, who were pres- ent, and to Dr. Nahum Washburn, who operated, and have their authority to state that it is an accurate recital of the incidents of the scene." q Note 30. ^ The following letters are inserted for the purpose of grat- ifying a rational curiosity in regard to the wayfarings of the spirit in somnambulism. Many others are in prepara- tion for the third part. They are from gentlemen who are well known in this quarter, and their authority is second to none which can be produced. The reflecting mind will find in them enough to excite activity of thought, and the most sensual, enough to be kindled into a spiritual flame, though it flicker and be temporary in its rising. That the human spirit hath power to leave the body and take cognisance of things distant in space, is but an elementary truth in this branch of psychology. He who cannot grasp the evidence on which it rests, with a firm hold, will find himself con- stantly vacillating between belief and incontinence of faith ; APPENDIX. 115 but he who has once weighed it, and suffered the conviction to produce its legitimate effect, will find his notions of things to come, quickened and informed, and be happy in the con- sciousness of immortality. For if we are convinced that the spirit can be absent or partially absent from the body, and while deriving little or no sensation from it, be engaged in real scenes in other climes, we are furnished with the j aliment which strengthens our conceptions of a separate spir- itual existence, so that the doctrine of a future state appears to be consequent upon our nature, if not susceptible of direct proof. FROM E. L. FROTHINGHAM, ESQ. Boston, Oct. 3, 1837. Dear Sir — I have just received your note of the 30th ult., containing a request that I should send to you some account of my experience in animal magnetism, while on a visit to Providence in August last. You are perfectly wel- come to all my experience, and should be still more wel- come w r ere it of greater importance. The facts which I have to state are more general in their character, and of course less satisfactory in some respects, than they would have been, had I not been so limited in time. On this ac- count they may not be thought of sufficient importance to require their publicity ; as many others may be furnished, if I may judge from what I have heard related by others, which are much more circumstantial, and therefore more generally interesting. Hearing from many sources of the wonders of animal magnetism previous to my visit to Providence, and being anxious to satisfy myself of the real or visionary character of these phenomena, on my arrival there, I obtained an in- troduction to Dr. CaprVn, who, upon being made acquainted with my wishes, very politely expressed a willingness to gratify my curiosity, and appointed a meeting for this pur- pose on the afternoon of the next day. At the time ap- pointed I was introduced to Miss JBrackett, the interesting young woman whose case you have laid before the public. 116 APPENDIX. After the process of magnetizing had been completed, she, at the request of Dr. Capron, rose from her chair, to which she had been previously led in a helpless state, walked through the room with the greatest confidence, avoiding the chairs which stood in her way, and passed into the next room. In a few moments she returned, equipped for a walk, and, accompanied by one of the family, but without any assistance, passed rapidly down a flight of stone steps into the street, and disappeared. The change from sight- less helplessness to clear-sighted confidence, was remarkably striking. In a few moments we followed, and on stopping at the house where she had been directed to go, we found this blind young lady, now endowed with more than natural sight, running through the house like a young girl let loose from school on a holiday, and examining pictures in a very novel manner, by placing her back towards them. After being seated, she, at the request of Dr. Capron, agreed to accompany him to Boston. For being a stran- ger to her, and unaccustomed to such odd ways of travelling, I did not feel myself competent to take charge of her. The journey to Boston was accomplished in about one minute, passing, as she said, through the air, on a line with the rail road. On arriving at the depot in Boston, she was directed through several streets, complaining all the while of being jostled by the crowd, to my residence. She described cor- rectly the external appearance of the house, and upon en- tering, three members of my family in a very particular and correct manner, even some particular points of dress quite unusual, which upon my return to Boston I found to have been correct. I also ascertained that the individuals of the family not described by her, were absent at that time. From some cause, however, nothing more could be extract- ed from her, the answer to all questions being, " You can see them as well as I." As she appeared to be so uncom- municative, a second meeting was appointed to take place on the evening of the following day, which I attended with a friend, Mr. Nathaniel W. Brown, of your city, being the only individuals present at this experiment, excepting the members of the familv. APPENDIX. 117 Miss Brackett appeared to be in the magnetic sleep when we arrived. In a few moments after, Dr. Capron, having other engagements for the evening, left the house, placing Mr. B. and myself in communication with Miss Brackett, and directing her to wake at half past 9 o'clock. As some time was consumed in visiting Mr. B.'s house, which resulted very satisfactorily to him, there was some- thing less than an hour left at my disposal previous to the time set for the termination of her sleep. This, you must be aware, was altogether insufficient for a full experiment, as it is impossible in these cases to hurry any thing ; and this, joined to that unwillingness to describe formerly allu- ded to, renders the facts obtained less particular and numer- ous than I ^ wished. However, although not fruitful in par- ticulars, this experiment may be found to illustrate some principles in the most striking manner ; and this, after all, is the principal object. The same process was employed in accomplishing the journey to my house in Boston as before, and her descrip- tion of its external appearance was in the same words. Upon entering the house, she described a painted carpet and a very peculiar table which were in the entry. As she said there was no individual in the lower part of the house, I invited her up stairs into the parlor. In this room, without any leading questions being put to her, she described many of the principal articles of furniture, ornaments, and pictures, in the order in which they are placed in the room, and in such a manner that each article was immediately recognised by me, although her descriptions were general. Upon entering the room I asked her to tell me what there was in it that pleased her. She immediately commenced describing a figure with her hand, as if passing over a solid smooth substance. " What are you looking at ?" " Why ' this portrait." "What kind of a portrait is it ?" " Why, it is white ; how smooth it is !" " How heavy is it ?" " It is very heavy. I should think it was marble." " What kind of a shelf does it stand upon?" " It does not stand upon any shelf; cut on a projection from the fire-place." This was her description of a marble bust, weighing not far from one 118 APPENDIX. hundred weight, standing upon a doric stove, which pro- jects into the room. She distinguished differences of size, figure, weight, color, and surface, (as smooth or rough,) in the articles which she described ; and although many things were omitted, and some only partially indicated, not the slightest mistake was made, although many attempts were made to mislead her. The subject of two pictures, which she very obstinately refused to give me a description of, she very readily described to me when she awoke. In this room, she recognised my daughter, and said she had seen her be- fore, but could find no other person in the house. I then asked her to pass into the chamber, and look for the child- ren. After a moment's pause, she stooped over and turned her hand, as if turning down the clothes of a bed, and said there was a child asleep ; but that his head was entirely covered with clothes. At this she seemed quite disturbed. She said the child was very uncomfortable, and that " it was not healthy to be so covered up." As there was now very little time to spare, I said, " Let us go down stairs ; perhaps we shall now be able to find the rest of the family." In a moment she said, " Good evening." (3n asking her whom she saw in the room be- low, she described three individuals, two of whom she re- cognised as having seen the day. before, and the other as an elderly Quaker lady, whose very peculiar dress she de- scribed with the greatest accuracy, and with considerable humor. This was the close of my experiment, as the time fixed by Dr. Capron for her to awake was near at hand ; and I hastened to conduct her back to Providence. I ar- rived at the end of my imaginary journey just as the time expired, at which moment she awoke. On my return home, I ascertained that all her descriptions relating to the individ- uals of my family, were perfectly correct. At the time of our supposed visit, my daughter was alone in the house, with the exception of the children, who were in bed, and sitting in the room where she was described to be. The other three members of the family did return about the time at which our experiments concluded, and were in the lower room, as described by Miss Brackett. APPENDIX. 119 Furthermore, Mrs. F., on visiting the little boy on her re- turn, found him in precisely the uncomfortable situation, which so much distressed the sympathetic invisible visitant. You will excuse me from making any observations or offering any opinion upon these remarkable phenomena. As facts, you are perfectly welcome to them, and to make what use of them you please ; being satisfied that all re- markable facts, but particularly those of a character not referrible to any known principle, should be made public. Yours truly, E. L. FROTHINGHAM. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn. FROM MONS. B. F. BUGARD. Boston, October 10th, 1837. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn, Dear Sir — I do not delay a moment to answer yours of the 7th inst. At another time you shall hear from me again ; at present I will relate a fact about a somnambulist. About three months ago I went to the house of Mr. L., to spend an evening. I found him and his lady at home, and with them their son A., Mrs. C: a French lady, and Mr. G., a friend of mine. Mrs. C, not feeling very well, one of the company suggested to me that I ought to magnetize her. Having offered my services to relieve her in that way, she accepted the offer. I put her asleep in less than five min- utes. As it generally, though not always, happens in such cases, she answered all my questions. This lady has come to this country with her husband, leaving in Paris her mother and three children. After a little conversation, during which she drank some tea, I sent her home to Paris to look after her family there. She an- swered a question in relation to their health, by saying that her eldest daughter was not well, but was affected with sore 120 APPENDIX. eyes ; that a certain physician was in attendance, whom she named distinctly, but whose name is at this moment out of my memory ; that her second daughter had a cold, and that her little son was perfectly well. Upon asking her whether her mother had attended church during the day, it being Sunday, she replied that she attended in the morning, but not in the afternoon. On being requested to look at the clock, and tell the time, she replied without hesitation, "four o'clock;" and on making the calculation myself, I found her to be correct.* I soon after awoke her by the mere exertion of my will. She was not aware of having taken any tea, and although she put the question to every one in turn whether she had taken any, she remained unconvinced of what she had act- ually done. About five or six weeks after this experiment, Mrs. C. received a letter from her mother, confirming every particu- lar she had said concerning her children. I would observe that when awake, I asked her what o'clock she thought it then was at Paris. She was obliged to calculate, and in giving the answer she was far from be- ing positive. -If any one desires to know who these persons are whose initials only are given, I shall at any time be ready to give them, together with such additional proof as may be wanted. I am, Your obedient servant, B. F. BUGARD. * I have tried this experiment by sending several somnambulists far to the west. The result showed a correspondence between the time and the longitude, though the signification of the latter word was unknown to two of them. I began a correspondence with a friend to test clairvoyance at the distance of a thousand miles ; but because the first visits were unsuccesful, my friend sunk, like an- cient Peter, through the want of faith, and all his subsequent let- ters have miscarried. — Trans, CHAPTER VII. OF THE INCONVENIENCES, THE ABUSES, AND THE DANGERS OF MAGNETISM, AND OF THE MEANS OF PREVENTING THEM. The opposers of magnetism, after declaring that it does not exist, have declaimed against the dangers which attend it. I will not stop to prove that what they have said of the processes employed to put it in action, and of the effects it produces, is very far from the truth, and that the anecdotes they have cited to render it odious, are entirely foreign to it. I agree that magnetism has been sometimes abused, and is still liable to be abused again. But a danger ceases to be important, when we are warned of it, and have easy and certain means of avoiding it. Magnetism is an agent of inconceivable power. Its utility depends upon the way in which it is employed; and in this it is like fire, the use of which is not interdicted for fear of conflagration. They who will conform to the doctrine laid down in the preceding chapters, will never have occasion to fear the least inconvenience from the use of magnetism. Yet as many of my readers may not see the importance of the precautions I have recommended, as others may be alarmed by what has been said of the bad consequences of some treatments, as others, finally, may reproach me with having misstated the motives of those who condemn magnetism, I think it proper to devote an article to recapitulate and develope what has been said on this subject. I would 180 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. rather fall into repetitions, than leave the least uncertainty about things which are essential. I am now going to point out the inconveniences, the abuses, and the dangers of mag- netism, and I will show that all, without exception, will be infallibly avoided by applying the principles which I have established. To obtain more order and clearness in this discussion, I will consider magnetism under three points of view ; and I will speak, first, of the moral dangers which may attend the practice ; secondly, of the disorder which a wrong direction of this agent, or the want of some essential conditions, may produce in the animal economy ; thirdly, of the inconven- iences which spring from a blind confidence in somnambu- lists, and from the erroneous opinions to which a person is sometimes conducted by a sight of extraordinary phenomena. 1. Of the moral dangers of magnetism, and of the means of obviating them. In describing the processes, 1 said that we might employ light frictions, the application of the hands upon the chest, upon the heart, upon the knees, blowing with the mouth, looking steadily at the patient, &c; but I also said that these processes pointed out as the most active, may be laid aside for others, which, sustained by the will and the atten- tion, will be equally efficacious. When a man is desired to magnetize a woman who is ill, he ought to avoid what- ever may wound the most scrupulous modesty, or cause the least embarassment, and even whatever might to a spectator seem improper. He will not place himself directly in front of the person whom he intends to magnetize ; he will not request her to look at him; he will merely ask her to CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 181 abandon herself entirely to the influence of the action ; he will take her thumbs during some moments, and he will then make passes at a distance without touching her. It is unnecessary to observe that some one of the family or a female friend ought always to be present. If the magnetic processes are attended with any incon- veniences, it is neither in society, where one is obliged to avoid impropriety of conduct, nor in the public treatments, where all things are ordered in a decent manner. It is in the hospitals, and I ought to fix the attention of superintend- ing physicians upon this point ; not that they should restrain the employment of this salutary agent, but that they should direct and oversee the method of employing it ; for it will be their fault if any thing reprehensible should be mingled with the good which ought to be derived from it. I will explain. Physicians and medical students attached to the hospitals, are now beginning to try the action of magnetism. They choose in preference young women or young girls attacked with nervous diseases, because they believe them more sus- ceptible, and more likely to present curious phenomena. As they are accustomed to touch indiscriminately all the patients, either to ascertain the seat of disease, or to dress -their wounds and ulcers, and as they never have any other idea than that of fulfilling the duties with which they are charged, they do not suspect that the magnetic processes demand a particular reserve, and precautions taken before- hand to banish every thing which might act upon their imagination or upon that of the patient. I am willing to believe that they respect themselves so much as never to permit the least thing injurious to modesty, and to repel every thought foreign to the end proposed ; but the very 182 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. effort which is made to chase away an intrusive idea, turns one aside from the object which alone ought to occupy the attention. They ought therefore to distrust themselves, to dread equally the impressions which they can experience, and those which they can produce, and to take measures in advance, so that nothing shall trouble the purity of an in- fluence which has at the same time both a physical and a moral effect. These are the counsels which I ought to give in relation to this subject, until magnetism is so generally known, es- tablished, and practised, as to render them unnecessary. When a physician intends to magnetize a woman who keeps her bed, the clothes ought to be kept over her. If she can rise, she ought to be clad in the most decent man- ner. The physician will not touch her except to take her thumbs, or to make frictions along the feet outside of her garments. All the passes will be made at a distance. It is often necessary to concentrate the action upon an organ ; for example, upon the solar plexus, the liver, or the spleen. In this case he will present the fingers brought to a point, or else he will make use of a glass or steel rod, in order to avoid touching. It would be proper to have a nurse near the bed during the sitting. No person should enter the room. The magnetizer should not permit himself to make any experiment, and if he obtains somnambulism, he will ask the patient only about her disease, and the means of curing it. He will give an account to the chief physician of the results of the treatment. It may happen that a nurse, endowed with intelligence and kindness, may perceive with her own eyes, the efficacy of magnetism, and feel the desire and the power of doing good. In this case, the magnetizer will excite her confi- CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 183 dence, and get her to take his place after giving her suita- ble instructions how to proceed. He will always recom- mend to her not to speak. The time is not yet arrived for nurses to consider the exercise of magnetism as one of their most important functions. I have here spoken of the employment of this agent in the hospitals merely because several trials have been re- cently made of it there.* I suppose that if the young phy- sicians continue to occupy themselves with it, they will not neglect to learn the conditions essential to the success of the trials which they would make to furnish a powerful auxiliary to therapeutic medicine. Let us return to the employment of magnetism in society. The precautions already pointed out will suffice to banish all the inconveniences attending it, when it is merely intend- ed to make use of it several days, and when neither som- nambulism nor magnetic sleep presents itself. But there must necessarily be many others in chronic complaints which appear to require a very long treatment, and whose cure is preceded by crises and by a decided magnetic state. In these kinds of diseases, magnetism between persons of different sexes ought to be proscribed, unless the principles and morals of the two individuals prevent the fear of an im- proper influence. The only men who can undertake the treatment of a young woman are the father or the husband. * It is now used in them very extensively in many parts of Eu- rope. Sir David Brewster says that the medical colleges in Ger* many have professors whose business it is to deliver lectures on this subject in its connexion with medicine. I have learned the same fact from an intelligent German, and from several travellers. — Trans. Q* 184 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. I have told the reason in another place. I think it useless to go into greater details. I ought only to point out the ex- ceptions to what I have given as a general rule. These are to be sought in the advanced age of one of the parties ; and in the difference of circumstances in which they are found. I foresee that some one will seek to put me in contradic- tion with myself. " You have," says one, " an hundred times uttered the wish that physicians only would make use of magnetism ; how then can women be magnetized unless by men ?" This is my reply. It is to be desired that experienced physicians only should be charged with the direction of the magnetic treatments ; but it is one thing to have the direction of a treatment, and another, to perform the manipulatory processes. A physician might gather round a magnetic reservoir a great number of sick persons of all ages and of each sex, and devote his • cares to each one according to circum- stances ; but he cannot charge himself with a direct treat- ment, but by observing all the proprieties, by banishing all the possible dangers, and preventing even ill-founded sus- picions. He must therefore cause another person to take his place to magnetize a female patient, and choose for this purpose a woman instructed by him how to proceed, and having equally the confidence of himself and that of the pa- tient. I say more ; when magnetism shall be generally recog- nised, when it shall become an essential part of medicine, and this time is perhaps not far distant, the physician who has an extensive practice, will have two treatments, one for men, and another for women. He will thus avoid affording occasion for improper remarks. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 185 As magnetism establishes confidence and friendship be- tween the magnetizer and the patient, the precaution of in- terdicting the use of it between persons of different sexes, is not the only one to be taken, especially in regard to young persons, being as they are more susceptible of new impressions. If the father or the mother cannot themselves magnetize their son or their daughter, they ought to know the character ana 1 the principles of the person who performs the office for them, not only because opinions are commu- nicated by intimacy, but because in long treatments, and particularly when somnambulism occurs, the magnetizer will at length, even without his own knowledge, exert a moral influence capable of modifying the humor, the senti- ments, and the principles of him to whom he restores health. As to the rest, persons who without any selfish motive undertake the treatment of a disease, are urged by the desire of doing good ; and charity supposes almost all the virtues. What has been related of the dependence which som- nambulists have upon their magnetizer, has given rise to ill-founded prejudices against somnambulism. But this de- pendence is only relative. It has necessary limits, and cannot have the consequences which some have dreaded. The somnambulist preserves his reason, and the use of his will. When he perceives that the magnetizer designs his benefit, he yields to him ; and fortified by him, he deter- mines to vanquish a bad habit, to resist an inclination or an injurious fantasy, to take a medicine to which he feels a repugnance, and which he has judged necessary. He profits by the ascendancy of the latter to work for himself, and to put himself in an advantageous position, which may be continued in the waking state. Sometimes he obeys the 186 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. orders of his magnetizer in things that are indifferent, be- cause the desire of satisfying him predominates over the reluctance which he experiences ; but the magnetizer could not obtain from him either the revelation of a secret which it is his duty or his interest to conceal, nor things essentially contrary to the principles of honesty to which he is attached in the common state. A reprehensible act of volition would cause him to revolt, and throw him into convulsions.* The experiments which have been made to show that one could make somnambulists obey his will, have alwa}'s been experiments of curiosity, without any moral danger, but very imprudent, since they fatigue the patients uselessly, and may prevent their restoration. People will absolutely interdict them when magnetism shall be so well known as not to astonish by its phenomena, and when they are well convinced that it is a sort of profanation to employ for amusement a faculty which God has given us to do good, to our fellow ^creatures. I will finish this article by a remark worthy of attention. It is that among those who are induced by curiosity to at- * M. Passavant expresses himself thus, citing in support of his opinions, several remarkable facts. " Exterior agents may in spite of ourselves, carry disorder into our physical organization ; but our moral constitution depends only upon our will. Thus, so long as a man wilts to be free, he remains so in somnambulism as much as in the ordinary state. One might wound or kill, but he could not demoralize a human being without his consent." Yet suppose the possibility of a lethargic somnambulism, and the existence of a being sufficiently depraved to take advantage of it, we need not inquire whether any damage might result, if we observe the rule laid down above, that a woman when magnetized ought always to have a female friend near her. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 187 tempt magnetism, some renounce it as soon as their curiosity is satisfied, and some on the contrary attach themselves more and more to the practice as their curiosity is extin- guished.' These last are captivated solely by the pleasure of doing good. The enjoyments of the mind are enfeebled by the loss of novelty ; those of the heart become more lively the longer we have enjoyed them. The source of the last is inexhaustible. 2. Of the dangers that may occur to the animal economy, either by the abuse or the misapplication of magnetism, and of the means of avoiding them. Those who have wished to inspire the fear of employing this agent as a curative means, have based their observa- tions upon very specious reasoning, which would be unjust if applied to ordinary medicine. Since magnetism has a very powerful action, they have said that this action ought to be salutary or injurious, according to the nature of the disease. If it is a tonic, it will augment the evil when there is too much excitement ; if it is soothing, it can produce no good results in cases of inaction. The defenders of this agent have answered that it cannot be compared to medicines which have in themselves a deter- minate property. Magnetism, say they, acts upon the whole 'system ; it seconds the efforts which nature is making to throw off' the principle of the disease. If it soothes, it is by re-establishing the equilibrium ; if it strengthens, it is by recalling the vital fluid into the organs in which there is a deficiency. The answer is dictated by the theory which is most ap- parently true ; and I think that if magnetism were employed 188 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. in all its purity, and freed from all extraneous principles, it could not in any case be injurious. Some privileged beings exist who are endowed with a lively faith which never hesitates, with a confidence exempt from pride, with a charity so expansive that they forget themselves and are identified with the suffering being. The union of these qualities puts them into a state for employing this agent, during which they are directed by an instinct more sure than all the calculations of reason. The power of their soul predominates over all the interior forces of the patient. It excites or soothes them at will. Their action, sometimes insufficient, will be always more or less salutary. But I ought here to consider magnetism as it can be prac- tised at the present time, and by the persons to whom this instruction is addressed. Let us not then dwell upon an abstract theory. Let us consult experience to know if, in certain circumstances, magnetism has* not done some evil. Let us listen to them who condemn the use of it, not to dispute with them, but to profit by whatever truth may be found in the motives of their opinion. Innumerable facts, collected for forty years, have demonstrated in general the curative power of mag- netism. But has it not sometimes produced effects contrary to what people have desired to obtain 1 If it be true that it has, we must examine in what circumstances it has taken place, to what causes they ought to be attributed, and what precautions we ought to take to prevent the recurrence hereafter. I am persuaded there is hardly a disease which, by itself, is of a nature to be aggravated by magnetism properly em- ployed. But it may happen that magnetism does not agree with this or with that individual, either because of peculiar CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 189 temperaments, or because there exists a sympathy between him and the magnetizer, or because the latter has too strong an action, which produces trouble, or because the action is too feeble, so that it induces a struggle in which it cannot triumph, or because he does not know the mode of applica- tion which is useful. In these circumstances, it is prudent not obstinately to struggle against obstacles, unless the pa- tient is forced by a kind of instinct to demand its continuance. There are certain persons on whom magnetism causes a nervous irritation. When this is perceived, it would be well to magnetize at a distance, with the intention of sooth- ing, and withdraw one's self by little and little from one end of the apartment to another; you will even draw off the fluid by transversal passes ; you will not give yourself any uneasiness ; but you will stop if you do not make a state of calmness succeed this first nervous shock. We know by the somnambulists, that in certain cases magnetism ought to be employed with much reserve, and that its application ought to vary according to circumstances, either in the de- gree of force, in the duration of the sittings, or in the choice of the processes. When there is an exaltation of the ner- vous system, it is prudent to moderate or even to suspend the action. The species of nervous irritation of which I have spoken, does not in the least resemble the pains which magnetism produces or renews in an affected organ. These pains prove the action of magnetism, and result from its efforts to expel the principle of disease ; and they often make known the seat of it. These pains continue during a certain time, and calm them as well as you can before the end of the sitting, you may expect to see them renewed at the fol- lowing sitting, and sometimes in the intervals, until there 190 MEANS OF AVOIDING [ciIAF. VII. is no longer an obstruction to the free circulation of the fluid ; and you need not be affrighted on account of them. In palsy, magnetism often excites lively pains, because it re- establishes sensibility in the limbs before restoring move- ment to them. This leads me to speak of a real danger, the interruption of a treatment commenced, and the omission to sustain a crisis which has been excited, and which nature cannot de- velope and terminate without being aided by magnetism. This danger is nothing in slight and recent indispositions, but it is very serious in organic and long-standing diseases. A person might do much mischief by magnetizing only once to drive off an internal pain caused by a tumor, by a humor which, for many years, attacks an organ at certain periods. When a person has deranged a movement which was established, or excited a contrary movement, it is nec- essary to regulate it so that it may not bring on any disor- der. The accidents which have occurred, by the rude in- terruption of a treatment, ought not to be attributed to mag- netism, but to the imprudence of the magnetizer. I shall make myself better understood by citing two examples. The first is that of a lady who for twelve years had a vio- lent headache every month. One day when I was at her house and she was suffering much, I relieved her of the at- tack in half an hour. The following month the headache having returned, she sent for me. I relieved her as before. The next day she was very well ; but two days afterwards she had insupportable pains in the body. She was at- tacked with a violent fever which lasted six weeks, and of which she was cured by ordinary medicine. Since that time she has not had a return of the headache. I do not doubt that this acute disease was produced by the humor CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 191 displaced by me ; and that it would not have taken place, if, when I drove off the headache at first, I had continued to magnetize her for a month, in order to produce some crisis. The second fact is still more remarkable. It clearly proves that one ought not to permit himself to attempt the action of magnetism, except when he is sure of continuing it as long as it is necessary. A girl of sixteen who lived in the country, having had a fall, experienced for several months pains in the head, and became completely blind, having the gutta serena. Persons who took much interest in her, caused her to be placed under the care of able oculists. She was sent forthwith to the Hotel-Dieu, where all the remedies were essayed. She was finally declared incurable ; and as her parents were without fortune, she was sent to the Saltpetriere. She was there for three years, when a medical student who was magnetizing a lady, proposed to her to come to the house of that lady, telling her he had hopes of curing her. She accepted the offer with gratitude ; and some of her acquaint- ances undertook to see that she was attended thither every day. She came then to the lady's house, and he who had offered her his cares, magnetized her with energy for an hour, by putting his hands upon her head. She experienced an extraordinary sensation, which nevertheless was not painful ; but the following night she was attacked with vio- lent pains in the head. She returned to the house of the lady, but she did not find the magnetizer, who had left word that unexpected circumstances obliged him to suspend the treatment. The pains increased from day to day. They finally became insupportable, and were accompanied with a fever which continued every evening and a part of the 192 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. night. The poor girl was sent to the infirmary, where many remedies were administered to her without effect. She was eleven months in this suffering condition, when some one requested me to magnetize her. She came to my house every day. I employed magnetism by the long pass, and made passes along the legs, which became at first so be- numbed that she could not move them. After five sittings, she was restored, and since that period she has enjoyed good health, excepting her blindness. This is the same girl whose treatment I continued for nearly a year, because the effects which I had produced after the cessation of the pains, made me hope to restore her sight. I spoke of this in the preceding chapter. It is evident that the pains in the head were critical pains pro- duced by magnetism, and that they would have ceased in a few days, if the crisis had been ascertained. Perhaps at that time, vision might have been restored. In certain organic diseases which are very severe and long-seated, the efforts of nature to take a new direction, may produce the most painful and alarming crises. If the magnetizer is frightened, if he interrupts the action, the patient runs the risk of succumbing. In these cases, hap- pily very rare, it would bo necessary to have a somnam- bulist sufficiently clairvoyant to announce the crises, to describe the manner of developing them, and the results which they ought to have. The magnetizer would be equally assured, if he were directed by a physician versed in the knowledge of magnetism. If this aid be wanting, I can only recommend confidence and courage. I have seen the interruption or the false direction of a treatment, have, in the course of time, the most fatal consequences ; but I CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 193 have never seen a serious accident follow a violent crisis, the developement of which has not been hindered. Many persons fear that magnetism excites nervous com- motions, and even convulsions, because they recal to mind the effects which were produced at first by Mesmer. But at the time when Mesmer connected patients for the first time around the baquet, he knew neither the means of directing the agent that he employed, nor of calming the crises ; and since 1784, the true principles of magnetism being well known, the scenes which once made so much noise are no longer reproduced. But it is well to say here in what case nervous crises may occur, and how all their inconveniences may be avoided. Magnetism really produces nervous crises in disorders of the nervous system ; but they are necessary for the cure ; they are the consequences of the efforts of nature to change a bad direction, and re-establish the equilibrium. The magnetizer does not interrupt them ; he calms them by a soothing action, and by his will. Let him not be troubled, let him have patience and the desire of doing good, and after the crisis the patient will find himself better than before. It is very essential to know that magnetism renews attacks which it gives the strength to support ; but it accel- erates the progress, to destroy the cause of the disease. Magnetism also excites nervous motions when people make use of it out of curiosity, to exert its power, or to obtain singular effects; when its action is concentrated upon the head, or when an extraordinary force is employed sud- denly, while the subject resists the action ; when, instead of being tranquil, the operator is himself agitated. Do not magnetize unless you are yourself in a state of calm, and nothing disturbs the employment of your faculties. Employ 194 MEANS OF AVOIDING fcHAP. VII, your force gradually, and by little and little. Have no other desire than that of curing, and you will never excite the least trouble in the one you magnetize. If, in a treatment wherein several persons unite in a chain, or around a magnetic reservoir, a nervous crisis displays itself, the patient attacked by it should be instantly taken from the chain, and led to another place, that he may be calmed. It is known that nervous attacks are commu- nicated by imitation or by sympathy, and this is a reason for not exposing the other patients to it. I ought here to reiterate a condition essential to the suc- cess of every treatment, namely, that the magnetizer must be in good health. Rheumatic pains, nervous affections, and especially organic diseases, are communicated from the magnetizer to the person magnetized, with facility propor* tioned to the thoroughness of the communication between them. In the state of disease, the vital fluid may be vitiated, or at least morbific principles may be thrown off with it. I will add, that in the magnetic communication there is estab- lished a sympathy between the similar organs of the two individuals ; whence it follows that a person whose lungs are delicate, cannot without danger magnetize any one whose lungs are affected.* Hitherto I have spoken only of the dangers to which we are exposed in magnetizing, without precautions, persons who are not somnambulists. Those which spring from somnambulism are still greater. To avoid them, it is nec- * The magnetizer who enjoys good health, sometimes sympathet- ically experiences the pains of his patient, but he does not catch the principles of the disease ; the reason of which is, that as he throws the fluid from himself, he is active and not passive, he gives and does not receive. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 195 essary to know them, and I will therefore point them out. I have just said that a magnetizer whose health is essen- tially bad, may communicate the disease to the person whom he magnetizes. This thing is especially to be feared in somnambulism. I have several times seen the proof of it. I will merely recite a fact which struck me forcibly. A young lady who had for a long time had a very serious nervous disease, was magnetized by a friend of her family who rendered her a somnambulist the first day. She very soon had favorable crises, and her health appeared to be sensibly ameliorated. She flattered herself with the pros- pect of obtaining a complete cure, when her magnetizer was attacked with an inflammation of the larynx. As he could no longer go out of his own house, he sent every evening to the patient a magnetized handkerchief which renewed somnambulism for two hours. The young lady was very soon attacked with the same disease, accompanied by the most alarming symptoms. Happily another magnetizer came to her aid, a circumstance which did not prevent her from being in the greatest danger when the former one died. And it was only after a very long treatment, and making use of all the remedies which her clairvoyance sug- gested, that she was perfectly re-established in health. I will not here return to the accidents that may result from temporary imprudences, I confine myself to a succinct summary of what I have said on this subject. Never in- terrupt a crisis. Do not suffer your somnambulist to be touched by any one, who is not in communication with him. Do not put him in communication with any one except it be for some good purpose and when he desires it. Avoid magnetizing him in presence of many persons. Occupy yourself solely with his health. Follow the processes 196 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII* which he indicates to you. Do not fatigue him with exper- iments. If you neglect these precautions, you will diminish his lucidity, retard his cure, and do him an injury. Yet this injury may be ordinarily repaired by proper cares, and the greater part of magnetizers are not instructed on this point by their own experience. The dangers of which I am about to speak are happily much less frequent. They are not caused by a momentary fault of the magnetizer, but by the abuse of his own power. They are with some individuals the natural consequences of somnambulism ; and, as they are very serious and diffi- cult to remedy, the magnetizer ought to conduct himself in such a manner as infallibly to prevent them. Persons who have been for a long time somnambulists have been known to preserve, even after their restoration to health, a nervous susceptibility which renders them sus- ceptible to the least impressions, and the slighest action of magnetism may cause them to fall again into an imperfect somnambulism. # Some of them have been seen to be hab- itually in a magnetic state. This is a great inconvenience, and you must avoid it by observing the following directions* Do not magnetize your somnambulist any longer than he tells you it is necessary. Never speak to him, after he awakes, of what he said in somnambulism. In terminating each sitting, disembarrass him of the fluid with which he is charged, and wake him perfectly, so that there may be no intermediate point between the ordinary and the somnam- bulic state. As soon as your patient is cured, refrain ab- solutely frona the desire of preserving in him the somnam- bulic faculties ; will on the contrary that they cease, until a new complaint renders them useful to him. Somnambu- lists who are no longer ill, are generally poor somnarnbu- CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 197 lists ; and the tendency to somnambulism is not in accord- ance with the ordinary habits of life. Many magnetizers preserve somnambulists after their cure, and they hope through them to render service to other patients ; but it is wrong to have confidence in such somnambulists. They are often made use of for experiments of curiosity. They are exhibited to persons who interrogate them upon various subjects. All this does no good. It does not even convince the incredulous ; and this presents many inconveniences. I know that one might cite some exceptions to this rule, and that somnambulists, when thoroughly cured, have been known to preserve, for many years, a surprising clairvoy- ance. This phenomenon is very infrequent. It has its source in moral and physical dispositions independent of the magnetizer's influence, since persons, who have never been magnetized, have been seen to be naturally in a state sim- ilar to that of the most extraordinary magnetic somnambu- lists ; but this state demands so much management, and re- quires so much prudence, discretion, and disinterestedness, to derive advantage from it, that a wise man will not seek to produce it, or to sustain it by magnetic action. But the inconveniences of a somnambulism too much prolonged and made almost habitual, are nothing compared to the dangers to which one is exposed by turning somnam- bulism aside from the single end to which it should be directed; that is, by exciting the faculties of somnambulists to obtain of them surprising things, from which they can derive no advantage, either to their health, or to the per- fecting of their moral qualities. There is not the least doubt that such an abuse of magnetism may carry trouble into the nervous system, and derange the imagination. If you exact of your somnambulist things which are difficult *98 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. YU, and contrary to his will, if you should wish to act upon him in such a manner as to make him see the dead or spirits, if you compel him to go into distant times or places, to discover things lost, or to announce the future, to tell you what numbers will be fortunate in a lottery, a thing which he knows no better than you, if you interrogate him about po- litical affairs, &c, you will do him much mischief, and might even make him idiotic. If this should occur, it will be your own fault ; it ought not to be attributed to magnet- ism, but wholly to your temerity. Somnambulism will never produce the least disorder when not abused : and we are sure of not abusing it when we employ it solely for the purpose of learning the means of doing good to the somnam- bulist, or to the patients with whom he consents to interest himself. Somnambulism of itself is a state of calm, during which all the forces of nature put themselves in equilibrium. The stream of life then flows freely ; its waters, united in a single channel, are purified in their tranquil current ; but if you build dikes, * will overflow its banks, and produce the greatest disasters. In many works on magnetism, and especially in those which have been published in Germany, the authors have distinguished different degrees or states of somnambulism, the most elevated of which has been called ecstasy, or magnetic exaltation. I spoke of this extraordinary state in the preceding chapter. I ought here to state that it is very dangerous, and that in the hands of a magnetizer who lacks force, coolness, and experience, and who is governed by the desire of witnessing marvels, it may be attended with the most fatal consequences. When this state is arrived at a certain degree, the magnetizer has no longer any control over it. If, then, you see somnambulism taking this direc- CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 199 tion, it is necessary forthwith to oppose it ; and if you fear you shall not succeed, you should renounce the treatment. It is never at the first time that this state becomes sufficiently manifest for the will of the magnetizer to be inefficient. I think this danger has never been better exposed than in a pamphlet entitled, "Memoire sur le magnetisme animal, presente a l'academie de Berlin." 1820. This is from the pen of a distinguished physician, and I knew the man whose somnambulism was the subject of his observations. I believe that the accidents which have sometimes resulted from somnambulism, have never occurred except when it has been pushed too far, or when its beneficial and repara- tive action has been counteracted. 3. Of the dangers to which persons expose themselves who place too much confidence in so?nna?nbulists. Many enthusiastic magnetizers have a blind faith in their somnambulists. They believe them infallible, both in the judgment they give of their own disease, and in that which they give of the diseases of others. If the remedies ordered by them do not succeed, they suppose it is because the pre- scriptions have not been followed with sufficient exactitude; if the remedies have done mischief, they regard the mischief as a necessary crisis. As they have sometimes seen incon- ceivable wonders, they have become credulous, and this credulity makes them lose all prudence. Even when a mischance arrives, they continue in the illusion. There are, without doubt, some somnambulists endowed with such a lucidity, that when they have been placed in communication with a sick person, they clearly explain the origin, the cause, and the nature of the disorder, and pre- 200 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. scribe the most suitable remedies by indicating the effects they ought to produce, and the crises which are to be ex- pected. They announce a disease which will develope it- self in several months, and the precautions which ought to be taken, when the first symptoms are perceivable. They even see the moral condition of the patient, penetrate his thoughts and give him appropriate advice ; but these som- nambulists are rare ; and even those who have given proofs of this inconceivable clairvoyance, do not always preserve it, and do not possess it except at certain moments. It often happens also that the clairvoyance of somnam- bulists is not extended equally to' all objects ; they see very well things which no man in the world in the ordinary state, could conjecture ; and they do not perceive others which a physician would notice at the first glance of the eye. Let us not doubt of the faculties of somnambulists, but let us be the more prudent since we are engaged in a career in which we do not see the rocks and quicksands, In order to avoid all the dangers of a blind confidence, observe the following directions. When you have been so happy as to meet with a som- nambulist who has given proofs of his lucidity, present your patient to him, sustain his attention, and let him speak with- out interrogating him. If he perfectly describes the symp- toms of the disease, if he points out the origin of it, if he speaks of remedies which have been employed and of the effects they have produced, if he sees clearly what it is impossible to divine, and especially what you are ignorant of yourself, as it has often happened to me, it is evident that he is well acquainted with the disease, and this knowledge will be very useful to you. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 201 Then you will request him to point out the treatment to be pursued. If this treatment exhibits nothing that can be injurious, and if it does not oblige the patient to renounce that which he is already pursuing, and from which he has experienced relief, if the somnambulist affirms that the medicines which he points out will produce such or such an effect, and that the patient will be cured after having experienced such or such a crisis, you will follow his prescriptions with the most rigorous exactitude. But if among the remedies indicated there are some which, in certain cases, might do mischief, you will apply to an enlightened physician who, if he be not a partisan of magnetism, may bc3 at least exempt from prejudice, and you will submit to him the advice of the somnambulist, which you will follow in case he sees no danger in it. You will not put your somnambulist in consultation with the physi- cian, provided the physician is not himself a magnetizer ; for in talking with him, the somnambulist may yield to his vanity, and say things not prompted by instinct ; but you will combine what he says with what the physician in whom you repose entire confidence, tells you. By this means you will have no risk to run, and even if the treat- ment does not succeed, you will have no cause for self- reproach. There are at Paris somnambulists who make a profession of giving advice for a fee, and the enemies of magnetism do not fail to say that their somnambulism is pretended. I can affirm the contrary, and I have examined a great number of them with the most scrupulous attention. I have col- lected a large number of facts which I have examined in such a manner as to leave me in no uncertainty on this 202 MEANS OF AVOIDING [dlAP. VII. head. They differ among themselves in the degree of their faculties and of their moral qualities; but all are really somnambulists.* Among those whom I have observed, there is not one that I have not known to commit errors ; but there is not one that has not exhibited to me proofs of clairvoyance. This clairvoyance has appeared to me imperfect and limited on several occasions. At other times they have singularly astonished me. For instance, I have conducted to the houses of these somnambulists, patients whom they could not have known, and of whose state I was myself ignorant; and I have seen them after a quarter of an hour of concen- tration and of silence, divine the origin, the cause, and the stages of the diseases, determine the seat of the pains, dis- cover what no physician could perceive, and describe with exactitude the character, the habits, and the inclinations of those who consult them. I have seen some of them who have cured very severe acute diseases, and inveterate chronic disorders, by boldly changing the treatment pur- sued up to that time. Each of the somnambulists of whom I speak has methods of investigation peculiar to himself. The attention of some is at first struck with the most serious evil ; others examine separately and successively all the organs, commencing at * It is possible to feign an imperfect somnambulism in presence of persons who take no precautions to verify the reality ; and I recollect having been for three days the dupe of a person whom I thought incapable of deceiving me ; but whatever address the pre. tended somnambulist may have, you may discern the deception at the first examination. The faculties peculiar to somnambulists cannot be successfully imitated by any one who does not possess them. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 203 the head ; and it is only after having viewed them apart, that they endeavor to determine their reciprocal influence. There are some of them who, to make this examination, do nothing more than to touch with one hand the pulse of the patient, while with the other they feel over all the body ; they thus perceive by sympathy which are the affected or- gans, and they sometimes experience the pains of the pa- tient so much as to suffer considerably after the sitting. Some of them consult for persons who are absent and unknown to them. Some hair of the patient, or something which he has worn for several days on the stomach next to the skin,* suffices to put them in such close communica- tion with him, that they will describe exactly and minutely his physical and moral condition. I do not pretend that they do not often deceive themselves, but I have seen them many times succeed in an astonishing manner in cases where they had nothing to guide them, and where the dis- ease for which they were consulted had characteristics too rare for them to come at the truth by conjecture or chance. If he who consults has for his aim, not to enlighten himself, but to put the somnambulist to the proof, it is possible that, without knowing it, he will exert an influence which will furnish him with new reasons for his incredulity. To what I have just said of the somnambulists by pro- fession in reference to their varying faculties, I ought to add that I have noticed in many of them much uprightness and sensibility. I have seen them carefully distinguish between what they thought themselves sure of, and what * It is necessary to envelope these things in paper, and not to have had the packet opened, when it is presented to the somnam. bulist. S 204 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. they thought merely probable, and refuse to give a consul, tation when they did not feel themselves to be in possession of sufficient clairvoyance ; or when the state of the patient appeared desperate, they would not declare the opinion they had formed respecting it. The part which these somnambulists have taken, of giving consultations every day, which fatigue them, obliges them to take care of themselves, and renounce all other business. It is proper that they should be recompensed for their trouble, and the sacrifice of their time. The persons who apply to them are very glad to be able to acquit themselves of the obligation, if they have received good advice ; and as no one designs to deceive them, they have no reason to complain, if they have merely satisfied their curiosity. This is what I had to say to justify an abuse which will exist so long as magnetism is not practised in families, under the direction of a physician, and which in the actual circum- stances of the case, ought not to be condemned.* But * Some men who have not taken the pains to inform themselves of the services rendered every day by the somnambulists of whom I speak, would have the police forbid their giving consultations. Such a measure would create inconveniences a thousand times more se- rious than the ones sought to be obviated. In the first place, these somnambulists could no longer find a magnetizer who, by a disinter- ested zeal, would consent to direct them and sustain their strength. In the second place, those of the somnambulists who have the most delicacy, would think they ought to renounce a practice which is interdicted to them. Finally, those who, in spite of the law, would continue to see patients, having risks to run, would demand a high- er price for their services, and require secresy ; and the persons who obtain a consultation from them, would not dare to submit it to a physician, for fear of compromising their obligations to the somnambulists. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 205 without pretending to make any particular application, without disapproving what exists, I ought to show that som- nambulists by profession, those especially who succeed in throwing themselves into the crisis, ought in general to inspire less confidence than those of whom I spoke further back, and who in the waking state, are ignorant of the faculties with which they are endowed during sleep. What I am about to say is supported by the true principles of magnetism, and confirmed by numerous observations. In order to have a somnambulist judge correctly the state of a disease, he must in some sort identify himself with the patient. For, the motive which determines him to iden- tify himself with a suffering being, can be no other than the sentiment of pity, or the love of good. It supposes a forgetfulness of one's self, and personal interest must neces- sarily alter its purity. When somnambulism by being too much prolonged be- comes a habit, there is established a communication between this and the ordinary state. Instinct no longer acts inde- pendently. The acquired ideas, recollections, prejudices, interests, are mingled with that species of inspiration which developes in the somnambulist a faculty absolutely foreign to those which we enjoy in the common state. Professional somnambulists are rarely in a state of ab- straction, (isoles,) from which it is to be presumed that they have not reached the degree of concentration which ordina- rily precedes perfect clairvoyance. As they see many patients in the course of the day, the impressions which they receive change their nature at every moment, and it is difficult for them to identify themselves alternately with each one of those for whom they are consulted. Besides, to see the disease, to describe its symptoms, to divine its 206 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. Y1L origin, is not all. The somnambulist is also required to point out the treatment. The faculty of seeing remedies is very different from that of seeing diseases, and is not always united with it. It may also be remarked that many pro- fessional somnambulists have a pharmacy peculiar to them- selves. They order, according to circumstances, a certain number of medicines which they are acquainted with, be- cause they have made use of them, and their complicated prescriptions often appear to embrace useless things. The lucidity of somnambulists varies from one moment to another. A somnambulist who consults only with the desire of relieving a suffering being, when he perceives that he is not for the moment endowed with perfect clairvoyance, says to his magnetizer: "I do not see well to-day. The patient must return and try to find me in a more favorable condition. I am not well acquainted with the disease; I cannot devise the remedy. I suspect such or such to be the case, but I am not certain, and I cannot permit myself to say positively," &c. The somnambulists who receive in succession several patients, each one at the hour they have appointed, think themselves obliged to answer the questions put to them ; provided they do not experience too much fatigue, they rarely think of examining themselves to be sure of their own lucidity. They would not deceive you; but they de- pend upon the first sensations they feel, and prescribe rem- edies after the habitudes they have acquired. As they de- sire you to entertain as favorable an opinion of their lucidity as they themselves do, they are dexterous in the manner of expressing themselves. If they perceive that they have erred, they go about to rectify their judgment and to per- suade you that you have not well understood them. When CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 207 they do not discover the essential disease, they almost al- ways conjecture some of the symptoms; and if you appear surprised at it, they profit by this discovery to direct them- selves and to augment your confidence. If the remedies they have ordered do not produce the effects they expect- ed, they do not on that account think themselves mistaken ; they find pretexts for excusing their error, and plausible reasons for modifying their treatment. All this may take place, without any misgivings, and with an entire honesty on their part ; for our interest influences our manner of viewing things, our decisions and our conduct, without our knowing it. Somnambulists of this species have often gone to see physicians who are prejudiced against magnetism, and who wish to sustain their incredulity by experiments. They have almost always succeeded in putting them at fault, and they have thence concluded that all those who profess to have acquired proof of the lucidity of somnambulists were dupes. If they had known the principles of magnetism, they would not have drawn this conclusion. Somnambu- lists to whom insidious questions are asked, are much em- barrassed, and if vanity, or the fear of avowing their igno- rance, determines them to answer, they make efforts, they are troubled, they speak at random, and very soon they are put in contradiction with themselves by some one better in- formed than they are. Besides, in order to have a somnam- bulist lucid, he must be sustained by the confidence and the will of the person who magnetizes him, and he who is put in communication must desire to receive useful advice of him. If he is exempt from all interest, if he preserves his inde- pendence, he will tell the one who comes to consult him, and whose intentions are not in accordance with his, " I s* 208 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. cannot consult for you ; I am not in condition to answer your questions." But in the contrary case, it is natural that lie should employ the resources of his wit to supply the instinctive faculties which fail him.* Yet these somnambulists may be very useful ; and, as I have said, there are some of them who are endowed with the most astonishing faculties, and whose goodness of heart raises them above every other sentiment. Even those whose clairvoyance is very imperfect, have, at certain mo- ments, and as it were by flashes, a surprising lucidity. One might apply to them, not to put them to the proof, but to hear their advice with attention, and to derive from it some information. It is not during the sitting, but it is afterwards, that we ought to weigh, combine, and discuss what they have said, in order to judge of the degree of confidence which they merit. I will point out the conduct you ought to pursue, and which you can do without fear. If you decide to consult one of these somnambulists, do not limit yourself to the inquiry whether he has given proofs of lucidity ; endeavor also to find out whether in his conduct he has always shown himself worthy of esteem. We cannot be certain that a somnambulist will not deceive himself, but it is at least necessary to be assured that he is incapable of deceiving others. If the somnambulist has a * What I say here is founded upon facts which have been related to me, and not upon my own observations. I never permitted my- self to consult somnambulists to put them to the proof. I have not even gone to the houses of any except those whom I knew to have given evidence of clairvoyance. It seems to me not very proper to employ insidious means to learn the truth. It discovers itself to him who searches for it with perseverance and honest intentions. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 209 sensible and enlightened man for a magnetizer, this will be one motive for confidence. It is desirable for you not to be known directly or indi- rectly to the somnambulist, in order to be sure that he knows nothing of your disease ; but this is not always possible. In all cases, when you have been put in communication with him, you will not inform him of what you suffer ; you will answer yes or no to his questions, without testifying the least surprise. If he describes the symptoms of your dis- order, if he discovers its origin, if he finds out what could not be known by his senses, you will have some reason to believe in his clairvoyance, and you will take note of all the remedies that he prescribes to you. It is not until he has finished telling you what he has seen and perceived, and what he advises you to do, that you will permit your- self to invite him to direct his attention to any particular organ, or to interrogate him upon any thing which disquiets you. I suppose that after having quitted him, and reflect- ed upon what he has told you, you will be entirely satisfied and even astonished at the judgment he has formed of your condition. You will then address yourself to a candid phy- sician, and submit to him the advice of the somnambulist before you take the remedies prescribed ; for it may hap- pen that there is a complication of diseases of which the somnambulist has seen but one. It may also be that the somnambulist sees the disorder very well, but mistakes in regard to the remedy. The physician will certainly find in the advice of the somnambulist perceptions calculated to enlighten him ; but it belongs to him to appreciate them, and to modify the treatment in consequence. When a lucid somnambulist prescribes remedies for him- self, we should conform ourselves exactly to his prescrip- 210 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. tions. If he is charged with only one patient in whom he takes interest, and to whom he devotes himself, he ought to be heard with great confidence, and you will follow his advice, provided there appears to be nothing in it of a dangerous character. The physician is solely to approve or to disapprove. But with the somnambulists of whom I have just spoken, the physician ought to preserve his su- premacy, and direct the treatment, while he profits by the intelligence of the somnambulist, and makes use of the remedies indicated, if he sees therein no inconvenience. If reason permits us to depend solely and unreservedly upon a somnambulist by profession who has given proofs of lucidity, it is only when physicians have declared the case to be beyond the resources of their art, and that they know no means of curing the patient which has not been tried. As much as I love to contemplate somnambulism in its purity, when the soul, disengaged from sensation and all terrestrial interest, sees nothing without her but what is enlightened by the torch of charity, it is painful for me to consider it as a complicated faculty, of which I know neither the principle, the direction, nor the limits, presenting itself with vacillating and diversified characters. But the details into which I have entered appeared to me necessary, be- cause this work is not destined solely for persons who wish to practise magnetism to do good, but also for those who, having heard of cures effected by somnambulists, come to consult them without having the least idea of the circum- stances which favor or trouble their clairvoyance* and without being acquainted with the precautions which are necessary to distinguish between their instinctive notions, and the illusions to which they are often exposed. CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 211 Somnambulists may give erroneous views to those who consult them with too much confidence, not only in regard to the treatment of diseases, but also in regard to tilings not less important. I have seen persons who, at sight of the somnambulic phenomena, were led to the adoption of most absurd and extravagant opinions. J know that a thorough knowledge of somnambulism places one beyond the reach of this danger ; but there are few persons who have suffic- iently studied this state to escape being dazzled by its phe- nomena, and to distinguish what is produced by the imagi- nation, from what is perceived by the new faculty developed or revealed by the interior sentiment. I should wander from the path before me, if I stepped aside to enter into many details on this subject. It should suffice for me sim- ply to trace the route you ought to follow, so as not to be led astray ; yet I will make a few observations in the first place, which will render the justness and the importance of my counsels more perceivable. In somnambulists there are developed faculties of which we are deprived in the ordinary state ; such as seeing with- out the aid of the eyes, hearing without the aid of the ears, seeing at a distance, reading the thoughts, appreciating time with rigorous exactitude, and, what is still more astonishing, having a presage of the future. But there is often with somnambulists an extraordinary exaltation of the faculties with which we are endowed. Thus, among them, the im- "agination may assume a prodigious activity ; the memory may recal a thousand ideas which were entirely effaced ; the elocution may become so elegant, so pure, so brilliant, as to seem the product of inspiration. But all this does not exclude error. The exercise of the faculties peculiar to somnambulists, as well as that of our ordinary faculties, has 214 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP, VII. ledge of the essential principles of morals is the result of the unfolding of our intelligence. For, the view of the order of the universe will be the more clear, the inner sense will be the more quick, the un- folding of intelligence will be the more regular, the more the soul is disengaged from all terrestrial interest, the more estranged from all passion. And this is the reason why the somnambulist, abstracted and concentrated in himself, is in this respect more enlightened than we. But in regard to things which have been revealed to man, or which have been taught us by tradition, it does not belong to somnam- bulists to instruct us ; they have merely the same gift that we have. Their disposition to piety might edify us ; but if we make them reason about mysteries, their imagination will be exalted, and they will give into all sorts of errors ; they will no longer draw consequences from innate princi- ples, but from the prejudices of childhood, or from some hypothetical views. They will conduct us into an ideal world, where, as in the actual world, illusion and reality will be mingled, not to be separated except by the aid of reason and experience. Even when in this ideal world the som- nambulist sees what is concealed from us, he cannot com- municate them to us, more than we can give to those who are born blind an idea of the phenomena of vision. I know that many persons have been led to embrace the reveries of what is called illuminism> by the confidence they have had in mystic or ecstatic somnambulists. The way to escape from this danger is, not to let the somnambulist wander into the regions of fantasy, and to limit ourselves, as to religious doctrines, to what we are required to believe. God has revealed to us what it behooves us to know, and CHAP. VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 215 the indiscreet curiosity which would go beyond this, will be always punished. Ecstatic somnambulism is often exhibited, without being induced by magnetism. They who enter into this state, manifest upon certain points, a clairvoyance which would appear miraculous ; they do not exhibit less in the strangest errors ; and they have exerted the most fatal influence upon those who have had the imprudence to listen to them as oracles. If it is dangerous to consult somnambulists upon the dogmas of religion, it is not less so to consult them upon political affairs. I have seen men, otherwise well-informed, become the dupes of their visions and their predictions. I cannot too much recommend your never permitting them to enter upon such a course. The metaphysical acumen of certain somnambulists, is sometimes very surprising. Doubtless it is better than that of the materialists, but it does not repose upon a solid basis. It generally conducts us to systems analogous to those of the Alexandrian school, or of the eclectics of the third cen- tury, in which sublime truths were associated with senseless creeds. Somnambulists who give themselves up to this species of research, ordinarily lose the most important faculties, and the proofs of lucidity which they exhibit in relation to certain things of a useless nature, merely serve to mislead the judgment of those who mistake their visions for realities. I have seen persons who had certain proofs of the clair- voyance of a somnambulist, consult him about the conduct of their domestic affairs, and suffer themselves to be guided by him ; and I have also seen them by this means take imprudent steps. I do not deny that a somnambulist may 216 MEANS OF AVOIDING [CHAP. VII. sometimes, and in certain circumstances, give excellent advice, because of the penetration he possesses, and even because of his ability to foresee the issue of an event which is in progress ; but for this it is necessary for him to speak of his own accord, yielding to his instinct, without being excited, without being solicited, and without reasoning. A very good somnambulist, who is in thorough communication with you, will tell you, "Beware of such a person, he is deceiving you ;" or, " Do not undertake such a journey, the result will be unfortunate." This merits some attention. But, if you argue with him, he will enjoy no advantage over you, except that of having more wit, and more facility in conveying his thoughts. I repeat it for the last time ; if you desire to avoid the danger of the influence which somnambulists may exercise over you, do not consult them except about what appertains to their real interest, and about what they may know better than you, namely, upon the means of re-establishing their health, or of directing their moral conduct. In many works upon magnetism, somnambulism has been represented as a state of purity, in which man is superior to the passions, and would reject the slightest thought which would wound decency or the moral sense. Those who have sustained this thesis, are supported by some facts : but the principle generalized is absolutely false. Many somnam- bulists preserve the passions and the inclinations which they had in the waking state. There are some of them who would sacrifice themselves for others ; there are some who are profoundly selfish ; there are some who are of angelic purity, and these would go into convulsions if the magnetizer had a thought injurious to modesty. Some may be found who preserve in somnambulism the depravity which they display CHAP, VII.] ITS DANGERS AND ABUSES. 217 in the ordinary state. There are some of them who calcu- late their own interests, and profit by what is told them to procure themselves some advantages. Vanity and jealousy are sentiments very common among them. It follows from all I have just said, that the greatest wis- dom and the greatest prudence are requisite for the good management of somnambulists, and for preventing their gaining an ascendancy over the magnetizer ; that he ought ahvays to preserve his supremacy, and yet not to make use of it except to retain them in subjection, and never to excite them ; finally, that this state, in some sort supernatural, may, in bad hands, be attended with many dangers. But let plain and upright men be fearless, let them but exercise an unshaken will for good, let them employ somnambulism only for the object for which Providence has destined it, let them repress their curiosity, the spirit of proselytism, the rage for experiments, let a compassionate charity, an un- bounded confidence, be the only motives of their action, and they will never have any thing to dread. CHAPTER VIII. OF THE MEANS OF DEVELOPING IN OURSELVES THE MAGNETIC FACULTIES, AND OF DERIVING ADVANTAGE FROM THIS DEVELOPEMENT. When Mesmer announced his discovery, he would not divulge a secret of which he thought himself the sole pos- sessor, unless they would allow him a certain number of select students to whom he could explain all his theory, and at the same time teach them the mode of its application. But to let the world know how vast and important that the- ory was, and to establish his priority of discovery, (pour prendre date,) he published its fundamental principles in twenty-seven propositions, the proofs of which he reserved, and the developement of which he promised to give, and also to explain its consequences, as soon as they had con- sented to arrange the matter, and to take the measures he judged proper to prevent the abuse of his principles and the robbing him of the glory of having discovered them. These propositions were very obscure. Several of them seemed contrary to the received principles of physics. They have never been clearly explained, and yet the practice of mag- netism has been attended with the greatest success. This proves that they were not so important as their author thought them ; and that the effects which he produced and those which his pupils produced, were not essentially allied to his doctrine. Yet one cannot but agree that the asser- tions of Mesmer merit the greatest attention, if not for the 220 TO DEVELOPE IN OURSELVES [CHAP. VIII. general system of physics with which he associated his dis- covery, at least as far as it relates to the proper action of magnetism, its power, its effects, to the means of directing and strengthening its action, to the utility derivable from it, especially in the treatment of diseases, for Mesmer was both a good observer and a learned physician. The twenty-seventh of the propositions of Mesmer com- mences in this manner : This doctrine will put the physi- cian in the way of forming a correct judgment of the degree of each individual's health. People have not sufficiently reflected upon this proposi- tion, and they will search in vain in most of the works up- on magnetism to discover how it leads the physician to de- cide in relation to the state of the sick. Mesmer also said in the thirteenth proposition : Experi- ment has proved the existence of a subtile matter which pen- etrates all bodies without apparently losing its activity. This proposition has been left unexplained, as well as the twenty- seventh. Mesmer afterwards spoke much of the currents, and no account has been given of what he meant by the term. The supposition of currents passing and repassing through bodies, as that of the poles, appertains to the general system of Mesmer, and I agree that it is useless to look into this subject now ; but if we can ascertain by experiment the flowing of a subtile fluid, and if the name current is given to this emanation, the nature of this emanation, the degree of force with which it escapes, and the cause of the direc- tion it takes, are physical and physiological problems which ought to be examined with the greatest care. The phenomenon mentioned by Mesmer has been known to a great number of his scholars. It was in particular CHAP. VIII.] THE MAGNETIC FACULTIES. 221 known to M. d'Eslon, who fixed upon this subject the at- tention of almost all those to whom he taught the practice of magnetism. This knowledge was common to several of the members of the Society at Strasburg ; and yet in the numerous memoirs which they have published, they have spoken of it only in a vague manner, as of a thing known to all the world by an oral tradition which it is therefore useless to explain. I have myself scarcely said any thing upon this subject in my Critical History, because I did not well understand the subject, and not being endowed with the faculty of perceiving in myself the diseases of others, and not having paid attention to the action of the currents, I could not speak of it from my own experience. I have since read some manuscripts of M. d'Eslon, in which the question has been treated of; I have also read a manuscript work written thirty-six years ago by a highly intelligent gentleman, an excellent observer, and who, having first been instructed by M. d'Eslon, had added much to the knowledge he had acquired as a pupil ; and I am convinced that what I had neglected to look into, was a very remark- able phenomenon, the observation of which is the most use- ful in the practice of magnetism. M. de Lausanne recently gave a long extract from the manuscript I have just cited. It forms the first volume of the work entitled " The Processes and Principles of Mag- netism," 2 vols, in 8mo. 1819. I invite those who wish to practise magnetism to read this work with the greatest at- tention, and to exercise themselves patiently in the method taught by the author. Of course I cannot here lay down all the principles, nor give their explanation. I must limit myself to let the reader know the principal phenomenon, and 222 TO DEVELOPE IN OURSELVES [CHAP. VIII. the indications with which it furnishes us, the better to suc- ceed in the treatment of diseases. It is well known that good somnambulists discover the seat of the diseases of persons put in communication with them, sometimes by experiencing sympathetically pains in the part of their body corresponding with that which is af- fected in the patient, sometimes by passing the hands over them and examining with attention from the head to the feet. It is also well known that without any instruction they magnetize much better than they do when awake, and that they give to the magnetic fluid the most suitable direc- tion. This faculty of perceiving the seat of diseases, and the direction which we ought to give to the fluid, does not be- long exclusively to somnambulists ; it is also developed in many magnetizers, when they are attentive to the different sensations they experience, either while magnetizing various patients, or while carrying the action of magnetism upon any organ of a" patient with whom they are in communica- tion. I know many magnetizers, who, when they hold their hand upon the seat of an internal disease, perceive a pain which extends to the elbow ; their hand is benumbed, and even becomes swollen. This effect diminishes with the disease ; it ceases with the cure ; and its cessation indicates that magnetism is no longer necessary. I saw a physician experience this sensation the first time he attempted to magnetize. With others it does not show itself until after reiterated attempts. I have not observed it in myself, because my occupations have not permitted me to magnetize except by intervals, and when I was induced to it by the desire of alleviating a sick person. Yet some CHAP. VIII.] THE MAGNETIC FACULTIES. 223 effects which I have perceived in various circumstances, make me think I should have acquired it, had I taken care to notice the causes which produced them. The delicate tact which enables us to perceive the seat and sometimes the nature of the disease, to foretel a crisis which is in progress, to judge of the moment when a crisis will terminate, and to choose as by instinct the processes best calculated to direct the action well, being the most useful of all the faculties to the magnetizer, I am going to treat succinctly of the mode of acquiring it, and of making use of it. What I shall say is not the result of my own experience, but of the explanation which many magnetizers have given me of the method pursued by themselves, by whom I have seen wonderful cures effected, of my conver- sations with the late M. Varnier, with many pupils of M. d'Eslon, and many members of the Society of Strasburg, of the theory explained in the work I have just cited, of some observations which I extracted from the English work of Dr. de Maineduc,* and finally, of the examination and comparison of a great number of facts which I have wit- nessed, and of all those which I have been able to collect. When a man magnetizes, he puts himself, by the exertion of his will, in a state different from his habitual one, he con- centrates his attention upon a single object, he throws off and directs beyond himself the nervous or vital fluid, and this new manner of being renders him susceptible of new impressions. He first perceives a change operated in him- * I have no longer this book in my possession. It was published at London, nearly thirty years ago, in an octavo edition. The au- thor therein unfolds a curious, but very systematic theory ; and it demands of those who wish to practise magnetism, a knowledge of things which does not appear to me at all necessary. 224 TO DEVELOPE IN OURSELVES [CHAP. VIII. self by the action in which he is engaged. He then expe- riences by the reaction of him whom he magnetizes, various sensations which affect him more or less according to the degree of susceptibility with which he is endowed, and ac- cording to the degree of attention which he pays to recog- nise and distinguish them. The change which occurs in us when we act magnetically, that is to say, when the passes we make are magnetic, and the feeling which persuades us we are in communication with him whom we wish to magnetize, are things which it is impossible to describe, but which they who are in the habit of magnetizing, and who have observed what passes in themselves, recognise with certainty. This disposition is composed of a determined intention, which banishes all distraction without our making any effort, of a lively interest which the patient inspires in us and which draws us towards him, and of a confidence in our power, which leaves us in no doubt as to* our success in alleviating him. When expe- rience has taught you that you are susceptible of this feel- ing, if you do not experience it after you have tried a quarter of an hour, it is useless to continue ; the efforts of will that you could make would be unavailing. You will try two or three times more on the following days, and you will cease if you have no more success ; for then it proves that you are not in a state to magnetize, or that your action does not agree with the person on whom you wish to act. On the contrary, if you perceive in yourself a manifestation of the disposition of which I speak, you should persevere ; for, when the patient feels nothing, it is extremely probable that you exercise upon him a real action, whose effects will be manifested in the sequel, either by some crises, or by an amelioration of health. CHAP. VIII.] THE MAGNETIC FACULTIES. 225 Besides the change in the moral dispositions, there are also some signs purely physical, or some sensations which will indubitably assure the magnetizer that he has established a communication, and exercises a magnetic action. Com- monly his hands are warm ; it seems as if the vital action were carried outwards. I have been intimately connected with a man who had a very energetic and very salutary magnetic power. When he had begun to act upon any one, he was obliged to con- tinue nearly three quarters of an hour, or otherwise he found himself the rest of the day in a state of agitation. When he had once put the fluid in motion within himself, it was necessary to let it pass off in the direction he had given it. He ceased, if at the end of a quarter of an hour his hands were not warmed. In the last case, he was sure that he had not acted ; in the first, he was sure of the con- trary ; and I have never seen him deceived, although at first the patient experienced nothing. I am acquainted with a lady, who, when she begins to magnetize, experiences much heat in the hands. After a sitting of three quarters of an hour, (more or less, which depends upon whether the person she magnetizes draws off more or less of the fluid,) her hands become very cold. Then she acts no more. The same thing takes place when she magnetizes water. Her magnetic faculties are re- established after an hour of repose, especially when she walks in the open air. Some magnetizers feel, at the end of several minutes, a correspondence which is established between their two hands, so that when they place one upon the stomach of the patient, and the other behind his back, it seems to them as 226 TO DEVELOPE IN OURSELVES [CHAP. VIII. if their bands touched each other. This sensation proves that the fluid penetrates the patient. Let us now come to the effects produced upon the mag. netizer by the reaction of his patient. These effects occur only when the communication is well established. They can manifest themselves to a greater or less degree by three phenomena of a different order. The first of these phe- nomena is very ordinary, and known to a great number of magnetizers. The two others do not show themselves dis- tinctly except to those who have made them an object of incessant study ; perhaps it is even necessary to have pecu- liar dispositions to acquire the knowledge of them. I here stop a moment to tell the means which the author of the work published by M. de Lausanne has pointed out to establish the intimate communication which is necessary to the end which he proposes, namely, the examination of diseases. Place yourself in such a manner that all the parts of your body may be as much as possible opposite to the corres- ponding parts of the patient's body, and hold him by the thumbs six or eight minutes, directing your will and con- centrating your attention upon him. Then make very slow passes along the arms and before the body, from the head to the feet, or at least to the knees. Withdraw yourself by degrees to make passes at first at the distance of an inch, then at several inches, giving to your hands only the force necessary to sustain them ; continuing to observe well all your sensations. Here I will tell you what you will experience, in a man- ner more or less sensible, perhaps at the first time, perhaps at the end of eight or ten sittings, perhaps only at the end of some months. I am ignorant whether there are persons CHAP. VIII.] THE MAGNETIC FACULTIES. 227 who have not the necessary temperament to obtain this end. To determine this, it would be requisite to know whether they who have never attained it, have not like me failed in patience and perseverance in their researches, and whether the habit of magnetizing without taking notice of their sen- sations, has not hindered them from following the necessary course to develope them. These are the three phenomena, and this is the advantage derivable from them. 1. While drawing your hands slowly before your pa- tient at the distance of three or four inches, and holding your fingers slightly bent, you will feel, either at the ends of the fingers, or at the palm of the hand, different sensations as they pass along before the affected organ of the patient. These sensations will be either of cold, or of prickly heat, or of slight pain, or of numbness. They will indicate to you the principal seat of the disease, and consequently the part upon which you ought to direct the action. 2, You may experience a feeling of pain or a difficulty in the internal organs of your body, corresponding with those which are affected in your patient. This is a sympa- thetic action noticed in many somnambulists. It is evident that this sensation intimates to us the seat and the nature of the disease, I will add one thing, the reason of which I will soon explain. If you experience pain in an organ on the right or on the left of your body, you should first ap- proach by little and little to render the sensation more strong, and then withdraw yourself gradually to the distance of two or three feet ; for it may be that the affected organ of your patient may act at a little distance upon the organ in you which is opposite ; that his spleen, for instance, may make its action be felt upon your liver; but by withdrawing 228 TO DEVELOPE IN OURSELVES [CHAP. VIII. yourself, you may be sure that the sensation will be trans- ferred from the right, to the analagous organ on the left. 3. And here there is something more important which has been unhappily too much neglected in our day. You will perceive, as it were, a vapor which escapes from certain parts of the body of your patient and takes a certain direc- tion. This vapor will act upon you as a slight force which will attract or repel your hand, and which will conduct it from one place to another, provided you abandon yourself entirely to its action. These are what are called the currents. The faculty of perceiving them is often acquired only after a time, longer or shorter ; but when they are once recognised, you will follow them naturally, you magnetize as it were by in- stinct ; you will second nature by carrying the vital action upon the deficient organ ; you will augment or moderate your force at will. It is by these currents that the analo- gous organs of the magnetizer are sometimes affected. The currents will enable you to perceive a crisis which is at hand. They also indicate the moment when it is terminat- ed, for then calmness is re-established. You are withdrawn far from the body, and you feel nothing further to attract you to it. They also enable you to discover the principal focus of the disease, and they direct you to follow all its ramifications. A very severe disorder of the liver, or of the spleen, or of some other viscus of the abdomen, is often accompanied with no pain in that organ ; but it produces either headaches, or oph- thalmias, or earaches, or appearances of an affection of the chest. The currents conduct you to the part where the cause of the disease resides, they direct your action, they can even indicate to the physician the remedies to be employed to aid and favor the work of nature, excited by magnetism. CHAP. Villi] THE MAGNETIC FACULTIES. 229 It is almost useless to say that to observe the currents carefully, the magnetizer must be free from distraction ; but it is well to remark, that when he has once habituated him- self to being directed by them, he needs to make no effort of attention to follow them. I am acquainted with a man who was closely allied to him whose work I have cited. He perceives the disorder of those whom he magnetizes ; he experiences beforehand, and sometimes in a very painful manner, the crises which they are soon to experience, and which he developes in them. When he is in communication, he examines succes- sively all the parts of the patient's body, he shuts his eyes, and concentrates his attention. He very soon perceives his hand to be as it were wrapped in a vapor, the current of which he follows involuntarily, and this vapor conducts him by different routes to the place where it must stop. I have sometimes seen him magnetize several hours in succession. He does not cease until the crisis is terminated. I will enter into no further details concerning the currents, because those who shall once have acquired the faculty of perceiving them, will read the work I have cited, and then conduct themselves according to the experience they will soon secure. But I ought to add something relative to the sensations which are felt at the ends of the fingers, at the roots of the nails, or in the palm of the hand, because this phenomenon is more frequent, and it is good to be aware of the indications thence to be derived, according to the opinions of those who have observed them. What I am going to say on this subject, is extracted from the work entitled " Principes du Magnetisme," and from that of Doctor Maineduc. "A sensation of cold almost always indicates an obstruc- tion, an enlargement, inaction, or a stagnation of the hu- 230 TO DEVELOPE IN OURSELVES [CHAP. VIIu mors. You must at first exert a gentle and soothing action, augment it gradually, concentrate it upon the spot that im- parts the cold, and then spread it out to re-establish the equilibrium. If the patient feels a sensation of cold from your hand, you should continue until you have changed it into a sensation of gentle heat, in which you will not always succeed at the first sitting." — Prin. du Mag. "A dry and burning heat announces a great tension of the fibres, and inflammation. You must use the circular motion, to spread the fluid, until this heat becomes gentle and moist . ' ' — Ibid. "The pricking sensations at the ends of your fingers, in- dicate the existence of a humor more or less acrid, if they are felt when you hold them before the viscera ; they are the proof of an irritation, and of what is commonly called acrimony (acrete) in the blood, if they are perceived when you touch the head or the arm." — Ibid. "Numbness at the ends of your fingers indicates want of circulation. You must then magnetize with activity, to re- establish the currents." — Ibid. " The magnetizer sometimes feels a fluctuating movement in his hands and fingers. This indicates a movement of the patient's blood, and an incipient evacuation, which you must favor, by making passes along the sides and thighs." — Ibid. "When there is sordes (glaires) in the stomach or lungs, the magnetizer experiences a sensation of thickness and stiffness of the fingers. Sometimes he feels at the ends of the fingers a circular pressure, as though a thread was bound round them." — Maineduc. " When the nerves have lost their tone, he perceives a weakness in his fingers and wrist." — Ibid. CHAP. VIII.] ' THE MAGNETIC FACULTIES. 231 " In obstructions, the magnetizer has a sensation of acri- mony, dryness, contraction, and formication, if there is no inflammation ; and of heat, if there is inflammation." — Ibid. "Contusions produce heaviness and swelling in the hand. —Ibid. " The presence of worms excites formication and pinching (pincement) in the fingers." — Ibid. I will say no more on this subject, because if it appears to me indisputable that the sensations experienced by the magnetizer indicate the seat of the disease, it seems very doubtful whether he can, by means of them, determine its character. We are indebted to M. Babst for the knowledge of the means of exploring the nature of a disease, in which he has always succeeded. He has observed that when he puts his hand upon the seat of the disease, the pulse is raised. In consequence, after being put in communication, he draws his right hand slowly before the body of the patient, he holds at the same time his left hand closed, so as to feel the pulsation of the artery in the thumb, and directs all his attention to that hand. When the pulsations are accel- erated, he stops ; and if the acceleration continues, he con- cludes that he has found the seat of the disorder. I have tried in vain to experience this effect, but I advise magnet- izers to observe it. It seems to me that a person might feel more distinctly the acceleration of the arterial movement, by placing a finger of the left hand upon the temporal artery. The theory treated of in this chapter will not be of much utility to the greater part of the persons to whom this in- struction is addressed ; but as many of them will be disposed to acquire the faculties of which I speak, I thought it my duty to point out the means of developing them. Let not u* 232 TO DEVELOPE IN OURSELVES, &C. [CHAP. VI11. others be disquieted on this account ; by conforming to the principles I have given, they will be always sure of doing much good. Magnetism considered as a means of relieving our fellow- men, of aiding the action of nature, of facilitating the crises, of assisting ordinary medicine, is an instrument of charity which all men of good intentions may employ with success, without any study, without any knowledge of the physical sciences. One might even say that an innate instinct often induces us to exercise it ; and perhaps the practice of ob- serving every thing, of explaining every thing, of admitting nothing which lacks accordance with our acquired notions, of rejecting every thing of which our senses do not afford a direct proof, and every thing not found in the philosophy we have adopted, is much less favorable to the exercise of this faculty than a benevolent simplicity unaccustomed to investigation and discussion. Why do children whom we have seen magnetize, magnetize with success ? They do not account for what they do, but they believe, they will, and they perform cures in proportion to their strength. Yet magnetism presents phenomena which may enlight- en us upon our physical organization, and upon the faculties of our soul. It is an action in living beings resembling at- traction in inanimate matter. This action hath its laws. Let physicians, physiologists, and metaphysicians, unite to study them, and they will soon make a science whose appli- cation will add much to the various branches of knowledge which are destined to strengthen the ties that bind men together, and diminish the ills to which they are exposed. CHAPTER IX. OF THE ACCESSORY MEANS TO INCREASE THE MAGNETIC ACTION, AND OF THOSE BY WHICH THE DIRECT ACTION IS SUPPLIED. The magnetizer can communicate his fluid to many objects, and these objects become either the conductors of his action, or proper instruments of its transmission, and produce magnetic effects upon persons with whom he is in communication. He can also, by means of some one of these auxiliaries, and without faiiguing himself, conduct the treatment of many patients at the same time, when they are not somnambulists. These auxiliaries are water, woollen, cotton cloth, plates of glass, &c. which have been magnetized ; magnetized trees, and magnetic troughs or reservoirs. The chain, or the union of many persons holding each other by the hands, and in harmony under the direction of one magnetizer, is also among the auxiliary means. Magnetized water is one of the most powerful and salu- tary agents that can be employed. The patients are made to drink of it, when the communication is established, either at or between their meals. It carries the magnetic fluid directly into the stomach, and thence into all the organs. It facilitates the crises to which nature is disposed, and therefore sometimes excites the perspiration, sometimes the evacuations, and sometimes the circulation of the blood. It 234 TO AUGMENT THE ACTION, AND [CHAP. IX. strengthens the stomach, appeases pains, and often supplies the place of several medicaments. To magnetize water, take the vessel which contains it, and pass the two hands alternately from the top to the bot- tom of the vessel. Introduce the fluid at the opening of the vessel by presenting the fingers close to it, several times in succession. Sometimes you may breathe upon the water, or stir it round with the thumb. You may magnetize a glass of water, by holding it by the bottom in one hand, and with the other, throwing the fluid upon the glass. There is one process which I employ in preference, in order to magnetize a bottle of water, when I am certain it is not disagreeable to the person whom I magnetize. It consists in placing the bottle upon my knee, and applying my mouth to the nose. I thus throw my breath into the bottle, and at the same time I make passes with both hands upon all the surface. I believe this process charges strong- ly, but it is not necessary. It is sufficient to magnetize it by the hands. One may magnetize a flagon of water in two or three minutes ; a glass of water in one minute. It is unnecessary to repeat here that the processes pointed out for magnetizing water, like every thing else, would be absolutely useless, if they were not employed with attention, and with a deter- minate will. I have seen magnetized water produce effects so marvel- lous, that I was afraid of having deceived myself, and could not be wholly convinced, until I had made a thousand ex- periments. Magnetizers in general have not made suffic- ient use of it. They would have spared themselves much fatigue, they could have dispensed with many medicines, CHAP. IX.] TO SUPPLY THE DIRECT ACTION. 235 they would have hastened the cure, if they had accorded to this means all the confidence it merits. In internal diseases especially, magnetized water acts in an astonishing manner. It carries the magnetism directly to the organs affected. You give, for instance, a glass of magnetized water to one who has a pain in the side ; some minutes after he has drunk it, it seems to him as if that water had descended to the seat of the disease. For eight days in succesion, I have purged a patient with magnetized water. The effect was the same as if she had taken the ordinary medicine, with this difference, the operation was not attended with colic. Doctor Roullier says that one of his patients was thus purged five or six times a day for more than a month, and that the evacuations, the conse- quences of which under ordinary medicine would have justly excited alarm, procured ease and a return of health. I knew a patient who was cured in the same manner. I have seen magnetized water entirely overcome inactivity of the intestines which had lasted many years. Magnetized water is a very great help in convalescence. It gives strength ; it restores the tone of the stomach ; it renders digestion easy ; it throws off from the system, by perspiration or otherwise, every thing which resists the en- tire re-establishment of health. A man of merit, whom I have now the satisfaction of numbering among my friends, was affected with colic pains in the stomach and bowels, for which he had during seven years in vain employed all the remedies of medicine. They came on by crises which lasted two or three days, and re- turned every week. His residence was sixty leagues off, and he came to Paris to seek some further advice. He made application to me. He inspired me with much inter- 236 TO AUGNENT THE ACTION, AND [CHAP. IX. est, and I undertook his treatment. After the third sitting, I made him drink a glass of magnetized water. It produced in his stomach a very great heat. He told me that it seemed to him as if he had drunk a glass of spirits of wine. Two minutes afterwards this, heat expanded through the whole system, and was followed by a gentle perspiration. From that moment I caused him to make use of the mag- netized water ; and in fifteen days I had the pleasure of delivering him from all his sufferings. He then wished to return home. " I am very well," said he, " but I am going to make a decisive experiment. I never could travel in a carriage without a great deal of pain." I gave him two bottles of magnetized water, and advised him to drink of them by the way. He had hardly been a half hour in the carriage, before he began to feel ill ; he then drank a glass of the water, and during more than four hours, he felt no further inconvenience. By thus drinking every four hours his glass of water, he reached home without the least fatigue. Yet he was not entirely cured ; and there remains in him the principle of disease, which it is perhaps impossible to destroy. But his wife magnetizes him when it appears requisite, and in the evening, when he finds himself indis- posed, she gives him a glass of magnetized water, which soothes him and makes him pass the night well. When he is obliged to travel, the magnetized water always ren- ders him the same service, and this experiment has been repeatedly tried for five years. J have several times made the experiment of putting a bottle of magnetized water at the feet of a patient, who. while in bed, was constantly cold at the feet ; and in certain cases, I have seen it excite a great deal of heat, and bring on a perspiration. The bottle acts here only as every other CHAP. IX.] TO SUPPLY THE DIRECT ACTION. 237 magnetized object will. Nevertheless, the result of this experiment was remarkable, because a bottle of water ought to produce cold, and not heat, as it often happens when the patient is not disposed to this sort of crisis. Patients often perceive a peculiar taste in the magnetized water, and generally they distinguish it very well from that which is not magnetized. I thought I could see that the taste which the patient found in it, indicated the species of remedies of which he had need. For example, if he found it bitter, and yet drank it with pleasure, it gave grounds of presumption that bitter things were salutary to him. I have not made this observation frequently enough to state it as a fact. I mention it, be- cause, in many cases, any one can easily verify it. When the magnetizer cannot give his patient more than two or three sittings a week, magnetized water supplies the direct action. The use of it must be continued some time after the treatment has ceased. I am certain that with epileptics, or persons attacked with a nervous disease, which, to those who are not physicians, appears to be epilepsy, magnetized water, continued for many months after some sittings of direct magnetism, has caused the fits to disappear entirely. I believe that the water given to the patient to drink, ought always to be magnetized, by the same magnetizer who has undertaken the treatment. This is a consequence of the principle I have laid down, that a patient ought not to be magnetized by many persons who have not a perfect congeniality with the first magnetizer, and that the fluids of various individuals, not having the same quality, and not acting in the same manner, we ought not to unite their ac- tion. 238 TO AUGMENT THE ACTION, AND [CHAP. IX. Some very remarkable phenomena confirm this opinion. Somnambulists distinguish very well when an object has been magnetized by several persons, and this mixture of divers fluids, is sometimes insupportable to them. We do not yet know how long the magnetized water pre- serves its virtue, but it certainly retains it for many days, and numerous facts seem to prove it not to have been lost after several weeks. Nevertheless, when one lives near the patient, it is proper to magnetize every day the water or other drinks of which he makes use. Some food, also, may be magnetized in the same manner, and especially liquid food, such as milk and broth. Many persons with whom milk does not agree, like it very well when it has been magnetized. It appears that magnetized water exercises no influence upon persons who have never been magnetized.* It gene- rally produces marked effects only after two or three sit- tings. In order to have the fluid of the magnetizer act upon the patient, the communication must be established ; and it is never established except by direct and immediate manip- ulation. I have extended my observations upon magnetized water very much, but those who make use of it with confidence, will discover that I have not said enough upon the advan- * Some observations recently communicated to me have convinced me that my conjecture was false, and that magnetized water does sometimes act in a very efficacious manner upon persons who have never been magnetized. I can cite, among other instances, that of a woman who had been troubled for a long time with dyspepsy, who was promptly cured by this means. Objects magnetized can in the same degree exert a very salutary action, although no communication has been previously established. CHAP. IX.] TO SUPPLY THE DIRECT ACTION. 239 tages to be derived from it. Yet I ought to add, that there are some persons on whom it appears to exert no action. The number of these, however, is very small. Magnetized reservoirs or troughs, are vessels filled with magnetized materials, and provided with conductors to direct the fluid which they contain. The most common mode of constructing them is the following : Take a wooden vessel, two feet high, larger or smaller, according to the number of persons to be placed round it, having the bottom elevated an inch from the floor by the projection of the sides. Place an iron rod in the centre to serve as the principal conductor, having a diameter of half an inch or of one inch, descending to within two inches of the bottom, and rising above the trough two or three feet. The lower end of this iron rod should be firmly fixed in a glass foot, or in a jug, so that it may retain its vertical posi- tion. Put into the vessel bottles of magnetized water, or other magnetized substances ; cork them, and run through each cork a piece of iron wire, projecting two or three inches ; and arrange them in such a manner that the neck may be near the central conductor, and communicate with it by the iron wire which pierces the cork. Then place a second range of bottles above the first. If the baquet or trough is large, you can put two ranges of bottles in the same order ; the neck of one being placed in the bottom of the other. This being done, you will fill the vessel with water, white sand well washed, pounded glass, and iron filings, all well magnetized. Place upon it a cover in two pieces, fitted closely together, having an opening in the mid- die for the central conductor. At a short distance from the circumference, at points corresponding to the spaces between the bottles, you will pierce several holes for the purpose of v 240 TO AUGMENT THE ACTION, AND [CHAP. IX. thrusting into the reservoir, iron conductors bent and movea- ble, which are raised and lowered at pleasure, so that one may direct them against any part of the body, and pass the hands above them to draw off the fluid. And lastly, you will attach to the central conductor, cords of cotton or wool, which the patients may twine around their bodies. Although every thing that is placed in the reservoir has been magnetized beforehand, the reservoir is to be regular- ly magnetized, when its construction has been completed, before the cover is placed upon it. When first this ope- ration is performed it takes a considerable time, nearly an hour. It is even proper to repeat it three or four days in succession. But when once the reservoir has been well charged, it is readily charged again, by the magnetizer's holding the central conductor in his hands several minutes. I do not know whether reservoirs filled with water are more easily charged with the magnetic fluid, than those which contain between* the bottles only pounded glass, iron filings, or simply sand ; but it is certain that these last are more pro- per and convenient, and for this reason I give them the pre- ference. It is difficult to prevent the water's escaping from the baquet, and it might become foul in the course of time. The same magnetizer ought always to charge the reservoir. I will say no more about the large magnetic reservoirs, because we dp not have recourse to them except when we wish to magnetize a great number ; in which case we ought to have a great deal of leisure and devote ourselves to mag- netism. Fie who does this ought to procure the principal works published on this subject and to study them with care. But a large bottle filled with magnetized water, furnished with an iron wire inserted into the cork, and forming a cur- vature of from three to six inches terminated by a knob, is CHAP. IX.] TO SUPPLY THE DIRECT ACTION. 241 a little reservoir which keeps up the magnetic action, and may be very useful. The magnetizer charges this bottle occasionally without taking out the cork. The water contained in bottles placed upon the reservoir, and put in communication, by an iron wire, with the central conductor, becomes magnetized of itself. You might place on the top of the central conductor a small cap of iron or of wood, in which you have put silk or cotton, which will become very strongly magnetized. We now come to discourse of magnetized objects, of the mode of using them, and of the effects they produce. Tissues wrought in silk or cotton thread, the leaf of a tree, plates of glass, gold or steel,* and other magnetized objects placed upon the seat of the pain, are often sufficient to ease it ; but they produce no effect until the magnetic action has been established. I have very often seen mag- netized socks produce a warmth of the feet which could not have been obtained by any other means. These socks pre- serve their virtue during four or five days. It then grows feeble and is lost. A magnetized handkerchief carried upon the stomach, sustains the action during the interval of the sittings, and often calms spasms and nervous movements. Sometimes the headache is dissipated by inveloping the head during the night with a magnetized bandage. I ought to speak here of the use which is made of plates of glass magnetized, both because I have often succeeded by means of them, in calming, with surprising ease, local pains in the viscera, and because their application is usually accompanied with a very remarkable phenomenon. * Metals whose oxides are dangerous must not be used for this purpose. 242 TO AUGMENT THE ACTION, AND [CHAP. IX. It now remains to speak of the chain, a method formerly in great vogue, and which is the most effectual of all for augmenting the power of magnetism and putting it in cir- culation, but which, though it has great advantages, has also great inconveniences. I am going to explain what it is, how it is formed, and under what circumstances and con- ditions it may be useful. If you have near you many persons in good health, who have confidence in magnetism, who feel an interest in the patient, and who wish to, aid you in the cure, arrange them in a circle. Let them all take each other's hands, holding on by the thumbs, so that he who is on the right of the pa- tient, may touch him with the left hand, and he who is on the left may touch him with the right hand. You will form a part of this chain, and when you wish to make passes with your hands, the two persons by the side of you will place their hands upon your shoulders, or upon your knees. If you place yourself in the centre, your two neighbors will approach each other so that the chain be not interrupted. The magnetic fluid will be soon in circulation, the patient will feel the effect strongly, and your power will be consid- erably augmented. But, to have a chain good, it is necessary that all who compose it should be thoughtful only of the patient, and unite constantly with you in intention ; without this condition, it is more injurious than beneficial. Some persons in the chain often feel the effects of the magnetic action ; they faint, or go to sleep. But that does not counteract the effects so much as a single act of inattention. You should avoid admitting into the chain patients sus- ceptible of nervous irritation. It would be dangerous to put persons there who are tainted with contageous diseases. CHAP. IX.] TO SUPPLY THE DIRECT ACTION. 243 The chain might be made use of in families, when there are to be found from four to six persons who take a lively interest in the patient, and who desire that magnetism may be of advantage to him. The chain should, as far as possible, be composed of the same persons. If a new individual be admitted into it, es- pecially after it has been once formed, he ought first to be placed in communication. Although the baquet has a milder and slower action than direct manipulation, persons attacked with severe diseases which do not spring from morbid inaction, are exposed to crises which should be soothed apart. When these crises occur, they may have influence upon the other patients, and even be communicated by sympathy or by imitation. We know how violent these crises may become, when we re- member how they were in the time of Mesmer. It is true, we did not then understand how to calm them, and the same accidents did not take place at Strasburg, yet it is always proper to take precautions ; and if you assemble a large number around the baquet, it is necessary to have several magnetizers, and one of them should have an acquaintance with medicine. I think then that in the domestic practice of magnetism, it is not necessary to make use of the baquet for nervous affections, but solely for such diseases as inter- mittent fevers, dropsy, enlargements of the glands, rheumatic pains, debility, sluggish circulation, &c. In these it would be very useful to the patient to go every day and charge himself with magnetism at the baquet, previously to being magnetized by direct manipulation. As to the chain, several conditions are requisite, which are often difficult to fulfil. 1st. All who compose it ought to be in good health. 2d. They should be such as have an Y* 244 To AUGMENT THE ACTION, &C. [cHAP. IX. interest in the sick person. 3d. No one of them should in- terrupt the action, either by his curiosity, or by the desire of exerting a particular influence. All these conditions having been fulfilled in some treatments which I have pursued, I have obtained from it very ener- getic and very salutary effects ; but when one of these condi- tions fails, I have known it to be more injurious than useful, In diseases of the lymphatic system, in those of inaction, &c, it is doubtless beneficial to have recourse to the chain, if it be possible to form a good one. In disorders of the nervous system, or of certain viscera, disorders whose treat- ment exhibits crises, and especially in those where somnam- bulism takes place, it is absolutely necessary that the patient should have near him only his magnetizer, and the person he has chosen from the commencement to assist at the sittings, It is essential that the most perfect harmony should reign in a magnetic treatment ; and this cannot be obtained unless all things are directed by a single will, to which all the others are in unison. Hence it follows, that in a magnetic treatment, whatever may be the number of the patients, and of magnetizers, there ought to be but one chief to whom all those who co-operate in the action shall be in submission during the sitting. If he who has established the treatment, and charged himself with its direction, has for co-operators persons better informed or more powerful than himself, he must not invite them to take the lead ; and they must be very cautious not to exert a direct influence. They will regard themselves merely as the aids and the instruments of the leader, and must magnetize under his direction, following the processes which he points out to them. The observance of this rule is especially important when there are somnam- bulists, I speak of this in my chapter on somnambulism. CHAPTER X. OF THE STUDIES BY WHICH A PERSON MAY PERFECT HIMSELF IN THE KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. Magnetism may be considered under two points of view : either as the mere employment of a faculty which God has given us, or as a science whose theory embraces the great- est problems of physiology and psychology, and whose ap- plications are extremely varied. Hence it follows that the persons who are engaged in this subject, may be divided into two classes. The first class comprehends those, who, having recog- nised in themselves the faculty of doing good by magnet- ism, or at least hoping to succeed therein, wish to make use of it in their families, or among their friends, or with some poor patients, but who, having duties to fulfil or business to follow, do not magnetize except in circumstances where it appears to them necessary, without seeking publicity, with- out any motive but that of charity, without any other aim than that of curing or relieving suffering humanity. The second class is composed of men, who, having leis- ure, wish to join to the practice of magnetism, the study of the phenomena it exhibits, to enter largely into it, to estab- lish treatments for taking care of several patients at a time, to form pupils capable of aiding them, to have somnambu- lists who may enlighten them, to examine closely, compare and arrange the phenomena, in such a way as to establish a regular code of laws whose principles may be certain, 246 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X. and whose consequences extending daily, may lead to new appiications. This class is separated from the preceding by a great number of degrees which must be successively mounted, before one can find himself situated where he can command a more extended horizon. I therefore advise those of the former class not to think of passing beyond their limits un- less they are masters of their own time, and have some preliminary knowledge. Their lot is very good ; they are strangers to the vanities and the inquietudes which attend new attempts, to the uncertainty which springs from the conflict of opinions and of various points of view under which things are presented to us ; they taste without mix- ture or distraction the satisfaction of doing good. May they be so wise as not to meddle with any theory or to search for extraordinary phenomena. Let them continue to em- ploy with confidence and self-collectedness the processes by which they Kave succeeded, without any other design than to benefit the patient in whom they are interested. When they have obtained a cure, they will speak of it un- boastingly, so as to engage other persons to employ the same means. The instruction I am publishing is sufficient to direct them in all cases ; they will not even need to have recourse to it except according to circumstances. As to the persons who desire to belong to the second class, I advise them to consider at first the extent of the career they will have to run. It is better not to enter it, than to stop in the midst of their enterprise. In what ap- pertains to the practice, a prudent simplicity is preferable to science. In what relates to theory, imperfect notions ex- pose us to dangerous errors. The laborer who cultivates his farm as his fathers did before him, collects every year CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 247 the price of his labors. Should he give way to an inclina- tion to pursue an experimental method, he might be ruined before he is enlightened by his own experience. It is not in my power to impart to others much of the knowledge they ought to have ; but I perceive the need of it. I see the superiority of those who possess it ; and I could point out the mode they must pursue to acquire it, and especially the disposition of mind which is requisite to direct its application to the object in view. I think it useful therefore to end this work with some ad- vice to those who wish to elevate themselves into the region of which I have only had a glimpse, but the chart of which is well known to me through the relations of those who have run over it with more or less success. I suppose the men whom I now address to be entirely convinced of the power of magnetism, and to have recognised in themselves the faculty of using it, and of producing the most surprising and the most salutary effects. Without this first condition, what I am going to say would be to them absolutely useless. It is desirable that persons who wish to study this sub- ject thoroughly, should have at first some elementary no- tions of physics, of anatomy, of physiology and of medicine, in order to appreciate the facta, and to avoid being duped by the errors which are found in various books. There is also a necessity for them to be versed in that part of philos- ophy which treats of the origin of ideas, of the develope- ment and of the relation of the various faculties of the soul, so that the view of certain marvellous facts may not precip- itate them into false systems. Supposing a person to have the dispositions, the faculties and the preliminary knowledge of which I speak, he must read in order what has been written upon magnetism. I 248 0F ™E STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X. think that they who are not acquainted with foreign lan- guages may commence with my Critical History, not be- cause this work is worth more than many others, but be- cause it presents in a mass, and gives an idea of, the history, the proofs, the processes, the phenomena, the application to the cure of diseases, the means of avoiding the inconveniences, and finally, because it contains a succinct notice of all the books which have appeared in France upon the same sub- ject at the time when it was published. To those books, which I have classified, may be added Les Annales due Magnetisme, La Bibliotheque du Mag. netisme, and other works recently printed, of which it is easy to procure a catalogue. You should not neglect to inform yourself of the objections made by physicians, and of the explanations they have given of the phenomena, the reality of which they do not deny.* You will consult the works on medicine and physiology, in which the authors, treating of questions foreign to magnet- ism, have been led to assent to its action and to the effects it produces. Such is the work of M. Georget, entitled " Physiologie du Systeme Nerveux." You will also exam- * You will find in my " Defence of Magnetism," some references to most of the articles in which it has been attacked. Those objec- tions which it is essential to know, were afterwards collected, and presented with much talent in the article - Mesmerism," in the Encyclopaedia. I owe thanks to the author of the article for the great politeness with which he has spoken of me. I do not think myself deserving of the eulogium he passes upon me ; but I think if his article had not been composed before the publication of my " Defence of Magnetism," he would have found in it a solution of most of the difficulties he proposes ; and I would have voluntarily depended upon his judgment. CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 249 ine into the nature of the diseases in which some of the most extraordinary phenomena of magnetism are spontaneously presented, as may be seen in the work of Doctor Petetin, and in the history of Mademoiselle Julie, by M. le Baron de Strombeck. You will not fail also to read the fine dissertation of Van Helmont, the writings of Maxwell, of Wirdig, and other authors of the same time, who are quoted by Thouret in his "Recherches et-Doutes," although he read them superficially. But the instruction to be obtained from French and Latin books, is nothing compared to what may be obtained by those who are acquainted with foreign languages. The Dutch work of the celebrated Dr. Backer de Groningue, contains excellent precepts and very curious facts ; and the German works of Kluge, Wienholt, Wolfart, Eschenmayer Passivant, Ennemoser, Kieser, and Nees-von-Esenbeck, are an inexhaustible mine. All these authors agree to the same facts ; they differ in regard to method and explanation; they have combined the knowledge acquired by magnetism with what they have drawn from other sciences; and several of them have associated the theory of magnetism with the most elevated philosophy. Ennemoser has much erudition ; and although not much of a critic, he points out traces of magnetism in the historians and philosophers of antiquity. Kluge was the first to give a classical work, in which phe- nomena are compared and explained by a very ingenious hypothesis, based chiefly upon anatomy and physiology. Wienholt collects a great number of facts carefully observed, and ingenuously discussed. Wolfart has published in sue- cession all that he has observed, either in his individual prac- tice or in his public treatment, in which he is aided by sev- eral of his pupils. He has thrown great light upon the ap- 250 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X, plication of magnetism to the cure of diseases. He adopt- ed, expanded, and rectified the theory of Mesrner. Eschen- mayer admits the existence of an organic ether, spread every where, and much more subtile than light. In other respects he is a metaphysical spiritualist. Passivant unites his the- ory to the most touching and sublime religious sentiments. His work carries light to the head, and charity to the heart. Kieser is a bold and systematic genius, who searches for the explanation of the phenomena, in a very singular theory of the general system of nature. Nees-von-Esenbeck, and the authors of " Hermes," modified the hypothesis of Kieser. Without adopting the opinions of these various authors, you will at least derive this advantage from the study of them, namely, the certainty of the principles in which they all agree, and the facts upon which they equally depend, which have been observed with the greatest care. In studying these various works upon magnetism, we ought not to lose any opportunity to make observations for ourselves. I ought here to lay it down as an important principle, unhappily too much neglected, not. only by those who are pursuing these investigations by themselves, but still more by those who have undertaken the task of en. lightening others by their writings. In all sciences we should commence by the most simple principles, and pass, by degrees, to such as are complex. The solution of the highest problems in physics, would be unintelligible to him who is ignorant of the laws of motion, and the action of electricity and caloric. It is the same in the study of this subject. You should begin by closely examining the most simple and the most common effects, such as are daily produced with perfect facility ; such as merely prove that magnetism produces influences which CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 251 are peculiar to itself, before we think of taking notice of the striking phenomena, such as somnambulism ; for these are complicated by several causes which it is first necessary to study separately. While reading works published upon magnetism, you should not neglect to form acquaintance with persons who practise it, to see, test, and collect new phenomena, to dis- tinguish what is common to all, and what is peculiar to each of them. You will endeavor to discriminate in the various phenomena which the same somnambulist often presents, those which originate in the action of the magnetizer, from those which may have been produced or modified by the will or by the imagination of the patient ; those which are owing to a very great excitation of the organs of sense, from those which announce the developement of a peculiar sense ; finally those which demonstrate a clairvoyance more or less extensive, but which is displayed only in re- gard to real and sensible objects, from those where the same clairvoyance is clouded with illusions. You will also ex- amine whether there is not a magnetic force pervading na- ture which acts upon men when disposed to receive it, and which is placed in circumstances that may concentrate and direct it. After having collected a great number of phenomena, you should endeavor to class and compare them, and to es- tablish a theory resulting from this comparison, if per- chance we have arrived to the point where it would be truly philosophical to form a theory. Up to the present time, nearly all the writers who have wished to lay down general principles, have founded them upon some facts of the same order, without regard to other facts to which they are not applicable. This is very natural, for the reason that the w 252 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X. somnambulists of the same magnetizer have generally a certain analogy among themselves, because of the identity of the influence exerted over them. Hence, to discover general laws, it is necessary not only to have seen many facts with your own eyes, but to have collected a great number of others, which are to be carefully proven, and all their circumstances scrutinized. As to the curative action of magnetism, independently of the indications which somnambulism has been able to fur- nish, we cannot know how far it extends, in what diseases and upon what temperaments it is most efficacious, until physicians shall have submitted to the magnetic treatment a great number of patients whom they have examined be- fore the treatment, to determine the nature of the disease, and to know if it be curable by ordinary means, and after the treatment, to judge of the changes that may have been produced. Yet the multitude of cures effected in a short time by the magnetic practice, in certain disorders whose character is well marked, such as rheumatisms, intermittent fevers, glandular enlargements, contusions, &c, is a proof of its efficaciousness in diseases of the same kind. I have now pointed out the kinds of knowledge to be acquired, and the objects requiring attention, if you wish to examine the general subject of magnetism, to determine the rank it occupies among the grand phenomena of animated nature, to discover its laws and to fix its applications. But I have not yet spoken of the plan to be pursued to gain skill in the practice, without which the notions drawn from books amount to nothing. I have merely said it is necessary to pass from the most simple to the most complex facts, and this is all that the method of study proper for magnetism has in common with what is appropriate to other sciences. CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 253 In these the more ardor one has for the work, the more activity in vanquishing obstacles, the more desire of discov- ering truth, the greater will be his progress. In the inves- tigation of magnetism, these qualities would be more injuri- ous than useful, if they were not united with much reserve, patience and moderation. In the physical sciences and even in medicine, there are two means of acquiring knowl- edge — observation and experiment ; in the practice of mag- netism there is but one, for he who magnetizes ought never to make experiments. He should let the phenomena pre- sent and develope themselves, and note them down after each sitting. The most difficult thing for a magnetizer who wishes to gain instruction, is, that he must have in himself, as it were, two persons who must not exist together, but successively ; one to act, and the other to reason. While you are magnetizing, you must occupy yourself wholly with the cure of the patient, to whom you have de- voted your time. You must not investigate, you must not take note of any thing, you must withdraw from all preju- dices, opinions, and knowledge ; even reason itself ought not to be busy ; the soul ought to have but one faculty active, the will to do good ; the mind but one idea, confidence of suc- cess.* * You must conform to this precept not only when you are your- self magnetizing, but also when you are admitted to see phenomena. You must then unite intentions with the magnetizer, and look on attentively without permitting yourself to form any judgment. In a word, you must conduct yourself when you assist at a magnetic sitting, just as if you were carrying on the process yourself, with this single difference, that, when you are merely a witness, you must not exert your will but in subordination to that of the magnetizer. 254 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X. But after the termination of the sitting, you will recal to your mind what you have seen ; you will take note of it, you will combine all the circumstances, search into the causes, and try to reach results which will be more certain as succeeding observations confirm them. The magnetizer, while acting, should have unbounded confidence ; he should doubt of nothing. But when he takes note of the phenom- ena presented to him, he should be distrustful, doubtful of every thing, and admit no fact except upon incontestible evi- dence ; no principle, unless supported by a series of obser- vations congruent with themselves, and which are not con- trary to any of the received truths of physics and physiology. This self-denial is a thing very difficult to men habituated to observe coolly, and to men who suffer themselves to be carried off by their imagination. And this is the reason why men who possess simplicity of character and little knowledge of the subject, are often more proper to cure dis- eases, than those who are versed in the sciences, and espe- cially than those who have a lively imagination. Greatrakes, the Irish gentleman, who was so successful in curing various diseases, was neither a learned man, nor an enthusiast. Many rustics and matrons, who believe they possess the gift of healing, some of them, bruises ; others, the toothache ; and others, attacks of fevers ; often succeed ; and if they were more enlightened they might not succeed so well. When I laid it down as a principle that the magnetizer ought to interdict himself from all experiment, I wished to speak solely of the direct action which one individual exerts over another by an emanation from himself, imparted by his will and by the appropriate processes, and of the natu- ral developement of phenomena which this action produces. CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 255 But this principle is no longer applicable, or at least it should be modified, as it respects modes of treatment, or the means of directing, strengthening, and concentrating the action which magnetism may exert of itself, when once put in mo- tion. Unon this subject, a man who has well studied the particular effects of this agent, and who has an acquaintance with the physical and natural sciences, ought to permit him- self various trials to ascertain the best means of employing it. For instance, what relates to the construction of ba- quets or magnetic reservoirs, to the direction of extensive treatments, to the employment of the chain and to the pre- cautions its requires, to the influence exerted by certain sub- stances, to the property which certain substances have of imparting a particular quality to the fluid passing through them, to the question whether there are bodies which inso- late the magnetic fluid* or retard its action, and others which are conductors of its action or concentrate it so as to render it stronger, to the difference which the seasons, the hour of the day, the presence or the absence of the light, the tern- perature, the state of the atmosphere, &c, can make in the effects of magnetism ; and finally, to the action of magnet- *What we call the magnetic fluid, may be, as Van Helmont thought, and as Kieser believes, an agent which penetrates all bod- ies. The recent discoveries of M. (Ersted, of M. Ampere, and of many other celebrated physicians ; the researches of Messieurs Provost and Dumas and of various physiologists, upon the influence of electricity in the phenomena of the animal economy; the obser- vations of M. de Humboldt upon the electric gymnotus, &c, may give us some light upon this subject. But the problem does not consist in this ; it is in the power which man has of directing this fluid, of modifying it, of communicating to it such or such a virtue. This problem I believe to be incapable of solution, because our ex- ternal senses teach us nothing upon the internal principle of life. W* 256 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X. ism upon animals, and even upon vegetables. All this can. not be known except by trials made prudently, but fre- quently, and taking note of all the circumstances. Let no one be in haste to form a theory ; for it is easy to select facts in support of such a hypothesis as one might desire to imagine, without having this scaffolding of plausible proofs serve for the erection of a solid edifice. It is necessary for a long time to collect all the known facts, to groupe, to ar- range, to class them, and to remain in doubt in relation to the causes, until we see a theory spring spontaneously from their arrangement, and until the applications and the conse- quences of this theory, lead to results seen and announced beforehand. A man of distinguished learning has just published in Ger- many, a work in two volumes octavo, in which he considers magnetism in all its relations. He believes there is in mag- netism two different actions. One which depends upon a vital principle spread throughout nature, and circulating in all bodies; the other, the same principle, modified by man, animated by his spirit, and directed by his will. He thinks that the first sort of magnetism, which he calls lellurism, or siderism, can be employed without the concurrence of the human will, and solely by the action of certain mineral or veg- etable substances. According to him a baquet regularity constructed can, without having been magnetized, act upon a patient who comes to place himself there every day for a certain time, and produce, in the course of time, most of the phenomena obtained by the magnetic processes. I invite philosophers to examine this theory. My ignorance of the German language does not permit me to judge of it ; but the testimony of Kieser is of great weight ; and if, as I sup- pose, there is reason to reject his theory, there is none at CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 257 all to deny the facts upon which he sustains it, and which are certainly worthy of attention. This is not the place to enter into greater details upon the researches to which a person should devote himself, when he wishes to study magnetism as a science. He who has this object in view, will learn, by reading the works pub- lished within a few years, what things ought most particu- larly to fix his attention. I merely recommend to him not to neglect any thing, to consult the works of the enemies of magnetism as well as those of its partizans, to search out in the books of historians, philosophers, and physicians, phe- nomena analogous to those which the practice of magnetism brings to our view, to separate them from all the hypotheses to which they have given birth, and not to be hasty in adopt- ing general principles. By reading the works published upon magnetism in the various schools, from Van Helmont to the present time, we shall soon perceive that there are ef- fects which have been exhibited every where, always with the same characteristics, and phenomena which are pre- sented only in certain schools and by certain magnetizers, and which one might vainly seek to reproduce himself. These phenomena ought not to be rejected ; the most of them are real, though often attributed to chimerical causes : people have drawn erroneous conclusions from them, and you cannot use too much care to distinguish facts in them- selves, from the colors with which they have been invested by enthusiastic and credulous narrators. I have now* pointed out the road for you to follow if you would reach the elevation from whence you may behold the subject in all its extent, penetrate its depths, see through the veil which covers some of its mysteries, free it from what does not belong to it, and determine the part it acts in the 258 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X. drama of nature. But upon the route I have traced out there are stumbling-blocks of which I should warn you, be- cause it is essential to avoid them if you would make a just application of the knowledge you have acquired by reading and observation I have said that one would gain but vague ideas from books, if he had not been first convinced by his own expe- rience of the power of magnetism. The phenomena of somnambulism which it offers are truly wonderful and in- structive, and it is impossible to get a conception of them if you have not seen some of them with your own eyes. The various relations that have been given, contain facts so un- like in appearance, that you cannot perceive the tie which connects them ; so marvellous, that you are dazzled, and know not on what to rest your faith. When you have once produced these extraordinary phenomena yourself, you are at least convinced of their reality : and you might employ the time whicji you would perhaps have uselessly sacrificed in satisfying yourself by reading, in examining its success- ive stages and its circumstances. Even in this case much attention and prudence are requisite, to discriminate in the discourses and in the perceptions of somnamblists what ap- pertains to the exaltation of the senses, to the nervous sus- ceptibility, to the influence of acquired ideas, to the errors of the imagination, from the manifestation or the develope- ment of a real faculty, absolutely foreign to those which we enjoy in our ordinary state. I have many examples of somnambulists endowed with an astonishing clairvoyance in the exercise of their new faculty applied to things positive and within their scope, who would speak at random if asked by what means they were enabled to see, and especially when requested to speak on subjects which excite their im- CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 259 agination. I -would compare somnambulism to a micros- cope which causes objects at its focus to be distinctly seen, though imperceptible to the naked eye ; but on this side of, or beyond the focus, the rays cross each other, the hues become more brilliant, and the images are wholly distorted. The clairvoyance of somnambulists, inconceivable as it is, is not less incontestable ; there is no exaggeration in what has been related concerning it ; but it is in each individual limit- ed to certain objects, and confined to a certain class of ideas ; and it is only by comparison between great numbers of facts, in which truth has been separated from illusion, that you will be enabled to perceive the extent of which it is suscep- tible, what is its origin, and what are the conditions which favor its developement. If two magnetizers were each to form a theory of somnambulism from the facts exhibited by their respective somnambulists, it is very probable that those theories would not resemble each other. I go further and affirm that by reasoning from some phenomena consid- ered separately, a person might form not only the strangest hypotheses, but might also be induced to deny even the re- ality of magnetism. I have told you to how many errors you may be exposed by an incomplete and limited examination of the phenom- ena. I ought now to advert to those which spring from an inconsiderate application of the branches of knowledge which do not belong to magnetism. I am convinced that a person will never make a real progress in the science of magnetism when he looks for its principles in other sciences. To explain magnetic phe- nomena by the laws of electricity or galvanism, by anatom- ical considerations of the functions of the brain and nerves, would be very much like explaining vegetation by crys- 260 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING [CHAP. X. tallography. It is essential for learned men and physicians to know that the most profound knowledge of physiology will never lead them to the discovery of the theory of mag- netism ; yet this knowledge will be useful to secure the ob- servers from many errors, by enabling them to distinguish what belongs to magnetism, from what is due to other causes, by furnishing them the means of verification, by authorizing them to reject all consequences essentially contrary to well known physical laws. Magnetism, considered as an agent, is entirely different from the other agents of nature. It has its own laws which are not identical with the laws of matter. Considered as a science, it has peculiar principles which cannot be known except by observation, no idea of which can be caught from known sciences. So much I can say with certainty; but I permit myself here to add as an opinion, common with me and many enlightened men, but which I merely propose as an opinion. The theory of magnetism is based upon this great princi- ple, that there is in nature two sorts of substances, radically different in their characteristics and properties, — spirit and matter ; that these two substances act, the one upon the other, but each one possessing laws peculiar to itself. Among the laws that regulate the action of matter upon matter, many have been successively brought to light by observa- tion, determined by calculation, and verified by experiment : such are the laws of motion, of attraction, of electricity, of the transmission of light, &c. It is not so with the mind ; although the existence of our soul has been demonstrated and many of its faculties are known to us, its nature is a mystery, its union with organized matter inconceivable, and most of the laws by which mind acts upon mind are unknown. CHAP. X.] TO A KNOWLEDGE OF MAGNETISM. 261 Living bodies which are composed of mind and matter,* act upon living bodies by the combination of the peculiar properties of the two substances. It is perceivable that there are in this action two distinct elements, and a mixed ele- ment. The knowledge of the laws that govern them, con- stitutes the science of magnetism ; and it is only by observ- ing, distinguishing, and comparing the various phenomena, that we can arrive at the discovery and the elucidation of these laws. Hence it follows that those who would establish a theory of magnetism upon the properties of matter, and those who search for it wholly in the faculties of the soul, strike equally aside of the truth. Magnetism, being an emanation from ourselves, directed by volition, partakes equally of the two substances which compose our being. This is not the place to enlarge upon this idea. The ob- ject I proposed to myself being to teach the practice of mag- netism, it is rather to restrain than to excite the persons who wish to study it profoundly, that I have permitted my- * Instead of recognising only two substances m man, it would perhaps be more exact to distinguish three ; the soul, the body, and an intermediate substance, which is the principle of life. This was the opinion of the ancients, who designated the last as the spirit, or the chariot of the soul, (char de Faroe.) This is also the opinion of most somnambulists who have reached the highest degree of clair- voyance. It will be perceived that this metaphysical question is foreign to my subject. I speak of it merely to avoid the imputation of not knowing it. That there are, in sentient beings, two sub- stances ordinarily different, is an incontestible fact. One is mat- ter, the other is not. The principle of life is distinct from matter, because it is a prin- ciple which acts upon matter and organizes it ; it is distinct from the principle of intelligence, because the plants are alive. 262 OF THE STUDIES APPERTAINING, &C. [CHAP. X. self to lay down the route they should follow, and the diffi- culties they must vanquish to effect their object. Longer details would be useless ; I will, therefore, merely sum up, in a brief way, what I have said in this chapter. To practice magnetism, you have need only of will, con- fidence, and charity ; and all the books which have been written, since men have been treating it as a discovery, would add nothing essential to the principles proclaimed by M. de Puysegur, namely : An active will to do good ; a firm belief in our power ; and an entire confidence in employing it. To examine into the cause and the similarity of the phenomena, you must have first acquired, by your own experience, an entire conviction of the power of the agent. Next you must have gained a general acquaintance with the natural laws ; then of the organization of man and of the various conditions in which he is found ; and finally you must rise to another class of ideas in order to become ac- quainted with the influence of mind upon organized matter, and to explain how one man acts upon another by his will. Let us thank Heaven that the exercise of a faculty so useful, so sublime as that of magnetism, demands only sin- gleness of faith, purity of intention, and the developement of a natural sentiment which connects us with the sufferings of our fellow-men, and inspires us with the desire and the hope of relieving them. What need have we to consult the wavering decisions of the mind, when we may act effica- ciously by abandoning ourselves to the impulse of the heart ? APPENDIX. 121 FROM REV. E. B. HALL. Providence, Dec. 1, 1837. To Mr. T. C. Hartshorn. Dear Sir — You wish me to write you something ahout my experience and opinions, on the subject of Animal Mag- netism. I have been unwilling to say any thing publicly about that of which I know so little ; and I should decline now, if my name had not already appeared in several journals without my permission, and in support of facts not correctly given. It was so in the reference to me which the appendix to your first number contained, afterwards quoted by Colonel Stone, although there was no exaggera- tion. A man's own opinion may be of little importance ; but truth is of great importance on all subjects, and espe- cially as to matters of observation and fact. I feel willing, therefore, and feel it to be due to others, to say in brief what I have seen and what I believe. I can do this best by giving a view, first, of the principles by which, not I alone, but many observers in this city, have examined this subject, and then of some of the results, so far as they can be called results. There seems to be an im- pression abroad, and here also, with many, that those of us who have not had sufficient confidence in our own wisdom, nor seen sufficient cause in the facts offered, to pronounce this whole affair an imposition, or reject it as an absurdity, are altogether believers and dupes. How far we are dupes, I am not concerned to say. That we are not believers, I do say. I believe I may say it of a very large portion of the intelligent in this place, though I am not authorized to speak for others. What is exactly intended, in saying that we are not believers, will appear from what follows. It may not be useless, to this or any cause, to speak of prin- ciples of evidence; the kind of inquiry and test to which all matters of this kind should be subjected, and the distinction between inquiring and believing. Candor and credulity are too often confounded. The first is one of the noblest of traits, most rare and most useful — the last is one of the most common and most hurtful. Let me recommend, on this L 122 APPENDIX, subject, the perusal of some pieces ascribed to Judge Wil- liams, of Taunton, published first in a paper there, and afterward appended to a pamphlet by Charles Poyen, as written by "a member of the Massachusetts Bench.*" The reality of that which is called animal magnetism, is purely a question of fact. As such I view it, as such alone do I attach any importance to that which is said or done about it. Whether it be new or old, whether it agree with preconceived opinions or oppose them all, whether the wise men in France of the last century, or those of the present, believe or disbelieve, whether the marvellous powers here supposed, if real, would do most good or evil, whether the " possessed nuns," the " Salem witches," and the "old wives" of all ages and both sexes, have not wrought as great won- ders as the modern somnambulists, are all questions of lively interest, it is true, and proper inquiry, but utterly impotent, if not irrelevant, in settling a question of fact. Then, as to fears or hopes in regard to the truth of animal magnetism, 1 have neither. I have not the least solicitude that it should prove either true or false. I know it is either true or false whether proved so or not, whether I believe or reject, or any man, or all* men. If it be false, it will do no great harm. If true, it will do good ; for all truth is good, and does good. Its interference with any other truth, is an im- possibility. It is not in the power of animal magnetism, or any thing else, known or unknown, to destroy one particle of truth in religion, or nature, or man. Truths are never destroyed. They are not of man — he can neither create nor annihilate the smallest of them . They are of God, and they are imperishable. There is but one question and one investigation, in this or any subject, that should awaken great anxiety or be deemed essential ; what is truth ? Now, in seeking the truth, in regard to animal magnet- ism, there seems to me to have been too much credulity, a too easy faith, with many. The public at large are incre- dulous, and they ought to be. Some of them, to be sure, are very weakly incredulous, from self-conceit, or obstina- cy, or timidity, or blank ignorance. But many are wisely incredulous. A healthy mind will never, as it cannot, be- APPENDIX. 123 lieve that which is wholly strange, intrinsically improbable, and not yet supported by evidence adapted to its nature or proportioned to its magnitude. And much of the evidence offered in this case and relied on, is neither of the kind or degree that the case demands. I have seen many trials, where the truth of every thing was almost taken for grant- ed ; and the men and women merely looked on with open mouths. Supposing the " subject" was of course asleep, and insensible to all sounds and sights, they have openly said and done every thing, and then wondered that she knew it! This is singular folly. It is child's play. The true principle in testing such supposed wonders, is to take noth- ing for granted ; no, nothing. I go to the examinations without assuming a single fact in the case, but rather dis- trusting every thing until it is proved. The whole matter is improbable ; i. e. is opposed by all we have ever seen and all we know. I have a right, therefore, to institute the most rigid and suspicious scrutiny on every point. I will not believe, because the operator is an honest man, and the subject pure and true. That I do not dispute, and it is to be taken into the account. But it does not of itself prove much in a case like this. The best men in the world may be deceived, and so may the wisest. Nay, such is human nature, that in certain circumstances, the best and wisest may deceive others, however unintentionally. I will not believe even my own senses, in matters so unaccountable, until I have had frequent opportunities of examining. I hold that any thing which is possible, is more probable, than that a person should see without eyes, and travel without mov- ing. I demand, therefore, for such facts, such evidence as it is not possible to evade or resist. So long as there can be any evasion or other explanation, my own mind will not receive the appearances as facts, whether others receive them or not, whether I wish to receive them or not. I distrust all appearances that may be feigned, or in which imagination may be the sole agent ; and the power of im- agination is almost indefinite. I distrust all answers given to leading questions. A very great portion of the questions which I have heard put to supposed somnambulists, have 124 APPENDIX. been suggestive. I distrust all information given, when that information could have been obtained, either from hints care- lessly dropped in the room, or from personal intercourse and previous knowledge of objects and places. To make out a case of actual clairvoyance, or of mental locomotion, there must be not only no probability, but no possibility, of any of the above helps or explanations. Nor can I conceive of but one kind of proof of this particular power, so inconceivable and inexplicable. That proof is the consciousness of hold- ing in one's mind a fact unknown to all others, proposing the inquiry ourselves in the most guarded manner, without any suggestion, or hint, or help of any kind, and then hear, ing a true and unequivocal answer. It is little to hear others ask questions, when you know not what communication there may have been previously. It is insufficient to be told even that letters were read, through bandages and en- velopes many, if you know nothing of the actors, even if you believe their assertions. For letters have been read, by peculiar processes, without being opened ; and letters have beea opened and returned so well sealed, that the writer himself could not detect any appearance of change. So that while! disclaim all suspicion of foul play in the cases of this kind occurring here, I insist that they are not positive proof of the power of seeing through opaque sub- stances, except where the letter is not for a moment lost sight of by thn writer or operator. If it is not lost sight of, but openly read and its contents correctly told, then is this also evidence of the highest kind ; supposing, as before, that the writer is sure no one but himself know 7 s what the letter contains. These things are said, not for their peculiar value, but in explanation of the kind of feeling and principles of evidence which many in this place have brought to this subject. They show, that, so far at least, there has been no very great credulity or liability to be deceived. And I believe I may add — to speak now more definitely of the results — that whether deceived or not, some of us have not been sat- isfied. I know of few intelligent observers of animal mag- netism in Providence, who look upon the subject as settled, APPENDIX. 125 or who wish to he considered as any other than interested and candid inquirers. If there are those who know not the difference between inquirers and believers, or who think that the only wise ones are the scoffers, we must be excused from going into any argument with them or about them. It is violating all probability and all common sense, to sup- pose that hundreds of men and women, of every profession and station, of unimpeachable veracity, and at least respect- able information, without any concert, compensation, or as- signable motive, should engage in the same childish at- tempts at imposition, produce the same strange results, and in different places become operators or subjects on a large scale, for no earthly end but the pleasure of being duped! Then to crown the wisdom of such a supposition, it is only necessary to take a single case ; for instance, that of a young woman of good sense and character, feigning total blindness for a year or two before she hears of animal mag- netism in order to be prepared for it, subjecting herself to all manner of privations, denying herself the agreeable priv- ilege of seeing, working, eating, walking, or doing any thing with comfort, filling repeatedly, in this pretended blindness, so as to receive Serious injury and remain for weeks in se- vere pain and dangerous illness; then all at once contriv- ing, her eyes still closed and covered, to walk about easily and to see correcHy ; not for her own comfort or gain, but only for the public entertainment or public suspicion ; her family, physicians, and friends at home, all the while assert- ing her actual blindness, and all with whom she lives being unable to detect in her a single appearance of insincerity or even power of management ; yet all an imposition! Be- lieve it, who will. Find its parallel or explanation, if pos- sible, in any case of witchcraft or delusion, or rather, im- position ; for it is important to distinguish. Delusion there may he, of sora ; kind, in this very case, and every other; but imposition there is not, if any evidence can be trusted, or any f ict proved by testimony or observation. This is the first result to which I am brought, viz., that there is no inte tional deception in this matter. I do not say, that none who have ever engaged in animal magnetism L* 126 APPENDIX. have been deceivers, or that there has been no wilful de- ception in a single instance here. I mean simply that as a general, if not a universal fact, the circumstances of the case forbid a suspicion of fraud. Self-delusion there may be. But an attempt to delude others, any kind of collu- sion or imposition, artifice, management, humbug, there is no reason to suspect. Those only who exhibit themselves for money, give room for any such suspicion ; and they may not have been guilty. In the most remarkable cases we have had, in almost every case that I have seen or heard, there has been an utter absence of all ground for suspicion of motives. Nor have I known of more than one observer who has imputed bad motives ; and he has given more evidence, in his book, of having practised, than of hav- ing detected, fraud. A second conclusion to which I have come, in common with most inquirers, is in favor of the reality of the mag- netic sleep. This follows indeed from a belief in the hon- esty of those concerned. But it deserves notice as a con- viction almost universal now, in the minds of those who have given any attention to the subject. There is no rea- son for the least doubt, that a peculiar sleep is produced by certain manipulations, differing widely from common sleep, accompanied often by a suspension of sensibility, and some- times by a remarkable activity of mind and power of com- munication. So far as this constitutes animal magnetism, I doubt if there are many informed minds, in this or any city, or any country, who doubt its reality. Of all beyond this, there are many who doubt, and there is reason for great diffidence and caution. In all that per- tains to the action of one mind upon another without words or signs, i. e. the power of simple volition — and all that is meant by clairvoyance, especially the faculty of inspecting human bodies, and visiting in spirit distant places, I have no opinions which can be called conclusions, or absolute convictions. Much of the evidence adduced in support of these wonderful faculties, is to me wholly insufficient. I do not mean that it is suspicious or unimportant, but insufficient to produce conviction. I have seen evidence at times which APPENDIX. 127 in itself was irresistible ; facts which I defy any man to ac- count for, on any known principles. But the powers them- selves which these facts tend to prove, are so amazing, so utterly incomprehensible and tremendous, that my mind demands more evidence, repeated in every variety of cir- cumstance, and tested by all orders of men, before it will or can fully believe. Then, too, there are so many failures made by every somnambulist, so many inequalities, incon- sistencies, and perplexities, that it becomes the part of wis- dom, if not of necessity, to suspend judgment, and wait for greater revelations. Inequalities, it is true, and failures, are no proof of the absence of the power. They belong to all states of mind, and occur often even in the natural sciences. They weigh something in favor of the honesty of the par- ties. And at all events, until we know what the power is, we have no right to prescribe laws or conditions, to say that it must always do this or never do that. We ought only to examine the more closely and widely on this ac- count, and draw inferences and pronounce judgments with extreme caution. But there are the facts, you say — what will you do with them ? I can only say, I know not what to do with them. Facts they are, so far as I can discover. I have witnessed them, I have tried them severely, I have been compelled to admit them in some cases. The evidence has sometimes, in some few instances of my own observing, been as high and complete, as I can conceive. But the cases have not been sufficiently numerous and varied, the evidence not sufficiently tested, to sustain belief in such monstrous ca- pacities. I will believe any thing, or more properly, I must believe any and every thing that is proved — whether I understand its nature or not, whether I can reconcile it or not with my preconceived notions. Its relations, its pur- pose, its uses and consequences, I leave with Him who gives all powers and ordains all truth. But it must be proved ; and the proof must be proportioned to the nature and magnitude of the thing to be established. You may wish me to refer to some facts. It cannot be necessary, and I have already been too long. In the par- 128 APPENDIX. ticular case with which my name has been connected, I had Miss B. wholly under my own control. I questioned her a- bout places and objects which she had never seen, and some of which, as they then existed, no creature but myself could have known. I proposed the questions in the most guarded manner. I had never been satisfied before, and I did hot expect to be then. But if not satisfied, I was confounded. She described distant objects, whose position in some cases I had just changed, whose existence in other cases I did not then know or believe, so truly, so wonderfully, that I could only marvel. At other times, she has done the same in regard to my own house, and houses in other towns and states. Then as to her power of seeing, (not taking her blindness for granted, though unquestionable,) 1 have tried it in various ways, and am convinced that she sees either by some other organ than the eye, or with such rays of light only as can penetrate all substances ; if there are any such. I have seen a sealed letter, containing a passage enclosed in lead, which letter she held at the side of her head not more than a moment, all in sight, then gave it back to the writer, and afterward wrote what she had read in it — the letter was opened in my presence, and the two writings agreed in every word, there being two differences in spelling only. Of her power, or that of any somnambulist, to examine bodies and describe diseases in others, I have seen no satisfactory proof. But one of our first physicians, who has published nothing on the subject, has recently told me of a case of his own, which is enough to silence, if not convince most skeptics. I regard the whole subject as a matter of curious study. It has no claim to be called a science, for that denotes something known and settled. It is hardly a subject for lectures or public discourses, much less for exhibition and profit. It should be subjected to private and quiet examina- tions, scientific inquiry, patient, rigid, unsparing experiment, yet candid and kind. If it will not bear this trial, let it fall. If it will, let us learn what it is. There is much doing now, I am told, privately and encouragingly. Yet it will not surprise me, if the whole matter dies away soon, ar:d is not APPENDIX. 129 revived again for years. I am not sanguine about its pro- gress or its benefits. If wisely pursued, neither weakly trusted, nor weakly scorned, whatever of truth or delusion it contains will appear in good time. As yet, I believe lit- tie, but hope something, and fear nothing. With great regard, E. B. HALL. FROM THE REV. MR. KENT. Roxbury, Nov. 27, 1837. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn, Dear Sir — I sball give you a simple narrative of what passed in my presence, on the evening when Miss Brackett was put into the magnetic sleep and conducted to my place of residence in Roxbury, as the facts appeared to me, leav- ing you to make such a use of it as you may think proper, and others to draw whatever inferences from it they please. If charged with too great minuteness, I will only say, that my desire and purpose is to state the whole truth, without coloring or reservation. Intending to visit the Mansfield mines in my August va- cation, I was induced, by friends in Boston, who had re- cently witnessed the powers of different somnambulists, to go on to Providence and seek an opportunity to see them myself. One of these friends kindly obtained for me the letter of introduction presented to you by me from your brother in Boston, in which he simply mentioned my being u a brother teacher" and one anxious to see the effects of animal magnetism, from other motives than those of mere cu- riosity. Not a syllable was said, and I am sure no one could have conjectured, about the objects I should wish to have described, and which were described by Miss Brackett with a promptness, accuracy, and particularity, which amazed me. You must remember, also, that in the course of my conversation with you, I had avowed myself, as I really was, before trial, a skeptic on the whole subject, to be re- claimed only by evidence which should seem to me irresist- 130 APPENDIX, ible ; and a determination to watch with the closest scrutiny every circumstance, look, and movement that might pass before me ; and I distinctly remember, that this was, also, your evidently sincere and repeatedly expressed desire. Meeting accidentally with my friend, Mr. Joseph Harring- ton, Jr., of this place, who assured me of his strong desire to witness an exhibition of somnambulic clairvoyance, if it existed, I requested, in your presence, the privilege of having him accompany me, which Mr. Metcalf, at whose house Miss B. was then residing, very kindly and politely granted. After calling, with Mr. Harrington, on Dr. Ca- pron, the magnetizer, stating the motive which led me to wait on him and solicit the favor of seeing his patient in the magnetic sleep, and having the hour fixed upon, we went to Mr, Metcalf 's at half past seven, P. M., and were intro- duced to Miss Brackett. Dr. Capron soon came in with several other gentlemen and ladies, who were successively introduced ; and in a few minutes he proposed to commence the process of magnetizing, after I had placed a rocking- chair where I pleased, and Miss B. had been led to it in the perfect attitudes of blindness, by Miss Metcalf. In order to prevent unfairness or collusion between the parties, I requested that lamps might be placed near, and directly before Miss B., and took my seat at her side. Dr. Capron readily complied with my request ; but said, that as her eyes were still, as they had been for several days, in- flamed, it would be necessary to put a bandage, or cotton be- fore them, to prevent the effects of too strong a light. I pro- posed the latter ; it was brought, and in our presence, rolled into balls, and inserted between the spectacles she wore and her eyes, in such a manner, that it would have been impossible for her, even with the best eyes, to see a ray of light. This cotton was watched, and it remained in its place through the whole time. Of the process of magnetizing I will only mention one or two phenomena which I have not seen stated. After Miss Brackett was apparently in a profound sleep, Dr. Capron requested us to observe the effect of pointing his fingers towards, but without touching by several inches, her hand. At first, her arm and hand were gently agitated. APPENDIX. 131 the agitation increasing as his fingers approached, until her hand was drawn or attracted with violence up to the mag- netizer's. The experiment was repeatedly tried on the right and left hands, according to our direction, in every instance successfully, and with the same result, without a word spoken, or sign given, which could have indicated which hand would be approached. We were then requested to try the same experiment ourselves, and did so without the least effect. On being roused by Dr. Capron, Miss Brackett instantly started from her chair, and to our astonishment, passed twice round the room, with a rapid and sure step, avoiding every individual and article of furniture, and saying that she "could not and would not stay where there were so many people." She then hurried through the parlor to the door of the en- try, seized its handle instantly and unerringly ; and, turn- ing her face towards us, opened it and gained the outer step, where Dr. Capron took her arm, and persuading her to re- turn, seated her in the chair she had left ; when she was again introduced to all the strangers present. The first in- troduction having been made while she was in her natural state, the last, while in the magnetic state. Dr. Capron then requested a tumbler of water to be brought ; and after drinking about half of it himself, he roused Miss B., who had apparently sunk into a profound and quiet sleep, as she afterwards did repeatedly, and re- quested her to drink some of it. She did so, when Mr. Harrington drew to a corner of the room, and, after writing on a slip of paper, beckoned me to him and simply held the paper before me, on which was written " Will the contents of the tumbler to be castor oil," or words to that effect. He then beckoned to Dr. Capron, who went to him, and reading the sentence, indicated by a nod that he would cheerfully do it, and retaking his seat, which was placed between two and three feet before Miss Brackett, he said, without moving a limb, or uttering a syllable more, " Come, Lurena, drink a little of this, and you will feel better, I think." Alluding, as I supposed, to a severe head-, ache, of which she had spoken to us in the course of our conversation, before the Doctor's entrance. 132 APPENDIX. She raised the tumbler to her lips, and suddenly replaced it in her lap, with evident nausea and aversion. Dr. C. " Come, drink a little of it. It is very good." Miss B. " Good !" moving her lips, " you know it is not good !" Dr. C. « Why ?" Miss B. " Why ? It makes me sick." Dr. C. "O, no; drink one mouthful." She did so; and had she witnessed the ceremony of taking pure castor a thousand times, the apparent effect on her could not have been more true to nature. Mr. Harrington again summoned the Doctor, and whis. pered too low to be heard by any other person in the room. " Will, now, that it is snuff." He returned, and repeated only words resembling those used in the first experiment. On looking into the tumbler, she seemed to smile ironically, and said, "Drink this! drink this! you know I cannot ;" with an expression of countenance which any one, seeing snuff to be the contents of a tumbler about to be drank off, must have assumed. I then requested Dr. C. in the same manner, to "will it to be pleasant lemonade" After long persuasion, without a word or gesture, however, which could have indicated the nature of my request, on Dr. C.'s part, she put the tumbler cautiously to her lips, and tasting, drank the whole of the water that remained. Dr. C. " Well, Lurena, how do you like that?" Miss B. " Why, it 's very good, but a little too sour" Some one of the strangers present now requested in a whisper that he would " will the tumbler to be filled with an ice cream." I sat at Miss B.'s elbow, and watched both her countenance, and Dr. C.'s words and motions. Collu- sion, or any thing like a secret understanding between them in what followed, / believe to have been impossible. Dr. C. "Come, Lurena, drink what I have got for you now. You will find it very good." Rousing, she looked into the empty tumbler, and contin- ued silent. On further inquiry, she said, APPENDIX. 183 "You know I cannot drink it." Dr. C. "Why?" Miss B. "I've been waiting for a spoon this half hour" A spoon was then brought and given her. She raised the tumbler, and imitating to perfection the manner of a lady taking an ice cream in a fashionable and elegant circle, she finished it, and replaced the tumbler in her lap, as one wait- ing for a servant to take it. Dr. C. " Well, is not that good ?" Miss B. " Yes, it 's very good, but a little too highly flavored for me." I should have mentioned that while eating it, she put her hand to her face in apparent pain. Dr. C. " What is the matter with your face?" Miss B. " Why, it makes my teeth ache, it 's so cold." I then requested Dr. Capron to take the tumbler from her, and, in a whisper scarcely audible to him, to " mil a black kitten to be in her lap." He assented, and, taking his seat before her, as I did mine at her side, he said, without previously uttering a syllable even in whisper to any one, or making the least motion, " Lurena, come, wake up and see what you have in your lap." She seemed gradually to wake. " What have you in your lap?" Looking down, she instantly began to draw her arms up with aversion at the object seen, but remained silent. Dr. C. " What is the matter ? Is it not pretty ?" Drawing her arms still further up, she said, evidently of. fended, " Pretty ? no. What have you put that in my lap for? I shant take it ! I wont !" Dr. C. "O, yes, take it." Miss B. " I wont." Dr. C. "Well, if you do not like it, give it to me." Lifting it precisely as one would by the nape of the neck, and tossing it, she said, "There, take the dirty black thing!" The preceding experiments were tried, in consequence of our having heard that similar ones had been made without failure in any instance ; and I am as certain as I am of being able to see or hear any thing directly before me, that no direction, either by a whisper, pause, or gesture, was M 134 APPENDIX. given by the magnetizer to the magnetized ; and I know that the directions I gave Dr. C. could not have been an- ticipated by him or any one else. I now requested Dr. Capron to take her to Roxbury, and to " stop in front of the Universalist meeting-house at the bottom of the hill," as the nearest prominent object to my own house. Dr. C. "Well, Lurena, Mr. Kent wishes us to go to Roxbury and visit his house. Will you go ?" Miss B. " Yes, I should like to go very well." Dr. C. " In what way shall we go ?" Miss B. " We will go through the air, if you please, and I should like to go high." Dr. C, at some one's suggestion. " Why do you wish to go high?" Miss B. " Why, to avoid the steeples and trees that will be in our way." The appearance manifested on her passage from place to place, has been correctly described by others. In about one and a half minutes, Dr. C. said, "Well, Lurena, have we got there?" Miss B. "Yes, we have;" with an appearance of ex- haustion. At this moment Dr. Capron proposed to put me in com- munication with her, as he had engagements to attend to at the hour arrived. I requested, however, that I might first see you take the guidance of her, as I was wholly ignorant of the manner of it. Dr. C. mentioned that this might be as well, and introduced you. Mr. H. " Miss Brackett, how do you do ? I am very happy to meet you in Roxbury." Miss B. " Why, Mr. Hartshorn, how came you to be here ?" Mr. H. "I am here on a visit." You were not in the room when all present were led up and mentioned or introduced, after she was magnetized. Mr. Harrington now requested you to ask her what she saw. Mr. H. " Well, Miss Brackett, what building have we here?" APPENDIX. 135 Miss B, " Why do you ask that question ? You can see for yourself, as well as I can." Mr. H. " Yes, but I should like to know how we agree." Miss B. " Why, it is a large meeting-house." Mr. H. " Well, look round ; look up ; what o'clock fa it ?" Miss B., after apparent examination. "It has no clock.'' This is correct. Mr. H. " What do you see ? Are there any lights ?" Miss B. "Yes, there are ; and what strange people they are in Roxbury, to have lights on posts in the day time ? If I could only reach higher, I would take them down, it looks so silly." Mr. Harrington now directed you to ask what she saw before the meeting-house. Miss B. " I see a building." Mr. H. " What sort of a building is it ?" Miss B. " It is a brick one." Correct. Mr. H., at Mr. Harrington's suggestion. "Now, Miss BfRckett, we will go to this building. Are we there?" Miss B. " Yes, we are." Mr. H. " Well, should you like to go in, and see what there may be there ?" Miss B. " I should," Mr. H., after a moment's pause ; "What do you see?" Miss B. " O, how beautiful these are ! How good they taste !" She then appeared to eat some kind of fruit ; but suddenly stopping, said, " O, I forgot ; I have no money, sir ; I beg your pardon ; and apparently laid down what she held in her hand. Mr. H. " What are you eating, Miss Brackett ? Do you wish for money? Here it is." Miss B., smiling with evident pleasure ; " I thank you ;" and seeming to take up the fruit again and eat it, said, " How pleasant it is. It is so good I think I '11 take another." She did so. Mr. H., by direction. " What sort of fruit is it ?" Miss B. " I do n't hardly know. They are apples or pears. They taste very good." 136 APPENDIX. Mr. H. " Well, Miss Brackett, look round and see what else you may like. It will refresh you to take something after your rapid journey." In a few moments, putting her left hand under the chin, she seemed like one attempting to crack a hard-shelled nut with the teeth. Mr. H. " What have you there ?" Miss B. " Why, it 's a Castalia nut, and so hard that I can't crack it ;" trying with still greater effort. Mr.' H. "Castalia nut? You mean, do you not, the Castana nut ? Miss B. "Yes; I don't know what you call it; but / call it a Castalia nut." Mr. H. " Well, shall we go now ?" Miss B. "If you please. But, oh, I havn't paid the gentleman. There, sir," laying as it were money upon a counter. The building where this imaginary scene passed is a brick one, occupied at present as a West-India goods store. The day after my return from Providence, I called at this store and inquired first, whether the store-keeper had any fruit for sale on Wednesday evening. He replied in the affirmative, and directed me to a basket of apples which he said had been on the counter three or four days. On tast- ing one, I certainly should not have doubted the correctness of Miss B.'s taste, had she been present when she seemed to enjoy them so much in imagination. " Have you any Castana nuts?" "You will find them in the window next to the door." They were there in one of the three divisions of a box, containing different kinds of nuts. At the door of the store you will remember having put me in communication with her. Mr. H. " Miss Brackett, here is our mutual friend, Mr. Kent, who was introduced to you in Providence." " Good evening, Miss Brackett, I am very glad to see you in Roxbury," taking her hand. Miss B. " Why, Mr. Kent, how did you get here so soon ?" with apparent surprise and emphasis. " I followed you in the rail -road cars." APPENDIX. 137 Miss B. " In the cars ! That is impossible ! You could not travel so fast in the cars as I did through the air." " Well, suppose, then, that I came in the stage." Miss B. " In the stage ! You have just said you came in the cars ! Your stones do not seem to hang together" — smiling. " I confess, Miss Brackett, that I cannot tell you how I came — but that is of no consequence ; it is certain I am here, and wish you to go with me to my house, a short dis- tance from this. Will you attend me?" Miss B. "Yes, sir, I will." After a time sufficient to conduct her only a few steps, and giving two or three directions, I said, " Stop, we must go back and start again. I believe I am wrong." She laughed audibly. " What are you laughing at, Miss Brackett ?" Miss B. " Why, I am laughing at the fact that you, a gen- tleman, should invite me to attend you to your house, when you donH know the way there yourself 7" I cheerfully con- fess, sir, that my feelings at this moment, in consequence of what I had witnessed and heard after her arrival in Rox- bury, very much resembled those of an oratorical tyro, who has lost the place in his manuscript, and stands before an audience evidently waiting for words, which it is not in his power to command, utterly at fault ! I did not feel certain that I should select such landmarks and use such terms as would be sure to guide such a companion to the house, and said, " I am very free to acknowledge, Miss Brackett, that you may have a better guide, under my direction, and here is oir friend, Mr. Hartshorn, who will take vou in charge." Mr. H. u Will you go with me to Mr. Kent's ?" Miss B., with evident pleasantry. " I will ; for he does not seem to know the way there, himself!" Mr. FT., by direction. " We are now at the first corner on the right, Miss Brackett. What do you see?" Miss B. " See ? A large brick house." Mr. H. "Is it a tavern?" Miss B. " It may be. I think it is." 188 APPENDIX. Mr. H. " We will go forward a little. What do you see ?" Miss B. After a pause. " I shall not tell you, for you can see it yourself." Mr. H. "I wish to see whether we agree in opinion." Miss B. " It 's a very large barn." The stable by which she must pass measures ninety feet by thirty-two. Mr. H. " Is there any thing on the top of it ? Look up." Miss B. After looking up. " Why, what curious people there are here. They keep lamps on posts burning in the day time, and put creatures on their barns." There is on this livery stable an unusually large gilded vane, in the form of a horse. Mr. H. " We will now go forward, cross a street, and on the left hand corner is Mr. Kent's house." After a short pause, " Are we there ?" Miss B. "Yes." Mr. H. " What is there before his house ?" Miss B. " I shant tell you, for you know." Mr. H. " O yes, tell me. Is there any yard here?" As you had never seen my house, your question was put at ran lorn. Miss B. "Yard? Yes." Mr. H. " What sort of one is it? Miss B. " Why do you ask such questions ? Mr. H. " Is it a gravelled one ?" Miss B. " No. It is a green one ; you know it is." She seemed here, as in several other instances, to feel that she was trifled with. Her answer was correct. Mr. H. " Well, we will go in and enter the room on the left. Are we there?" Miss B. " Yes. What a handsome carpet this is." Mr. H., by direction. " What kind of a carpet is it ? Is it Brussels, Kidderminster, or what is it ?" Miss B. "I hardly know what to call it. It's a very handsome one, but it is not woollen.' 9 The carpet is a paint- ed canvass one which had been purchased at the factory and laid down a short time before. APPENDIX. 139 I was here again put in communication with her. " Well Miss Brackett, you see me now at home, and I with you to look round this room and tell me what you think of the different objects here." Miss B., apparently looking at the wall. " Oh, what a beautiful picture this is ! it would be perfect if the hair of the lady was pushed a little farther back. It comes too low over the forehead." Speaking in a whisper to herself, " Oh, what hair, it spoils it. I wish I could push it back ;" motioning with her fingers, as if attempting to do so. " How beautiful that arm is !" The picture described is a Chinese copy of a lady holding a kitten in her arms, and hangs near- est the door. Although it has been there three years, I was unconscious of any striking defect in the hair, but found on my return that no artist with perfect eyes, and the most dis- criminating taste, could have made more just criticism upon it than she did. Her remark upon the arm was precisely the same in words, that I have repeatedly heard made br- others. " We will now, Miss Brackett, pass on, if you please. What do you see here ?" Miss B. " See ! what you see, sir, a table." " Is there any thing over it ?" Miss B. " Oh, that lady is perfect. How beautiful she is," with earnest emphasis. The painting over the table is a Chinese copy, also, of a full length portrait of " the Maid of Athens," and was correctly described. II Is there any thing on this table ?" Miss B. " Yes ; and they are the handsomest of the kind I ever saw. How very beautiful these are ! I must look into one of them." " Well, Miss Brackett, open and look into it." Miss B., seeming to make an unsuccessful attempt. "I can 't; it is locked." At your suggestion. " You can look through the top of it." Miss B. " No ; I want the key. I shall not look through the cover of such a one as this is." " Well, here is the key ;" putting the ends of my fingers to hers. 140 APPENDIX. Miss B., trying it, and handing it back again. "It does not fit." " Oh, I have given you the wrong one. This is the key." Miss B., holding it up, and looking at it with a smile. M What a pretty, cunning little key this is. I never saw one of such a color." Inserting and carefully turning it, she opened the box, and seemed to admire the inside. There were on the table two Chinese work-boxes, having the usual pieces within, and what I believe is not common, a very beautiful cluster of flowers painted on white satin, in the cover of each, with a third, resembling them in external ap- pearance. The key was described with amusing and sin- gular accuracy ; and I found on my return, that Mrs. K. had locked the outside work-box, in compliance with our agreement before I left home, that she should make what striking alterations, unknown to me and every one else, in my room, she pleased. I, in a few moments, asked what else she saw on the table, having in my own mind a large book of paintings on rice paper, which I remembered leaving on this table before the work-boxes, of whose merits I was cu- rious to learn her opinion. She smiled, but would make no reply. " I wish you now to look at the fire-place. Is there any thing before it?" Miss B. "Yes. Oh, what a singular and splendid urn that is. I never saw one so large and of such a color." " What is its color ?" Miss B. " I do n't know what color to call it," speak- ing in an undertone, " It looks white — red." The urn standing there, was a large one of polished variegated por- phyry. " Now, Miss Brackett, look over the mantel-piece; look high. Is there any thing there ?" Miss B., speaking with evident emotion and veneration. " Oh, how beautiful — beautiful." And as she spoke, she bent forward, folded her arms on her breast, and put herself exactly in the attitude of our Saviour, as he is painted in a miniature which represents him at the moment when he said, "Thy will be done." This painting is on ivory, three APPENDIX. 141 inches square in the clear, set in a deep and broad gilt frame, and hangs about one and a half feet over the mantel- piece* It was received from Canton and placed there but a few days before, and I know that no individual in Amer- ica, except my family, had then seen it, I continued : "What do you see, Miss Brackett ?" Miss B., raising her eyes. " What a beautiful picture that is !" " Is it a large one ?" Miss B. " No ; it 's a very small one. It 's tgo small." " Is it as small as the one opposite ?" Miss B. M Yes ; why, you know it is as small again." Correct. " Well, look down ; is there any thing under it?" Miss B. "You know there is." " What is it ?" Miss B., promptly. " It 9 s an image of Christ" There was standing directly und(;r the picture, a cast iron image of our Saviour bearing his cross, in bas relief. " What more do you see here ?" Miss B. " What large and beautiful vases these are." " Vases ! How many are there ?" Miss B. " Why, you can see as well as I do. There are two." There were four glass shades or vases, cover- ing large specimens of Chinese rice paper flowers; two of them touching each other at each end of a long and broad mantel-piece. " We will now, if you please, go into the other room and see what may be there." Miss B. " Stop a moment, I want to rest me on this sofa ; my head aches." A sofa stands between the fire- place and door, by which she would naturally pass. In a few moments, " Will you go now ?" • Miss B. "Yes, I will." " And what do you find in this room ?" Miss B. " What ? are there pictures here, too ? But I do n't like this room so well as the other." " You do not ? Look round if you please, and tell me what the pictures are." 142 APPENDIX. Miss B. " Why, I don't know what they are. There is one that looks like an apostle." There was no such pic- ture in the room, although there had been but a few days be- fore. " Oh, these are beautiful. Oh, they are beautiful, very beautiful !" " What are they ?" Miss B. " Why, this book of pictures. Don't you see them?" " Where are they?" Miss B; " On the pianoforte. But I must go back into the other room. I want to look longer at the pictures there." I found on my return that Mrs. K. had removed this book from the table in the other room, where I left it, to the piano in this room ; and, in sport, placed a coffee-pot in its stead. Whether or not this was the object smiled at, but not mentioned, Heave others to decide. Returning with my charge to the other room, I requested Dr. Capron, who had now come in, to receive her from me. He did so, and after indulging her in looking at the pictures a short time, on which she made the same remarks as before, he said, " Well, Lurena, Mr. Kent wishes us, now, to go up stairs. Will vou go?" MissB. "Yes, I will." Dr. C* " We will go up and enter the left hand door." " What do you see here ?" Miss B. " See ! I see a lady." Dr. C. " How is she dressed ?" Her answer was cor- rect. " How old is she ?" Miss B. " Why that is a polite question ! Madam," bowing and smiling as she spoke, " the gentleman wishes me to ask you how old you are /" Dr. C. " How old do you think she is ?" Miss B., raising her eyes. "I don't know. I should think she is about twenty." * These and many of the succeeding questions were put by my direction, Dr. C. being unacquainted with my house. APPENDIX. 143 Dr. C. " Are there any other persons in the room ?" Miss B. "No." Airs. K. ivas the only person up, in the chamber, at the time. There were, however, two children asleep in the led. Dr. C. " We will now go forward and down stairs, and pass through the left hand door." " What sort of room is it ?" Miss B. " It 's a large kitchen." Correct. In a short time she seemed to be sipping something. Dr. C. " What have you found, Lurena, any thing to eat ?" Miss B. " Eat ! no. It 's water, and very good water too." There is in the corner of this kitchen a small table, on which my cook keeps habitually a water pail, and gen- erally a long handled tin dipper in it. On my return I in- quired of her if she remembered certainly whether there was water left in the pail on the evening mentioned. She replied that she was certain of having left it half full, in consequence of finding more water in the boiler than she expected, on that evening. This pail, however, I found, without letting any one know the object of my examination, to be left empty when my domestics retired, four nights in succession. I now directed Dr. Capron to take her into the next apartment, "the pump room, with a lattice front," for- getting in my astonishment at what had passed before me, that there was an intermediate room ! Dr. C. " Well, we will now go into the next room. What sort of room is it ?" Miss B. " Why, this is a kitchen too, only it is a smaller one." Correct. Dr. C. " We will go through the next one and take the left hand door into another room. Are we there?" Miss B. " Yes, but," with evident surprize, "why did they tell me Mr. Kent was a minister ? It is nH true. He 's a schoolmaster /" Dr. C. looked at me and appeared, at least, to believe that his patient was here at fault. You will remember having assured me, sir, on the evening when we separated before the Franklin House in Providence, that you had mentioned me, both to Miss Brackett and Dr. 144 APPENDIX. Capron, only as a minister. On my stating to the latter that although I had been a minister, she was correct, he said, " A schoolmaster, Lurena ? why do you say he is a schoolmaster ?" Miss B. " Why you say this is his room, and he is a schoolmaster because this is a schoolroom. And I never saw such an one. He has pictures here too. And what singular desks these are. He has chairs fixed instead of seats." It would have been impossible for a person with perfect eyes and in broad sunlight to give a more accurate description of this room, than she did. I could not at this moment repress my impatience to have her conducted to the room above, the character and contents of which I was sure could be known neither to yourself, to Dr. Capron, to Miss Brackett, nor to any one else in Providence, except Mr. Harrington, who had been totally silent on the subject, from the fact that I had myself scrupulously guarded against giving the least hint of them to any one, that less than three days had elapsed since my letter of introduction to you was written, that I was a perfect stranger to your brother in Boston who penned it, and that to entertain a moment's suspicion of collusion between him and the gen- tleman who obtained it for me, by which any intelligence of tlie truth might have been secretly communicated, would be a gross and unpardonable insult to unimpeachable in- tegrity. Dr. C. at length said, " Come, Lurena, we will now go out of this room, and up stairs into the room above, which Mr. Kent wishes us to see. Will you go ?" Miss B. " Stop, I can 't go up yet. I must sit down in this chair and rest me ; my head aches." Dr. C. " Well, sit down ; we need not be in haste." He then made a few motions with the hands before her, af- ter which she soon roused and said in reply to his invita- tion, "I don't want to go up these stairs." Dr. C. "Why?" Miss B. " Because they are so steep and twisting." Ap- parently making an effort, " They are the hardest stairs I ever went up." The stairs leading to the room above, are APPENDIX. 145 in one corner of the school-room, not out of it; are " steep and twisting," and have more than once occasioned in others the same complaint while ascending them. Dr. C. * Well, are you in the room ?" Miss B. " Yes. Why, is it possible ? What a singular man Mr. Kent is ! He is a minister, and a schoolmaster, and keeps a museum. I must see all these things. I could stay here four or five days; yes, a month. How many things there are." While she appeared to examine objects, I requested Dr. C. to question her in relation to what she saw. He did so. Miss B. " Why, what a curious window that is f I never saw one before that went clear across a room ! And only look ! He has got it full behind the windows, too. What large things. The glass seems to magnify them." My as- tonishment was at this moment complete. There is a glass window, or partition, across the room, to secure my apparatus, and several large articles connected with natural history. Dr. C. " What now do you see? Look up." Miss A. " Whv, that is very handsome." Dr. C. "What is it ?" Miss B. " It looks like marble." Alluding, as I supposed, to a bust of plaster of Paris, standing on a pedestal against the partition. Dr. C. " Are there any shells here ?" Miss B. " Why do you ask me that question, when you know 1 have just put one into your hand ?" There were shells within her reach. After she had seemed to examine the dif- ferent objects around with the different sensations which they were adapted to produce, I requested Dr. C. to take her to a friend's house in this place ; but she refused decidedly to go, saying, she would leave this room to see no other one in Roxbury. She was then charged to remember some of the things, with a view to having them described the next day, assured that she might return to look at my cabinets, when, and stay as long as she pleased. Reconducted to Providence in the same manner as she came to Roxbury, and re-entering the room at Mr. Met- calf 's, she instantly said, " Why, there are two gentlemen N 146 APPENDIX. here, to whom I have not been introduced !" It was ac- knowledged, and she was introduced to these gentlemen, strangers from a distant state, who had entered the room be- tween her leaving and returning to Providence. In eight or ten days after, the parents of Mr. Harrington called upon me and expressed a wish to see my cabinets ; saying that they had received a letter from him, (he had not yet returned home,) mentioning that Miss Brackett had re- turned to them, and spent the night in examination, after being put into the magnetic sleep ; that she had described to Miss Metcalf the next day certain objects which he men- tioned, but which they had decided not to name, until they had seen for themselves. We went to the room where they found every object Mr. H. had specified in his letter— a bust of Milton, a large table in the center of the room, several pictures scattered on one side of it which belong to a perspective box, and a box covered with paper which strikingly resembles what Miss Brackett said it was, " some- thing like Mosaic work." I could not account for her re- cognition of Milton's bust, seen as it was in a teacher's room, or " Museum," where any other than his would be likely to have place, until I found on being requested by a gentleman to examine it, what I had forgotton, the name " Milton" written deeply and legibly on the back of it, which touched a board partition. I am aware, sir, that there may seem to be indelicacy in thus exposing to the public the objects to be found in a pri- vate dwelling, and I would, if I could, have avoided it. But I promised, at the moment of leaving you, to describe and place at your disposal, an account of what I saw and heard. It is right to keep that promise ; and in doing this, I have felt obliged to give literally the questions asked and answers returned. You have, according to my best recollection, the whole truth, without reservation or intentional coloring. The facts, as they appeared to me, are at your disposal. With the inferences to be drawn from them I have nothing here to do, and cheerfully leave the subject with those who may think it worthy either of their ridicule or serious considera- APPENDIX. 147 tion, calmly and humbly asking for myself, " What shall we do with these things ?" Yours very respectfully and truly, BENJAMIN KENT. FROM MR. JOSEPH HARRINGTON, JUN. Roxbury, Nov. 29th, 1837. Dear Sir — I was present at the above mentioned interview of my friend, Mr. Kent, with Miss Brackett ; and with the exception of a few unimportant particulars, wherein my memory does not distinctly serve me, I bear unhesitating witness to the truth of every statement contained in his com- munication. Unless our senses were grossly deceived or our judgments thoroughly bewildered, we were, on the evening referred to, spectators of wonderful and unexplained mental phenomena. And most desirous must every lover of truth be, that the subject of " Animal Magnetism" should receive that attention which it merits, and that its juggles, if it pos- sess any, should be exposed, or its astounding revelations be corroborated by accumulated testimony, and its mysteri- ous nature unravelled. If your humble servant, sir, has been duped, hardly less wonderful is the dexterity of the impostors than somnambulism itself. With great respect, Your obedient servant, JOSEPH HARRINGTON, Jun. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn. FROM MR. FREDERICK S. CHURCH. Providence, Sept. 1st, 1837. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn, Sir — In a conversation with you a few evenings ago, you asked of me a short sketch of what I had seen of the phenomenon called somnambulism. 148 APPENDIX. In reply, I can only say that my observation has been confined principally to one case, and that of a young lady of this city known to you.* I first saw her the latter part of May, and having previously heard much, but seen noth- ing, 1 was like most others, rather incredulous respecting the facts related to me by those who had witnessed them. Af- ter seeing her put into an apparently sound and quiet sleep, from which she could not be awakened by any of the means usually employed to rouse sleeping persons, the magnetizer proceeded to shew the influence of his will, by causing her to see things, which existed only in imagination. For in- stance, to drink water from an empty cup, and to eat bread, fruit, cake, &c. from an empty plate. She was also made to see and describe distinctly the number of persons in the room, articles of small size wrapped in many thicknesses of cloth, or in the pockets of the persons present. Having known of her being sent abroad and describing persons and things, and having found her descriptions to be generally correct, where proof was to be had, I was once induced to request her being sent to the island of Cuba, knowing that if she could describe things there of which neither she nor any one present, save myself, had the most remote concep- tion, it would, in my mind, put the matter of her spiritual vision beyond the possibility of a doubt. The request was complied* with, by sending her along the sea coast in a south- westerly direction, until she came to the peninsula of Flor- ida. She was then directed to go directly south over the sea until she came to land. Not more than half a minute elapsed before she announced her arrival. She was then told to seek a ci'y. It was almost immediately found, and being called on to describe the entrance from the sea, I was satisfied she was at Matanzas. Wishing at that time to have her at Havana, she was directed to go west about sixty miles, until she came to another city, which she did. Being told to enter it by the harbor, and relate what she saw, on the right hand side going in, she described a large stone building^ unfinished, which I knew to be a new prison * A patient of Dr. Brownell, alluded to in Note 24. APPENDIX. 149 then building, likewise the city Wal Is, mounted with cannon, the shipping and the harbor generally, with the forts on the opposite side of the entrance, Moro Castle, Castle Blanco, the light-house, &c. Leading questions were of course avoi led. She also described correctly the quay, the launches load- ing from an open shed, with many persons there collected, standing smoking, &c. ; which place is used as a kind of Exe . where the M merchants do most congregate." She was then directed to enter a large budding in that vicinity, the Cathedral, and her description of it was very miner % and so fir as my memory served, was very correct. Bei g asked what kind of church it was, she replied she did not k low, having never seen any thing of the kind be- fore. Obs jrving a number of priests officiating at the altar, her atl i itiori was directed to them. Gn being asked their probable age, she said that "two were nearly bald, and three, ilthough very young, were beginning to be so," fully satisfying me, that she recognised the "priest with the shaven croien," She saw one bearing a bright vessel, sus- pend-:. i by a chain, from whence issued a smoke, which he swung b fore; and others engaged apparently at prayer and kneeling before the altar. Occasionally a lid would close over it and the s noke cease, when it would be handed to a b »v i i attendance, then taken back again, and soused sever 1 times during the ceremony. She described with exac the organ as being very small for so large a building, and much out of place, which is the fact, being siluai \ in an arch of the ceiling above the capitals of the columns; the floor of the altar as being beautifully inlaid with marble in Mosaic ; also the many and splendid paint- ings on the walls. At another time she visited Matanzas, describing the vessels in the harbo;- with sufficient exactness for me to identify one in which I was interested; the quay or land- ing; the public square, with orange trees on the border; and a marble statu ; in the center ; the church at that place with the peculiar architecture and location of the town; to- gether with the interior of the church, the altar, statues, or- N* 150 APPENDIX. naments, &c, including a miniature brig suspended from the ceiling, by some pious individual, who had been saved from shipwreck, by praying heartily to his patron saint, and thus fulfilled his vows by dedicating the said vessel to his or her glory. I recognised by her description, three ladies of my ac- quaintance at their residence. And her whole description, so far as my memory could be relied on, was strictly cor- rect. I would observe, that on first being sent to Cuba, no name of place was given her, and nearly ten days elapsed before I met her again, when she asked me where she had been sent ; as she knew it must have been in a foreign country, the appearance of things being so entirely different from any thing she had before seen. I close by giving you the assurance of my most implicit belief in what I have witnessed, only stating facts, and not attempting to account for them. Respectfully yours, FREDERICK S. CHURCH. Note 31.— Page 101. It may be that Deleuze had then in his mind the lamented Georget, who had published his work on Physiology a few years before. I am sure the reader will be obliged to me for translating the brief notice of him taken by M. Foissac, page 283. The experiments at the Hotel Dieu have proved the reality of a particular agent, entirely independent of the patient's imagination. Those of la Saltpetriere afford instances of the extraordinary phenomena of somnambulism, produced and tested by men who are an ornament to science, and whose talents and integrity no person has yet dared to dis- pute. It was not the love of the marvellous, nor of notori- ety, which induced M. Georget to study the subject. In his work on madness, he inserted the following passage ; « So long as these magnetizers perform their experiments APPENDIX. 151 in the dark, with the aid of their abettors ; so long as they do not work their miracles before the Academy of Sciences or the Faculty of Medicine, they will permit us to omit the trouble of refuting their reveries or their faith." But Geor- get's incredulity having been shaken by the experiments of the Hotel Dieu, he examined with distrust what he at first rejected with disdain ; and six months after having written the preceding lines, he added, in a note, while his work was in the press, that he had since witnessed several magnetic phenomena, and that he had himself put to sleep several of his convalescent patients, and caused them to speak, of which we shall present a very succinct analysis. When he put his somnambulists in communication with a sick person, they immediately experienced a pain, an unea- siness, and sometimes a sharp affection in the corresponding organs. It often happened that they were immediately at- tacked with epilepsy and hysterical fits, when they touched persons afflicted with these maladies, just before the attacks came on.* A somnambulist, who had an inflammation of the left lobe of the lungs, said she saw very well, and as if with her eyes, the organs of her chest, and, in fact, gave a very remarkable description of them. The heart, said she, is enveloped by a membrane to which it does not adhere ; it receives seven vessels, two of which, appearing largest, were agitated by a peculiar movement. The disordered lobe appeared very red, resembling the liver in some parts, and presenting grayish spots in several others. The healthy lobe had a rosy appearance. In proportion as the inflam- mation diminished, she saw less and less clearly, and finally could not see at all. There was a relapse, and lucidity returned ; but it was limited to the diseased lobe, the other organs being no more seen. Georget observed several facts of the same kind. The therapeutic resources of his somnambulists presented nothing very remarkable. They rarely employed any but those remedies which were daily made use of in their pres- * See note on transmission of pain. 152 APPENDIX, ence; bleeding, leeches, baths, moxas, blisters, and few potions. He always administered every thing they prescribed for themselves, and never had reason to repent of doing it. " It was curious," says he, "to see them, when awake, ex- claim against their own prescriptions, while blisters or moxas were in preparation." One of them, however, caused eighteen or twenty moxas to be applied to herself, several setor.s or issues, and a great number of blisters, in the space of eighteen months. Georget could, at pleasure, deprive his somnambulists of Sensation. The skin was totally insensible to the lively irritation of hot water deeply charged with ground mustard seed, and even to the burning of the moxa ; a burning and irritation which were extremely painful, when, by his will, the skin resumed its sensibility. He suspended the muscular power of his somnambulists with the same success, sometimes in one part, and some- tin os in another, and sometimes in all. One day he tried this power upon the respiratory muscles, and he produced sue') an immobility of the thorax, and such danger of suffo- cation, as very much to alarm himself, and make him de- termine to attempt nothing of the kind again. He says that if one were to recal a patient from the somnambulic state, without having restored motion to the muscles, and their proper faculties to the senses, a paralysis of the muscles and of sensation will continue.* Nothing could equal the sur- prise and fright which such a phenomenon caused to a per- son who experienced it for the first time ; whether it were the loss of hearing, of speech, or of motion. "The most sing ilar phenomenon, and the most worthy of attention," continues Georget, " relates to the foreknowledge of organic action, more or less distant in point of time, i" have seen, positively seen, a great many times, somnambulists announce, sever, il hours, several days, twenty days beforehand, the hour, * I have the authority of two magnetizers in this place, to slate this fact as having fallen within their own practice. But the sub- jects, on being plunged again into the magnetic state were relieved; and then were awakened free from pain. APPENDIX. 153 the minute even, of the attack of epileptic and hysteric fits, and of the menstrual eruptions ; and indicate the duration and the intensity of the attacks ; things which were exactly verified" Six months after writing this article, he had observed many more new and extraordinaiy facts. Fie promised, in a note, to report an instance in the chapter on epilepsy ; but when, in his second volume, he traced the history of that disease, he added, that the reason which had made him de- fer the publication of these phenomena to the article on mag- netism, induced him to put it off to another period He says, nevertheless, the person to whom he referred, had displayed to him instances of prevision and clairvoyance so astonish- ing, that he had never read any thing so extraordinary, in any work on magnetism, not even in those of Petetin. This somnambulist, Petroville, declared that a great fright would cure her. After she had been thrown into one, she assured her friends, while in somnambulism, that she was radically cured. In fact, she experienced no new attack during three months, while before she used to have two every day. The author of " Cures operated in Frarce by Animal Magnetism," states, in his first volume, page 258, that this patient, Petroville, said one day to Mr. Londe, one of the French physicians sent into Poland to observe the Cholera, that in fifteen days he would have an affair of honor, and would be wounded. Mr. Londe consigned this fact to his memorandum, without attaching importance to it, and he ap- peared to have forgotton it, when, fifteen days afterwards, he received a sword cut from the hand of one of his associ- ates. In the " Physiology of the Nervous System," Georget makes no mention of the names of his somnambulists, nor of the place where he made his experiments, nor of the nu- merous witnesses, physicians and others who were convinced like himself, "It is because," says he, "we live in an age when it is permitted to conceal our belief in magnetism." How shall we reconcile this timidity with the courageous homage which in his work he renders to all useful discove- 154 APPENDIX, ries and especially to magnetism ! The true reason of his reserve and his silence, was the fear of displeasing those who had the administration of the hospitals, who had se- verely interdicted all essays of that nature. He proposed to publish, at some future day, more in detail, if his time should permit him, the result of his observations. He ex- pressed his desire to me, in the last interview I had with him ; he wished to recommence his experiments and give himself up wholly to new researches.— " For I am persuad- ed," said he to me, " that great truths have escaped observ- ers ; but far from accusing them of exaggeration, I rather believe they have in their recitals, kept below the reality. I believe, for example, that there is no perfect mode of treat- ment, but that which somnambulists prescribe for themselves ; and that it is possible to render their admirable instinct ser- viceable to others. In one disease (fluxion de poitrine) every physician knows that bleeding is necessary, but he does not know the precise moment of the operation ; at what vein it ought to be done, and the exact quantity of blood it is neces- sary to draw, &c." He then read to me the details of his first experiment at the SaltpetrieYe. The woman whom he magnetized, be- came somnambulous, and in the midst of great agitation, told him, that at a certain period, she would be attacked by a serious disease, and die of it, at such a day and such an hour. Georget not then knowing any works in which facts of this kind were mentioned, and ignorant that somnambu- lists could themselves give the means of turning aside the effects of their previsions, believed it must of necessity be accomplished. Full of terror and grief, he hastened to awake her; and, at the time indicated, she fell a victim to the disease which she had foreseen. Georget died at the commencement of a career so bril- liantly begun, in the midst of the labors he had sketched out for himself, and of his dreams of the future. All the physiological facts which he had observed with so much care, are probably lost to science ; for since his death, no person has spoken of publishing the notes which he left. But he himself rendered a last, a striking homage to the APPENDIX. 155 principles of magnetism, by these words inserted in his will : " I will not finish this document without adding to it an im- portant declaration. In 1821, in my work on the Physiol- ogy of the Nervous System, I proudly professed material- ism. The preceding year I had published a treatise on Madness, in which are laid down principles contrary to, or at least different from the ideas in agreement with, the gen- eral belief, (p. 48, 51, 52, 114); and hardly had I pub- lished the Physiology of the Nervous System, when new meditations upon a very extraordinay phenomenon, somnam- bulism, would permit me no longer to doubt of the existence in us and out of us, of an intelligent principle, altogether dif- ferent from material existences. It is, if you please, the soul and God. In regard to this matter, I have a profound con- viction, founded upon facts which are not to be controverted. This declaration will not see the light, until no one can doubt its sincerity or suspect my intentions. If I cannot publish it myself, I urgently entreat the persons who may take no- tice of it, at the opening of the present testament, that is to say, after my death, to give it all the publicity possible. March 1st, 1826." Note 32. FROM MOSES B. LOCKWOOD. Respected Friend — In the appendix to the second part of thy translation of " Deleuze's Practical Instruction," I notice a number of cures that have been either wholly or partially effected through the agency of animal magnetism. It seems desirable to record as many cases of this kind as facts will permit. If an unbeliever be told of an individual who, after being magnetized, has ceased to be afflicted by a malady that had been hanging about him perhaps for years, he will be very likely to reply, "It wasn't magnetism ; it will happen so sometimes." Chance, however, can only be brought to bear against solitary instances. By multiplying 156 APPENDIX. cases, retreat under cover of" It will happen so sometimes," will be cut off. It is for this reason that I take additional pleasure in com- plving with thy request. *G. C****, for four or five winters has been subject to the croup, (as he, and those who have attended him, termed it,) so that scarcely the space of two weeks during either of these winters, elapsed, without his becoming an inmate of the nursery, until the 12th month, 13th day, 1836, when I mag. netized him, not only wishing to put him asleep, but also, to cure his disease. No medicine was used, yet he has not had a return of it since. The following facts go to show that "the phenomena of animal magnetism are not produced solely through the in- fluence of the imagination." In endeavoring to ascertain this point in the early part of my experimenting, frequent occasion was U an to magnetize an individual when he was totally ignorant of my intention, and when his mind was closely engaged with other things. For example, when he was studiously endeavoring to solve some mathematical question, or to commit some passage to memory, I have repeatedly caused him to sleep, simply by the action of my will ; being in dome cases with my face towards him, in some with it from him ; sometimes in the same, at others in a different room ; generally in the same house, but occa- sionally at a much greater distance. On one occasion we were at dinner, he at one table and I at another, and so so situated that my face could not be seen by him. ^When I went to the table I had not even thought of magnetizing at that time ; but as his mind appeared to be very far from magnetism, it seemed to be a very favorable opportunity to test the point ; and although no*one around me suspected what was going on, yet in less than three minutes his head dropped upon the shoulder of the one that was next to him. I then awaked him, when he turned round and cast a look towards me, by which I understood that he knew what I had been doing. In this and the other instances alluded to, it would be absurd to endeavor to maintain that his imngi. nation produced the result. " The phenomena of animal APPENDIX. 157 magnetism are not produced," therefore, "solely through the influence of the imagination." Clairvoyance. — After putting a patient asleep, I left him for the purpose of ascertaining the correctness of his account of what was transpiring at a distance. He was in commu- nication with C. W. J. With me were M. B. H. and J. C. On our return, after an absence of about an hour, C. W. J. informed us that the magnetized had traced our course; said that I "fell down on some ice in the path," &c. He said further, that while we were returning, "just before we came to a rope-walk, we all laughed very loud at something which M. B. H. told us." He was correct in all these instances. Respectfully, MOSES B. LOCKWOOD. Thomas C. Hartshorn. Note 33. LETTERS FROM PHYSICIAN. from doctor cutter of new-hampshire. Nashua, Nov. 22, 1837. Sir — The second number of your translation of Deleuze's work was duly received. No encomium of mine can add to its intrinsic 'merit. The chapters " on the precautions in the choice of a magnetizer," and " magnetism applied to dis- ease in connexion with medicine," need only to be read to be appreciated by the moral, the intelligent, and the hu- mane. As your valuable appendix is intended to record facts and observations made by American citizens, I send you a few cases. Neuralgia or Tic Douloureux. — I was called to see Miss E. M. of this town. The disease was confined to the right side of the face, the portio dura of anatomists being dis- 158 APPENDIX. eased. This was of long standing. I proposed the trial of magnetism. To this she assented. Somnambulism oc- curred in a few minutes. After she had slept a little time, I awoke her. The pain was gone. I repeated magnetism several times. There has been no return of the pain. Neuralgia, after filling a carious tooth, — Miss D. applied to a skilful dental surgeon, Dr. J. M. Reed, for advice rel- ative to a carious tooth. Dr. R. filled the tooth with gold foil. But the nerve being exposed and very sensitive, the filling was of necessity removed. It was replaced and re- moved several times, the young lady not being able to en- dure the pain caused by the pressure of the gold on the sensitive and diseased nerve. All the branches of the tri- facial nerve had become painful. After the tooth had been filled, she applied to me to render my aid in giving relief by magnetism. At the first sitting the pain was completely removed, but sleep was not induced. In a little time there was a partial return of the pain, and I again magnetized her. At this sitting she became a lucid somnambulist, the pain was entirely removed and has not returned. From the result of this and some other cases, I think magnetism worthy the attention of dental surgeons. Delirium Tremens, — June 20, 1837. — Mr. S. L., afflict- ed with delirium tremens caused by the free use of stimulat- ing drinks, applied to me for medical advice, having passed several days and nights without sleep, and having used opiates in large doses without benefit. I tried the effect of magnetism. In a little time it caused tranquillity, followed by sleep. I rep-ated it two or three times, and the man was able to resume his usual business. In this form of dis- ease, when there is an increase of action with a diminution of the powers of the system, I think patients may receive much benefit from the use of magnetism. Bronchitis. — Aug. 27. — Miss A. C, for two years had been laboring under chronic bronchitis, characterized by coigh, dyspnoea, pain in the chest and between the shoul- ders. After trying many things, she consented to make trial of magnetism. She was magnetized several times. At each sitting, the dyspnoea, pain and cough were removed. APPENDIX. 159 This I could effect without influencing any other part of the system. The paroxysms of coughing and dyspnoea became less severe and less frequent, but her circumstances pre- vented her from continuing the use of magnetism but a little time. She is now much better but not well. Dyspepsia and Spinal Irritation. — Miss F. F. for some years had been afflicted with pain in the stomach and back, attended with soreness, appetite capricious, and when food was taken it caused much distress. Under the circum- stances, at her request, I magnetized her. It caused sleep, free sweating, and complete relief from pain. Magnetism was repeated several times. The pain in the back and stomach, and distress after taking food, were completely re- moved. In this case the patient became a lucid somnam- bulist. After the disease was removed, this lady ceased to be a somnambulist, and was not susceptible of magnetic in- fluence. This is worthy of observation in using magnetism as a remedial agent. Partial Paralysis.— A few months since, I was consulted by Miss S. H. who for more than four years had been troubled with pain in the back part of the head, and want of feeling and strength of the muscles on one side, something like the wry neck. I advised a trial of magnetism as she had been under different methods of treatment and had re- ceived no benefit. To this she consented. At the first sit- ting imperfect sleep was induced, followed by very free sweating in the paralyzed part. I repeated magnetism several days in succession. The pain in the head was re- moved and sensibility and mobility restored to the parts paralyzed. In this case somnambulism was complete. She is now perfectly well. Headache and Dyspepsia. — A few months since I was called to see a lady from Chelmsford, Mass., who for some two years had been afflicted with much pain and heat in the stomach and chest, and a peculiar, heavy pain in the head, for which she had tried many things, and had found no relief. This case was attended with pallor of the skin, and great coldness of the extremities. I made use of gentle aperient medicine, and magnetism. At the first sitting, the 160 APPENDIX. pain in the head and stomach was much increased primarily, but this was followed in a little time by relief from pain, free sweating, and warmth in the skin and extremities. I continued to magnetize this lady for about two weeks, once each day. The effects after each sitting were the same as at first ; but the primary increase of pain gradually dimin- ished, until the magnetic action was quite agreeable. The disease in the head, lungs, and stomach, was completely removed in about three weeks, and this lady has since re- mained well. Hepatitis and Cephalalgia. — About three months since, Miss A. applied to me for medical advice relative to a pain in the head and the region of the liver. Her food caused much distress. These complaints were of some years standing, for which she had taken much medicine. She had been salivated three times for the pain in the side, without benefit. At her request I tried magnetism. The pain in the head was completely removed after a few sittings, and returned no more ; but the side was not bettered. I applied a blister to the right side, and continued the use of magnetism. The- pain in the region of the liver yielded immediately, and has not since returned. This lady is now perfectly well. In this case magnetism and vesication mutually aided each other. Chronic Inflammation of the stomach and bowels. — In the early part of last summer, I was applied to by Mrs. S. A. for medical advice. It was her desire to be magnetized. This was one of the most complicated cases of disease I ever saw. For more than ten years, this lady had been afflicted with great pain in the head, dizziness, want of sleep, and so great was this, that she said she had not slept one night soundly for many years, and frequently passed many nights in succession without sleep. There was constant pain in the left side, steady pain and soreness in the stomach and bowels, attended with frequent paroxysms of vomiting blood, with discharges of the same per anum. At these times the tumefaction of the bowels was great, attended with severe pains resembling colic, retention of urine and pain in voiding the same. Food, and all things taken into the APPENDIX, 161 stomach, caused great distress if not rejected. This had been the case for many years. These are a few of the leading symptoms. She had applied to many medical men for aid* and was nothing bettered. I commenced the treatment by trying the power of mag. netism. At the third sitting, complete magnetic sleep was produced. I continued this for some days, and I found that her rest became better, the cephalic and abdominal pains less severe. After some little time, I ceased magnetizing this lady myself, and Mrs. Cutter commenced magnetizing her. From time to time I gave such medicines as the case seemed to require, with external counter-irritation. Mrs. A. became a lucid somnambulist, examined herself and di- rected such things as she said would be of benefit. These prescriptions I followed as they appeared to me to be proper. She is now comparatively well. She sleeps well, and has been able to eat any thing for months without uneasiness or pain. The pain at d dizziness in her head very much les- sened. The pain and discharges of blood from the stomach and bowels is entirely removed. The urinary trouble is much relieved. Within a few days, she examined herself when in the magnetic state. She said that magnetism had been of great benefit to her, but that the medicine she had taken had been very important. She said that the blood vomited came from a sore in the stomach, and not from the bowels, as I had supposed ; and that this was cured by mag- netism and a particular medicine, and that it was now^com- pletely well. This, she says, was the cause of the food's dis- tressing her. She says there are eight large scars on the inside of the bowels where there were sores for a long time. She says the bladder is small, and will never be well ; but it is now somewhat better. She has been uniform in her assertions at the different times she has examined herself. I might mention that she says her head has been much ben- efitted by magnetism, but is not well and never will be. She said' her side would be well ; and such is the case at this time. In this case, I think the union of medicine and magnetism has been very happy, and the results highly sat- isfactory in removing a mass of disease, which many good o* 162 APPENDIX. judges had deemed incurable. This and some other cases treated by me this season, fully sustain many of the remarks of the excellent Deleuze in his chapter on the connexion of magnetism with medicine, and in that on somnambulism. Yours, &c. CALVIN CUTTER. Mr. Thomas C. Hartshorn. from the same. Nashua, Nov. 29, 183?. Sir — The following observations are at your disposal •. do with them as you may think proper. It is known to the observing physician and others, that we frequently meet with diseases in which there is a local increase of vital pow- er or action. These are, in general, characterized by pre- ternatural heat, arterial throbbing, swelling, and frequently pain, commonly termed inflammation. We also meet with diseases, in which there is an apparent diminution of the lo* cal, and it may be, general vital forces, distinguished by a diminution of teat, arterial action and contraction of the size of the parts, commonly seen in cases of paralysis and debil- itating diseases. Now, it is obvious to any person, that in most cases, a remedy producing the same uniform effects, would not be proper in the two above named classes of dis- ease. Ceteris paribus — if ii benefited the one, it would in- jure the other. Consequently, if the magnetizer cannot modify the effects of the influence which he may exert, he cannot benefit diseases of a sthenic and asthenic character, by this agent. It will be seen by my remarks, that I think it highly necessary for the magnetizer to be a person well acquainted with the causes and character of diseases^ or that he should act under the direction of some person who has this knowledge. Magnetism should not be used at nap-haz- ard to cure diseases by every ignorant person, or any igno- rant person who may by chance have learned that he has this natural and inherent power. If this care is pursued, magnetism may continue reputable and useful. In rela- APPENDIX. 163 tion to the ability which I possess of modifying this in- fluence, so as to cause by my will alone, either sedative, stimulant, or soporific effects, I have been making observa- tions for some time, and upon different persons, and am sat- isfied that it can be don<>, although difficult. To accom- plish it easily, I am obliged to keep in mind the relative anatomy of the different parts of the system, particularly that of the nervous system. The following are my obser- vations on this point : About the middle of November, I accidentally met a lad in the street, a son of Mr. Wm. Lovejoy, who was obliged to use two crutches in consequence of a complete paralysis of one leg, from the hip downward. He is about seven years old, and has been in this state more than five years. It is said to have followed, and to have been caused by, a severe fever. He eould move the toes of the diseased limb a very little. He was brought to my office, and I took one of his hands and held it a little time, and then passed my fingers over his arm a few times with the intention to para- lyze his arm. I then asked him to move his arm, and he could not. There had been nothing said relative to mag- netism in his presence, and consequently imagination was not on the alert. A short time after, I saw the boy at Mr. Lovejoy's house. Without making any remarks concern- ing my desires, I took his hand with the intention to put the boy to sleep. In about one minute he was in a profound sleep. In a short time I awoke him, and then passed my fingers over the diseased limb several times. This limb is always cold. After being magnetized as above named, I examined the limb, and found it of an icy coldness and no mobility in the toes. On the following day I again called, and found the limb with its wonted coldness. I then magnetized with the in- tention of removing the coldness without causing the least loss of motion. In a few minutes the limb became quite warm, as much so as the other, with some moisture, and he could move the toes much more freely. In the experiments on the limb the head was not affected. In these different 164 APPENDIX. experiments, the lad and those present, were not made aware of my intention until after magnetizing. 1 have obtained similar results on many different persons; but the above I deem satisfactory, as the age and circum- stances of the lad, and his entire ignorance of magnetism, preclude the probability of that active and almost universal agent, imagination, being in the field of this experiment. CALVIN CUTTER, Mr. Thomas C. Hartshorn. FROM DOCTOR CLEVELAND. Pawtuxet, Dec. 10, 1837. Dear Sir— On the 31st of May last, I was called to see Mrs. , a lady about fifty years old, whom I found la- boring under a violent inflammation of the chest. On the 3d ofJufle, her symptoms became alarming. At a consul- tation of physicians her case was considered quite hopeless. Her pulse was intermitting, her extremities cold, she had a partial delirium, a wakefulness that had continued forty - ei"ht hours, restlessness, and extreme distress in the system generally, and especially in the chest. Further attempts were made to procure sleep, which as heretofore proved unavailing. Opium, in its various preparations, was resorted to, both internally and externally, with no other effect than aggravation of suffering. From idiosyncrasy, she was never able to procure rest from this drug. At the expira- tion of twelve hours, I found her appearance still worse, symptoms of mortification being more decided. Under the circumstances, I was induced to magnetize her, though I had but slight hopes of affording relief. At the end of thirty minutes I threw her into a quiet sleep. My own surprise was surpassed by that of her friends, who were entirely ignorant of the cause of her sudden and un- expected relief. She awoke at the end of two hours, with- out exhibiting any particular change in her appearance, except a greater regularity of the pulse. In a few hours she was magnetized again, and warmth was restored to the extremities ; the circulation was also improved. APPENDIX. 165 She was magnetized a third time, and awoke twenty-four hours after the first operation, with her reason perfectly restored. From this time her disease assumed a more fa- vorable turn. She was occasionally magnetized with much relief, until her natural sleep was restored, and recovery ensued. Not much doubt can exist as to the cause of the changes which took place during the twenty hours alluded to above, as no other means than magnetism was made use of during that time ; and without this, it is more than probable that the case would have terminated fatally. On the 31st of August of the present year, I was called upon to attend Mrs. ,* who was suffering a severe and deep-seated pain in the breasts, arising from a scrofu- lous affection. Although there was no obstruction to the flow of milk upon the application of the child or of the pump, yet the pain produced by them was almost insup- portable. The ordinary means had been resorted to, but not successfully even in the slightest degree. Her suffer ings, on the contrary, were daily increased, until other organs, from a peculiar sympathy well known to nurs- ing women, became affected to such a degree, that the application of the child or of the pump induced such violent spasms, that it became absolutely necessary to abandon the use of both as the means of removing the superabundance of milk. Recourse was had to magnetism. Sleep was produced in forty minutes, and sensibility so far suspended that in- stead of its requiring several persons to confine her to the bed, as heretofore, while attempting to nurse the child, she expressed the greatest delight while it was nursing, turned her face towards it, (her eyes being closed,) and caressed and fondled it in the most affectionate manner. I cautioned her to retain a knowledge of her impressions, when she * The translator had conversed with the husband of this lady, a respectable trader of this city, in relation to this case, before he re- ceived Dr. C.'s account of it, which confirms that gentleman's statement. 1^6 APPENDIX, awoke, to which she replied, " you need not fear, I never shall forget them !" It being necessary for me to leave her, I asked her how long she would sleep, to which she promptly replied, " a Her friends being unwilling that I should leave her in the magnetic state, I remained two hours, during which time her sleep was uninterrupted, I then left her with the assurance that I would return as soon as possible. \bout six hours afterwards, I found her suffering, though less se- verely than before. The same pleasant effects followed in the second magnetic sleep, into which she was immediately thrown. After directing some necessary arrangements for the night, I put her in communication with her husband and the nurse, and retired, leaving a request that I should be called jf occasion required it. On calling again the next morning at five o'clock, she was still in the magnetic state, having been so seven hours, although she had been removed to another bed, had taken refreshments several times herself, and attended duly to the demands of her child. Her sufferings from this time became less severe, al- though permanent relief was not obtained until a suppura- tion had taken place in one of her breasts. Yours, M ^ „ TT THOMAS CLEVELAND. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn. FROM DOCTOR UTLEY. Providence, Oct. 13th, 1837. Dear Sir— I feel that I shoulJ do injustice to withhold some facts that, have recently come under my observation appertaining to the subject In which vou are interested' Notwithstanding my former skepicisn/in reference to this matter, I must, when constrained by incontrovertible evi- dence, own myself a believer. After having heard much from credible authority, and witnessed some astounding facts myself in two cases, I re- APPENDIX. 167 solved, if a favorable opportunity ever presented, to ascer- tain whether I had the power of effecting what is denomi- nated the magnetic sleep, at.d in compliance with your re- quest, I submit to your disposal the detail of the following case. Mrs. W. C. is about twenty-six years of age. Her health had been very feeble several months, and she had been most of the time under medical treatment. One day, as I was leaving the room of the patient, I was requested by several of those who were present, among whom was the husband and mother, together with the patient, to magnetize her ; they having reference to the operation as a remedy for her restless nights, and violent pain in the head, with which she had been afflicted several weeks. In answer to them, I acknowledged my inexperience in the subject. However, after they had repeated their importunities, with an evident expression of skepticism depicted in their countenances, I asked the patient if she was sincere in her request. She said she was willing I should make the trial, although she was skeptical in regard to it. Thus privileged, I made a persevering effort by manipu- lating, accompanied with concentration of thought, and all the benevolent and pure emotions I was capable of feeling towards a fellow-being, at the same time somewhat faithless in regard to my success ; but determined to make a thor- ough trial. After manipulating about twenty minutes, I dis- covered in the patient an inclination to close the eyes. This appearance evidenced nothing more than an inclination to natural sleep, as would be consequent upon soothing the nervous system in this manner. After continuing the man- ipulations about ten minutes more, her chest heaved with a sigh, and she completely closed her eyes as in a natural sleep. Still doubting my success as to its being a magnetic sleep, I thought I waould test it. I passed my right hand at a distance from her left, and willed her to take my hand. She as promptly obeyed as though she had consented to a verbal request. I became convinced that a magnetic sleep was produced. I then, to satisfy myself and others present, that there was no deception on her part, bandaged her eyes 168 APPENDIX. with several thicknesses of a handkerchief, with portions of it placed upon the inner canthus next the nose, which pre- caution rendered it impossible for her, under any circum- stances, to use her natural organs of sight. I then brought my hands together at a distance from hers, and rotated my thumbs over each other, with a mental request that she should do likewise, which desire she as promptly obeyed as though she had seen the motion of my thumbs with her naked eyes, and heard my voice with her natural organs of hearing. I then reversed the motion of my thumbs, and every motion and position of my hands, thumbs, fingers, and arms, was responded to by her in obedience to my will, as though they had been directed and moved by my own muscles and powers of volition. I then tried her pow- ers of speech, and asked her if her head was free from pain. She said it was. I asked her if she felt comfortable in ev- ery other respect. She said she did. I then tested her discerning powers. I held my watch to the back of her head, and requested her to tell which side of it was next to her head. She answered correctly. Can you discern the hands of my watch ? " Yes." Will you tell me what time it is ? She answered, but not correctly, within several min- utes. I then asked her if she could see the clock, which was in an adjoining room. It was impossible for the patient or any others in the room where we were, to see it with natu- ral vision. She said she could see it. Can you see the hands of the clock ? " Yes." Will you tell me the time by it ? She told to a minute. The same questions in re- ference to the time, by the clock, were repeated in the course of her sleep, and answered correctly. 1 then requested her to tell me how many persons there were present in the room. She hesitated about long enough to count them, and answered correctly. I asked her in what position and what part of the room certain individuals were. She told cor- rectly. I promiscuously placed the hands of those present in hers, and requested her to designate and call by name the person whose hand she had hold of. She told correctly with one or two exceptions, which mistakes were corrected on asking the question the second time, and after various APPENDIX. 159 other experiments to test the magnetic vision, I requested her to wake at such a minute by my watch. She passed over the appointed time, about five minutes, with all the appearances of rousing from her usual sleep. I asked her if she felt refreshed from her recent sleep. Said she, I feel refreshed, and free from pain in my head, but have not been in a natural sleep. I have been in an indescribable state, and felt perfectly obedient to what you desired me to do, but cannot now recollect what particular requests you made when I was in that state. This want of recollection corresponds with other reports upon the subject, for I did not will her to remember the experiments that were performed. After informing her of some astonishing facts in regard to them, she expressed doubts of the propriety of putting one into such a state, and manifested an unwillingness ever to be magnetized again = but taking into consideration its remedial effects in her case I thought I should do right to insist upon a repetition,' and obtained the privilege but three subsequent times, the fourth and last time in the presence of Doctor Miller, who had been my consulting physician in the case ; and for fur. ther information and evidence in regard to these experiments and others instituted by himself, you are referred to him for testimony.* Yours, with much esteem, AT ^ r, tt L - UTLEY. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn. FROM DOCTOR TOOTHAKER. Cambridgeport, Dec. 6th, 1837. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn, Dear Sir— Yours of the 2d instant was duly received, since which my engagements have been such, that, till the present moment, I have had no opportunity of answering it. * Her complaint was dyspepsia, and her stomach was apt to reject her food a short time after eating. But after being magnetized, it 170 APPENDIX. I am perfectly willing to furnish you with any facts within my knowledge, on the subject of animal magnetism, which are of a character suited to a popular work. The detail of some cures, in which I have used it successfully as a rem- edy, would be better suited to the columns of a medical journal, where they may at some future time appear. My attention was directed particularly to the subject of animal magnetism, nearly a year since, by the urgent solici- tation of a literary friend, that I should read the report of the French Academy. I was, at first, entirely incredulous, and unwilling even to read attentively. But I soon found there was testimony of such a character in its favor, as to demand of every physician a candid examination of the subject. Further to satisfy myself of the reality of the alleged phenomena, I commenced experiments upon a girl, aged about sixteen, in whose case idiocy and mania were combined. I thought her a favorable subject for experi- ments, as there was no possibility of deception. After two or three sittings, I succeeded in producing evident drowsi- ness, as was apparent to all present. She gaped several times, dreuled, and presented other phenomena, common harbingers to sleep. When in this state, she will always start suddenly, as if to relieve herself of its spell, and has never gone into a sound magnetic sleep. On one occasion, she immediately after left the room, and went up stairs into her sleeping chamber alone, which she had never before done in her life. These experiments, made on such a subject, so far con- vinced me of the reality of a natural power of this kind, given to man by his Creator, that I determined to test it by further experiments when opportunity offered. I conse- quently soon tried the manipulations on a young lady of lymphatic temperament, and plethoric habit, who was in appears to have acquired, in a greater measure, the power of retain- ing nutriment. She also slept without the anodynes which she had formerly taken. Doctor Miller sent her to examine a patient of his, and her de- scription of the disorder was strikingly correct. APPENDIX. 171 rather poor health at the time. At the second or third sit- ting a tolerably sound magnetic sleep was produced, yet she never became a somnambulist, strictly, and would wake if I conversed much with her. The third subject of my experiments, Mrs. M., who was an entire unbeliever in it, became a somnambulist by three or four sittings. I am certain she is capable of receiving impressions, when in the magnetic state, by the will alone. April 13th, magnetized her the sixth time. While she was eating a seed cake, I willed to have it taste bitter, without saying a word or making a sign. She immediately said, " It is as sour as swill," and threw it away. She soon after said, " It is bitter." I gave her a piece of wheat bread to eat, and willed it to be brown bread. I then asked what kind of bread it was. She said, "brown." April 20th. — Magnetized her in presence of several lite- rary gentlemen of this place. The experiments were pro- posed by them, singly, to me, in another room, that there might be no possibility of her hearing. I gave her an empty tumbler, and asked her to drink some lemonade ; at the same time I willed it to be tea. She made the motions of drinking, and said, "It tastes sickish." "What is it?" " Tea," she answered. Also by will made an apple taste Utter, and soon after, sweet as honey. These and other similar experiments were entirely satisfactory to those gen- tlemen who proposed them, though they were previously somewhat incredulous. May 2d. — Magnetized the same patient. There were present Doctors J. V. C. Smith,* editor of the Medical and Surgical Journal, and Leland, of Boston. Standing at some distance from her, I willed her to wake. She said, " Do n't be willing me to wake." Dr. Smith wrote for me to have a pleasant apple she was eating, taste like a cranberry. She immediately said, " It tastes very sour ;" and after * Dr. Smith had given me some account of these experiments,, previous to my writing to Dr. Toothaker. Many physicians in Boston and its vicinity, are engaged in investigating tho utility of magnetism as an auxiliary in medical treatment. — Translator. 172 APPENDIX. much solicitation to tell what it tasted like, she said, " cran- berry. I knew before, but would not tell, you are always asking so many questions." With respect to clairvoyance, I am perfectly satisfied she has at times seen objects that she could not possibly have seen when awake. But as she complains of severe head- ache after much effort to see, and my principal object has been the restoration of her health, I seldom urge her with experiments of this kind. At one time she sat with her back towards the door of another room, and a lady present passed through the door and selected a book from a large number that were upon the bureau, which she brought pri- vately, and held over the head of Mrs, M., then in magnetic sleep. I asked her what was held over her head." She 3aid, " A book," and afterwards told the title. There we* no leading question put to elicit the answer, nor could I think of any circumstance by which she would be induced to " guess right." I must therefore infer that she did actu- ally see it. To this some may object, and suppose that I informed her mentally, or by the will. I answer, it was impossible, as I avoided seeing it myself till she told what it was, June 17th. — Magnetized Mrs. M. She examined a gentleman who was in poor health, and told correctly his disease, though of such a character that I could not have detected it by any external examination ; and I knew noth- ing of it, even by conjecture, till she told. I was informed by them both, that she knew nothing of it before, and must infer that she saw it, as she said she did. It was a disease of a portion of the alimentary canal, for which he had for- merly been under treatment at the Massachusetts General Hospital a long time. I can establish a communication between her and others, either by will or by contact. This I have done with six or eight persons at a time, having them join hands, I have been careful to ascertain, that a communication may thus be established without the aid of the will. In support of the theory of some physiologists, that there is a nervous fluid, of an extremely subtile character, by the agency of which APPENDIX. 173 the brain and the nerves are enabled to perform their pe- culiar functions, I will add, that a much longer time is re- quisite to establish a communication with several persons, than with one ; and it is not destroyed for about the same length of time after I let go the hand of the one farthest from the somnambulist. It likewise requires a longer time to es- tablish a communication with some persons than with others. This part of the subject, however, needs further investiga- tion than I have yet been able to give it. Mrs. M. has been afflicted with painful affections of a dis- tressing character, and chronic disease, which seemed to bid defiance to the whole catalogue of remedies in the ma- teria medica, but which have been much relieved by the use of magnetism as a remedy. In truth, she seems to be fast recovering the health of former years. The fourth subject on whom I experimented, was put into the somnambulic state at the second trial. I have, in this case, once or twice, obtained decided evidence in favor of clairvoyance. She was in the magnetic sleep — her eyes closed. I took a newspaper from my pocket, I had just got at the office, and handed it to her. She began to read it. A lady present, then so blinded her eyes as to be perfectly cer- tain she could not see the least thing if awake, and yet she continued to read. I could not have informed her mentally, for I had not read it ; and she afterwards told me she had not before seen it. I have frequently relieved this pa- tient of intense pain by the use of magnetism. A short time before she was magnetized, she applied to me for advice, assuring me that for nearly or quite a year previously, she had been afflicted with a constant headache, and had used leeches and other remedies, without much effect. After being magnetized a few times, she said her headache was cured. It was six or eight months since, and she has had no return of a permanent headache. I have magnetized several other individuals of both sexes. A little boy, aged five years, was put into a profound sleep in fifteen minutes, at the first trial. Also, two little girls were magnetized about as easily ; but with none of these have the experiments been continued. A young man was p* 174 APPENDIX. so far magnetized the first trial, that he was utterly unable to keep his eyes open, but did not sleep. The same effect, with slight sleep, was produced upon a gentleman who is engaged in investigating the subject. Probably, further ex- periments would produce the state of somnambulism in him. I have one other distinct case of somnambulism, but I could add nothing new with regard to it, that would be of special interest. I have, in this statement of facts relative to magnetic phe- nomena, and the cure of diseases, far out-written my own prescribed limits. I have necessarily written hastily ; but with an ardent desire that the whole truth may be known relative to so mysterious and deeply interesting a subject, I submit it to your disposal. I am, dear sir, Very truly yours, SAMUEL A. TOOTHAKER. from mons. b. f. bugard,* Boston, Nov. 10, 1837. Mr. T, C. Hartshorn, Dear Sir — I have just received your favor of the 7th inst. Only two of my cases have been published. One of these was the first given to the public in this part of the * Mons. Bugard is now attending lectures in Boston, with the design of entering the medical profession. And as his course of preparatory studies will soon be finished, he has a right to be placed here among the physicians who have been so kind as to furnish the communications embraced in this note. He will have the advan- tage of carrying into his profession the practice of magnetism, which places one more agent in the hands of medical men, calculated, not to supersede the use of remedies, but to aid their operation. If any one desires to know how far this practice obtains in the north of Europe, he will find a brief account and some references to for- eign authorities, in the work of Dr. Poyen recently published en- titled, " Progress of Animal Magnetism in New England ;" a work which from the great variety of facts which it contains, is highly APPENDIX. 175 country; that of Mrs. Russell of this city, which appeared in the Boston Medical and Surgical Journal, of the precise date of which I am ignorant, and I have no copy to send you. Although I am much interested in the subject, I am sorry to be obliged to say that I have been prevented from de- voting to it the attention it deserves. The little information I can give you shall be cheerfully granted. It will consist of a few facts only. As to the names of the persons allud- ed to in them, I do not feel authorized to give more than the initial letters for publication ; but on personal application, I shall be happy to give any one whatever proofs he may desire. One day in the fall of 1835, I was requested to magne- tize Mrs. R., a widow lady of almost forty years of age, who had been, for several years, afflicted with the tic douL oureaux in the lower part of the spine ; and with palpitations of the heart. When I went to see her, she had not for a fortnight left her chamber, which was in the fourth story, and she could not move without assistance, from her bed to her chair, or from her chair to her bed. She wished to be magnetized because all other remedies had proved of no avail, but being entirely ignorant of what magnetism is, she had merely fallen in with the suggestion of some one, that it might prove beneficial to her. After I had magnetized her only three times, she was so much better that she was able to go down into her kitchen, and attend to her daily occupa- tions. At the fourth or fifth sitting, she became a somnam- bulist. Her health improved so much and so rapidly, that on the day succeeding the seventh sitting, although she was not perfectly cured, she found herself so well that she went on a visit to Salem where some of her relations resided. interesting, and from the great number of respectable names avouch- ing them, is worthy of confidence. Of Dr. Poyen's fidelity, those who know him well, do not entertain a doubt. He labors under the disadvantage of having introduced a subject entirely new to the unlettered, and of having been most liberally vilified by men who misunderstood his character. 170 APPENDIX, One day after putting this lady into somnambulism, I re- quested her daughter, a girl about nine years of age, to speak to her. She addressed her mother several times, calling aloud ; but receiving no answer, she burst into tears, thinking her mother to be dead, I 'took her little hand, and, placing it in the hand of her mother, told her to speak to her again. Her mother immediately answered her call, and the countenance of the child beamed with joy at the certainty of her being alive. This lady was prevailed upon to take another magnetizer, because I refused to make her an object of exhibition to the curious, But her health, instead of improving, grew worse, and her new magnetizer, Dr. D., who magnetized her merely for the purpose of making experiments, would have unmercifully sent her to the grave, had she not refused to continue the treatment. I mention this circumstance, be- cause it affords a striking proof of what is observed by Deleuze, in his Practical Instruction, as well as by other authors, relative to the dangers that frequently attend the change of a former successful magnetizer. Last summer was a year since I was requested to mag- netize Mrs. F v who, with other affections, had a pain be- tween the shoulders. At the second sitting, she experienced a sensation like the pain moving about, following the motion of my hands. She soon lost herself in a sleep, or at least in a partial sleep, and I left her. The pain left her too, for she felt it no more. At another time this lady was suffering from the tic doul- oureux in the face. In the afternoon, when I came in to give a lesson in French to her two daughters, she was in the same room with us, and in such an agony that I offered to relieve her by the use of magnetism. She assented to the trial. She had been magnetized hardly ten minutes, when I thought she was sound asleep ; but she opened her eyes, and said that her pain had subsided. I then left her to attend to the French lessons, which being finished, I re- quested one of the young ladies to see how her mother was, she having retired into another room, She went and re- turned, saying that her mother was entirely free from pain, APPENDIX. 177 I understand that she has not been attacked since, though she had formerly suffered pretty often. About a year ago, I had occasion to magnetize Mrs. L., a French lady, who for many years had been afflicted with violent periodical headaches, with excessive vomitings, and some more serious affections. The day after the first sit- ting, she felt much better, and she continued to improve very rapidly. However, on the morning of the sixth or seventh day of her treatment, at about ten o'clock, her husband came to tell me that his wife had a violent headache, and a very great disposition to vomit. I immediately repaired to see her. She was sitting by the fire, having prepared some tea to aid the tendency. I magnetized her head only, be- fore she had taken any thing. She soon felt better, and in half an hour, the pain had almost subsided. I left her. In the evening I returned and found her very well. She said she had not vomited, and at one o'clock she had dined with a very good appetite. What is most to be remarked in this case, is, that before being magnetized, whenever such a head- ache took her, it never subsided until she had vomited to exhaustion. About a year ago I was called on by Mr. H., who re- quested me to magnetize his wife. This lady was suffer- ing severely with the tic douloureux in the face. She had been more or less affected with it for several years, and had now suffered for several weeks without finding any relief in the remedies of the best physicians of this city. I magnet- ized her several times without much apparent effect during the operation, but she slept much better afterwards. I think she was put asleep only twice, though I magnetized her about fifteen times. Her health, however, was gradually improving, the tic douloureux had subsided, and last week she told me, in the presence of several persons, that it had not returned. It is not quite a year since I was requested by a gentle- man, a Mr. V., to magnetize him. Fortw T oor three years he had had an affection of the stomach, and been treated as a dyspeptic. His physician finally declared his case to be the tic douloureux, and not the dyspepsia. He had been in 178 APPENDIX. a state of constipation, for nearly a month. I magnetized him only five limes. The day after the first sitting, he felt much better, and had satisfactory evacuations. _ His health improved so much that he renounced the project he had formed of going to Cuba for his- restoration. I would ob- serve that it is not true that magnetism always has the ef- fect of filling the heart with tender and grateful sentiments ; for this Mr. V. has not yet come to my rooms to thank me for the good I have done him, although he found the way thither to request my services. One evening last winter, I went to see my friends. Dr. Benjamin H. West and Dr. Ruel W. Lawton, who boarded together and occupied the same room. Some refreshments were brought in during my visit. Early in the evening, Dr. L. said to me, " Monsieur Bugard, I know that you have magnetized several persons ; I wish you would give me some informa- tion on the subject of magnetism ; I should like to have my mind satisfied ; I do not know what to think of it." "Well," said I, "I can add but very little to what has been published on the subject, but if you are willing, I will try to magne'tize you." "Although I think it very wrong to magnetize a person in good health, I made him this proposal the more readily, be- cause his constitution i& rather feeble. " Very well," replied he» I began to magnetize him. For a quarter of an hour he seemed much inclined to laugh ; but I soon perceived I could produce an effect upon him. I therefore continued the manipulations, and in less than half an hour from the time of commencing, he was perfectly asleep. Whilst he was in that state, Dr. West and I indulged ourselves in de- molishing the refreshments. About a quarter of an hour had elapsed, when Dr. Lawton wildly opened his eyes. I immediately put my right hand on the pit of his stomach, exerting my will to put him asleep, This was done in less than half a minute. Then Dr. West and I went on demol- ishing as before ; and ten minutes had hardly elapsed, when Dr. L. opened his eyes upon us.. APPENDIX. 179 I again placed my right hand upon his epigastrium, and my left on his thigh, grasping it near the knee, putting forth the power of volition ; and again Dr. L. went to sleep in less than no time. On his awaking about ten minutes afterwards, I asked him what he thought then of magnetism. " Well, sir, my skepticism is rather shaken," was the reply. Receive the expressions of consideration with which I am Your most ob't servant, B. F. BUGARD. PROM DOCTOR BENJAMIN HASKELL.* Boston, October 20, 1837. Dear Sir — I owe you an apology for not replying to your letter before. But the truth is, it was not in my power to send you any thing satisfactory relative to the inquiries you saw fit to make. And as I was in expectation of re- ceiving some farther details from a brother of mine residing in Gloucester, whom I had commissioned -to make inquiries of Mr. Blatchford, in particular, on those points which had a bearing on animal magnetism, your object as well as mine would be best answered by delay. Yesterday I heard from him, but he had not seen, nor was likely to see him for some time. When any thing comes to my knowledge calculated to throw light on this intricate subject, I will for- ward it without delay, that it may obtain all the publicity * I wrote to Dr. Haskell, in relation to the case of natural som- nambulism, which occurred at Gloucester, Mass., in 1834. I wished to ascertain whether the subject of that case had ever been brought under the influence of magnetism, as three-other similar cases have been. I deem his reply worthy of attention, as it embraces an opin- ion which is important, if correct, and which deserves weight from the scientific attainments of him who advances it. The ease of young Blatchford is given in a communication to the editor of the Boston Medical and Surgical Journal, of June '24th, 1837, by Dr. Haskell. Dr. H. is also the author of an ingenious aticle on Ani- mal Magnetism, which appeared in the same Journal, September 20th, 1837. 180 APPENDIX. possible. In the mean while, as you seem somewhat desir- ous of knowing my views on it, I shall take the liberty to express them without reserve. There is nothing unphilo- sophical in supposing that somnambulism may be induced by an agency transmitted from one individual to another. x\t the same time, whenever and however it takes place, it is a disease, and like all nervous disorders, has not only a tendency to recur, but to superinduce other diseases of the same class. I cannot but regard the practice of it as inju- rious to those on whom it is exercised, and, when its nature is fully understood, as morally wrong, except in those cases in which it is made use of as a remedial agent. You have my permission to insert this opinion in a note to your trans- lation, and combat it if you think it erroneous. I have nev- er magnetized any one, nor have I made myself acquainted with the steps by which it is done. The interest which I have taken in it, is not practical, but theoretical. Yours respectfully, B. HASKELL. Mr. Thomas C. Hartshorn. Note 34. SEEING THROUGH OPAQUE SUBSTANCES. FROM ISAAC THURBER, ESQ. Providence, Nov. 4th, 1837. Dear Sir — I take the opportunity which a few moments of leisure now ofFord me, to give you an account of a re- cent visit from Miss B. to my house. As I suppose you to desire an account, merely, of the phenomena then exhibited while under the magnetic influence, I shall notice briefly the facts in relation to them only. Miss B. came to my house on the morning of the 28th of October, with a view to pass the day with my family ; at about the close of the day she APPENDIX. 181 was put into the magnetic sleep by Dr. C. At first she appeared to be in a state entirely senseless ; from this ap- parent slumber she was aroused by having her attention di- rected to the objects around her. Dr. C. then left her in communication with myself and family, with directions to awake precisely at six o'clock. During this interval Miss B. appeared cheerful, much disposed to converse, and at times quite playful. While in conversation, she expressed a desire to examine the arrangement of the house, the fur- niture, &c. In passing through the different rooms, she noticed and moved various articles. She was then conducted into a dark room, in which the largest objects could not be discerned by any one who was not possessed of more than ordinary powers of vision. On being requested to give the time by the clock which was in the room, she immediatelv stepped to the corner in which the clock stood, and replied, " it is twenty-three minutes past five." The answer was correct. I then asked her if she saw any other object in the room. She replied, " I am looking at the pictures " What pictures ? " This one over the fire-place." The pic- ture alluded to is composed of various emblems, together with a certificate of membership to an institution in this town. Miss B. described the emblems of justice, wealth, industry, and also the certificate, and mentioned the place in the pic- ture which each of them occupied. When speaking of the emblem of wealth, I requested her to place my finger upon it. On admitting light into the room, I found my finder pointing to a small figure representing wealth dispensuig her gifts from the horn of plenty. I would here state that Miss B. was never before in this room, and was entirely ignorant of the furniture which it contained. Having obtained the evidence of clairvoyance, I gave her a sealed paper containing a sentence, which I requested her to read. She held the paper to the side of her head for the space of about one minute, and then returned it to me without apparently noticing its contents. No further notice was taken of the letter during her sleep. Some time after she awoke, she gave the substance of the letter to one my family. This being communicated to me, I requested 182 APPENDIX. Miss B. to write down the sentence inside, that it might be presented in her own handwriting, to a company that would meet with her at Mr. J. M.'s on the following evening ; at which time the sentence was so presented, in the following words : In these latter days as informer times, the blind re- ceive their sight. The letter was then brought forward, the seals of which until this time had not been broken, neither had the sentence or any part of it been communicated to any individual. It was opened by Rev. Mr. Stetson, of Medford, in presence of Rev. E. B. Hall, of this city, Mr. Jesse Metcalf, and a number of others, and found to contain the same sentence as that written by Miss B., differing only in the spelling of two words. The sentence was written on a slip of paper, and this placed between two pieces of sheet lead, the whole enclosed in an envelope in a letter form. Yours, &c. ISAAC THURBER. Mr. Thomas C. Hartshorn. FROM MR. GEORGE HUNT. Providence, Nov. 22d, 1837. Mr. Thomas C. Hartshorn, Sir Having heard much of the wonderful powers of Miss Brackett under the magnetic influence, and being rather skeptical as to her ability to see and describe objects that were previously unknown to her and all who were in attendance, believing at the time that she did not see the real object of her description as it existed, but the mere im- age of it in the mind of her magnetizer, or in the mind of those who were in communication with her, I was induced to try the experiment alluded to in your note. I took a wooden box, made of half inch stock, measuring eight inches by fourteen, perfectly tight, and filled it with various articles, curiously arranged. I presented it to Mr. Metcalf for Miss B.'s inspection. On inquiring about the result of her examination, I was informed that she took the APPENDIX. 183 box and held it over her head, and saw a great variety of dried pressed leaves, and some flowers. Dr. Capron re- quested her to enter the box, which she effected through the key-hole, or the top, I do not remember which, and then mentioned two books, one pamphlet with a blue cover, one card marked L. M., and a substance that looked like tow, which I suppose was the bird's nest made use of on this occasion, the greater part of which was made of tow. She said there were many other things in the box, but the air was so confined that it troubled her to breathe ; and she was obliged to come out. Her description, so far as it went, was correct, except as to the nest. In this, however, she was correct as to the substance she saw. In the conclusion of her remarks on the box and contents, she seemed to think it belonged to some old maid. The result of this experiment is in every way satisfactory to me, so far as it goes, inasmuch as no one knew the contents of the box except myself. Every article was packed close, so that no one could have formed any conception of what the box contained, by shaking, or otherwise disturbing it. If these facts will aid you, you are welcome to them. Yours respectfully, GEORGE HUNT. In the ninth note of part first, several instances of the power of producing paralysis are given ; and I there stated that the power gained by the practice of magnetism may be found effectual in producing it without having a commu- nication previously established. The following letter from Dr. Knox, of New- York, gives well authenticated evidence that the conjecture was not unfounded. FROM DOCTOR KNOX. Providence, Sept. 24th, 1837. Mr. T. C. Hartshorn, Dear Sir — You requested me to communicate to you some facts in animal magnetism which I had observed. 154 APPENDIX. Although I cannot cert; :ach much impor. them, yet if you can mal: use of them th! fectly A few evenings since, being in company where the sub- ject of animal magnetism, at present so e 1 ssing a theme, was the topic of c; ::on, I was request* to magi: s:>me person present lor the amusement of the cemp This I declined, remarking at the sam, that I frequently known peculiar sensations produced loc the magnetic passes, and offering to make the atter this, much beyond my own expectation, and to the am mentof the company. I was complete!; assfiil. The magnetic operations, continued during reduced complete palsy of the left arm. Be, .jmplete an- nihilation of muscular p : . e arm lost to a certain degree its sensibility, and its temperati somewhat re. The firm health and previous skepticism of this experiment, conspired to render the result remarkable, ile her unquestionable veracity, her elex: surprise, and her reiterated assertions, precluded ad] s s .ion of imposition. re present on this occ: Diy Parsons, and^General Greene, of Provider: I have frequently made the same expe: and in the majority of cases, some peculiar sensations have been the result : generally a sense of weight in the arm, a immobility when compared with the other arm, and, though less frequenti;. . seme of pricking, such as occurs when the arm or foot is said to be asleep. Whether the, ha are the product of an excited imagination, or a direct influ. ence of the will of the magnetizes I shall not attempt to decide. the same time I must candidiv avow that a ske F at more than philosophic: which I commenced the investigation of the clau: inimal n netism, has been vanquished b; . hich 1 1 (and less than ocular demonstration I did not feel inclined' to admit,) and by the curious results which, in a diver^ of cases, have followed my own experiments. I do not be understood as declar. belief in all that mag i or their patients, much less the retailers at APPENDIX. 185 second hand of magnetic miracles, have asserted. Much allowance must be made for credulity, a love of the mar- vellous, and that propensity, so common, to make the most of the easy faith of our neighbors. Yet, after all these deductions, I apprehend there will remain a residuum of unimpeachable testimony, for facts which have hitherto been considered as warring with the laws of nature, and as pos- sible only on the supposition of miraculous interposition. By the politeness of Dr. Capron, I have had several opportunities of seeing Miss Brackett, whose case he has detailed in the first number of your translation. To test the lucidity of this somnambulist, I resorted to an experi- ment which had previously been frequently tried, and ac- cording to the assertions of the most respectable witnesses, with complete success. I wrote a note of four lines, directed to Miss Brackett, to the contents of which she could have no possible clue. I enclosed it in two envelopes, so that the writing was covered by four folds of paper. I sealed it with four wafers and four wax seals, and impressed it with a peculiar device. No light, however strong, could render it possible to discover that there was any thing written with- in. This was left with the somnambulist, and two days after, Dr. Capron returned it to me with the contents of the note written on the outer envelope, with the exception of one wprd which she could not decipher. This was no doubt owing to the illegible character of the handwriting, as on opening it, I was convinced I could not have read it myself but from recollection. She likewise wrote " senti- ments," instead of " selections," another mistake certainly attributable to the same cause. The note contained seven- teen words, which were known to no one but myself. It was returned as it was given, without the slightest appear- ance of having been handled or crumpled. The supposition of the removal or opening of the seals was out of the ques- tion. The idea that the discovery was a happy conjecture, is absurd. To resort to a mathematical expression, the chance of such a solution being unity, no number short of infinity could represent the opposite chances. Such facts as these, T grant, require for their establishment a mass of Q* 186 APPENDIX. evidence, great in proportion to their marvellous character. Yet such a weight of testimony is rapidly accumulating, if it does not already exist, as must shake the incredulity of the most skeptical. The denial that any proof can establish such facts, involves principles no less dangerous, than those by which the celebrated Hume vainly sought to overthrow the evidence of Christianity. Respectfully yours, J. R. KNOX. Note 35. INSENSIBILITY TO PAIN. FROM DOCTOR ESTEN. Providence, Nov. 13th, 1837. Dear Sir — In the appendix of Deleuze, I find it given in the notes as an opinion, that the somnambulist always appears to know what the magnetizer is doing, and therefore he cannot perform a surgical operation without producing pain. I am led by the experiments which I have tried to think this is not always the case. I think the patient in the somnambulic state may sometimes know what the magnet- izer is doing, even while he is performing a surgical opera- tion, and may assist in the operation, and still be insensible to pain. This, perhaps, depends very much upon the degree of sympathy which the operator has for his patient, a sym- pathy that induces apprehensions lest the patient should suffer under the operation. On the 28th of October ultimo, a lady, in company with a friend of hers, called on me to have some teeth filled. One in particular was so badly decayed and so sensitive that the touch of an instrument produced severe pain, so much so, that she could not endure to have it filled until she was magnetized. Knowing that she had been fre- quently magnetized, I obtained permission to make use of APPENDIX. !87 it on this occasion, to ascertain whether I could or could not perform the operation without producing pain. I threw her into the magnetic sleep in about five minutes. 1 then removed that entire portion of the tooth which was carious, without regarding the nerve or membrane, and filled the cavity. During the whole time, she showed no indications of pain. She appeared to know every thing I was doing, talked about the operation, opened her mouth when lap- proached her with an instrument, and closed it again when I withdrew it. I asked her if the operation was painiul, and she said it was not in the least. _ . The pain of removing the carious portion of a tooth where the nerve and membrane are exposed, as in this case, is greater than that of extracting the tooth. I should not have filled this tooth on account of the insufferable pam that would have naturally attended the work, and which would have followed it, had the patient not been magnetized. I filled two or three other teeth while the patient was in the somnambulic state ; but the one to which particular ret- erence has been made above, is the only one that would naturally be attended with much pain. Before I awoke her, I inquired if the tooth ached ; she said it did not, and that it was perfectly easy. On being awaked, she imme- diately clapped her hand to her face, and said her tooth ached. I advised her to keep the filling in, to give it a trial, and see if it would not stop aching. The next even- in* she sent for me, and informed me that her tooth had continued to ache ever since it was filled, and was then aching violently. I removed the filling, and applied some kreosote,but without producing the desired effect. I he tooth continued to ache violently. She was afterwards magnetized ; and while in that state, she asked for a knit- ting needle, which was given her. She heated the needle, and thrust it into her tooth with her own hand, for the pur- pose of destroying the nerve. In this she was successful. The operation which she performed with her own hands, she said did not produce pain. For further satisfaction, I cut around one of her teem with a gum lancet while she was in the somnambulic state, 188 APPENDIX. and placed a pair of extracting instruments upon the tooth, and pulled quite hard, giving it a rotary motion with as much force as the tooth would bear without starting it. I asked her if what I had done did not hurt. She said she did not feel it, for I had not pulled any. She then took up the instrument which I had laid down, and wished to ex- tract the tooth herself. I placed the instrument upon her tooth, when she seized it with both hands, and pulled with so much force that I was obliged to exert my strength to prevent her from starting it. The instrument bore so hard upon the tooth and gums as to start the blood. She still said she felt no pain, and she certainly showed no indica- tions of it. She bore the whole without changing counten- ance or moving a muscle that indicated pain. I think I could have extracted either of her teeth without her being sensible of pain, but did not wish to sacrifice a tooth to gratify curiosity. When she was in my office the first time, I had occasion to take an artificial tooth from a small box in a closet, which had been shut, and into which she could not have looked had she been awake, and in the chair where she then was. She immediately told me that I had taken it from a box in the closet, and rising up she carried it back to trie same box, although there were several others filled with the same sort of teeth. Yours respectfully, W. T. ESTEN. Note 36. PROM MR. AMERICUS V. POTTER. Saratoga Springs, Sept. 14, 1837. Dear Sir — I embrace the first opportunity to give you the information you asked in regard to the effects of mag- netism upon men. I am not prepared to speak positively APPENDIX. 189 about the relative susceptibility of magnetism in the two sexes, as I have attempted to magnetize but few men ; yet I think them the most difficult to magnetize. I speak of susceptibility, because I believe the action depends as much upon a certain constitutional adaptation, as upon the health of the subject. I magnetized xMr. Angell, a gentleman of Providence, of about twenty-five, in good health, of a very active and rather nervous temperament. At the first sitting, I closed his eyes in about five minutes. Afterwards I found no dif- ficulty in doing it in about two, so that he could not open them. I have done it more than once at the distance of half a mile. I was never able to get him beyond this state, although I magnetized him six or eight times for the purpose. In five minutes, at the first sitting, I closed a gentleman's eyes, (Mr. Rogers, Attorney,) at Saratoga Springs, so that he could not open them. I have not attempted since. In ordinary cases, when we wish to convince a man of fbe truth of any thing, we desire and try to open his eyes. But in this case, you will perceive I have taken a course clean contrary. I convinced Mr. Rogers of my magnetic power by closing his eyes in spite of his teeth. To tell the truth, he yielded with a good grace, and he is now firm in the faith. I trust no witling will infer from this that we mean to blind people merely to impose upon their imagina- tions, or that Mr. Rogers rushed blindly into a belief in magnetism, without seeing a reason for his sudden conversion. After a sitting of about twenty minutes with a young man of our city, I found him unable to raise his hand or even speak, with evident symptoms of somnambulism, al- though he was not asleep. After two more sittings of about the same time, he progressed very sensibly, so much so that I could act considerably upon the muscles of his arm ; yet I think it would take two or three more sittings to make this a perfect case. His health appears to be good, but he has a very slender constitution. At the solicitation of a gentleman at Newport, I magnet- ized a very active colored man, a waiter at the Bellevue Hotel, of strong constitution and excellent health. In about 190 APPENDIX, forty minutes, he was unable to speak or move. I raised and extended his arm at an elevation of about thirty degrees, and kept it there at will for more than fifteen minutes ; al- though I asked him at several different times to drop his arm, he could not do it, unaccompanied by my will. When the influence was thrown off, he did not know that his arm had been moved. I saw symptoms of somnambulism, but had no further opportunity to continue the experiments. This man had never heard of magnetism before. No other case occurs to my mind, worth mentioning at this time.* On my passage from Providence to this place, by the carelessness of the driver who was to take me at Spring- field, I was left, and obliged to wait for the next day's stage. Having seen an account, some four or five years since, of a girl who was a natural somnambulist at that place, I deter- mined to see her if she was to be found. I learned that Dr. Belden was her physician at the time. I called upon the Doctor, and stated my business. He received me very courteously, and was perfectly willing to give me any in- formation. On my declaring it to be my conviction that I could produce the same phenomena by magnetization, which she formerly exhibited in a natural way, he expressed his entire unbelief, yet was willing I should try the experiment, with the young lady's consent. I found her to be a girl about the age of nineteen, and having the appearance of the most perfect health. I sat down before her, holding her thumbs, and in four minutes she was entirely insensible to all external objects.! Dr. Belden informed me that the appearance of the girl was the same as formerly when in that state, except that she is much more calm. There was some difficulty m waking her. He appeared to express his conviction of the power of magnetism from the singular and striking effect produced in this case. * Since this letter was written, Mr. Potter has magnetized sev- al men. t In a le confirmed. eral men. t In a letter from Dr. Belden to the translator, this statement is APPENDIX. 191 Since my arrival here I have been solicited to prove the existence of the magnetic power by magnetizing various in- dividuals. Among them was Mrs. F****, about twenty- five years old, light complexion, hair and eyes, the daughter of Judge Cowing. She had been subject to tic douloureux, but was not afflicted with it at the time. She possesses a fine mind, and a cultivated taste. At the first sitting of twenty minutes, she experienced a sense of numbness. At the second sitting, the next day, in thirty minutes a state of tranquillity was induced, and a total loss of muscular power. At the third, the above symptoms were much increased. The fourth sitting was at the house of Mr. J. W. West- cott. In twenty minutes her eyes were closed, and she obeyed a mental request, by raising her hand several times. From this state she passed into the most perfect ecstasy, with violent and energetic action of the hands, and the mus- cles of her face, frequently exclaiming, " O what thoughts ! if I could only clothe them in words !" The motion of her hands and the changes of her expression were as if she were acting some part in a tragedy. Sometimes she burst into violent screams of laughter. "After throwing off the influ- ence, she continued in the same state for about an hour, till it gradually wore off, and she was enabled to go home. Be- fore it wore off, her eyes being wide open, she continued the motions of the hands, and watched them without being able to stop them, conversing at the same time upon other subjects. She sat down and played upon the piano, with- out experiencing any difficulty ; but as soon as she left off playing, the motions returned, though less violently. The next sitting was attended with the same results, but of much shorter duration. Mr. Westcott and lady and four or five others were present. My next patient was Miss Maria Read, sixteen years of age the fourth of July last, under the medical attendance of Dr. Steele. I understood from Dr. Allen, that she had suf- fered a total prostration of strength, and great nervousness, so that she could not hold any thing in her hand. She was troubled moreover with an obstruction, and a loss of appe- tite. Dark complexion and eyes. 192 APPENDIX. In twenty minutes she went into a magnetic state, re- sembling natural sleep. She would not answer the ques- tions of others or of myself. Sometimes she would answer me in a low whisper. Other persons could rouse her by a noise, but not by speaking to her. She was magnetized once a clay for ten or fifteen days. The effect upon her, as I am informed by her mother and herself, is a re-estab- lishment of the strength of her nerves, and an improvement in her general health. At Saratoga, I put the lady of General Smith asleep in fifteen minutes. For sometime she was unable to speak ; but when I commenced waking her, she requested me to let her remain in that state, because she felt " so happy." At one o'clock, she wished to remain until dinner time, which was at two. I then asked her husband to inform me at two o'clock if every thing was not right. When the bell rang for dinner, General Smith went to her room, took Mrs. S. by the hand, and went down to the table, where she was immediately taken ill. He went back with her to her room, seated her, and returned, to the table. At three o'clock, he came to her room, and found her on the floor, nearly senseless, quite deranged, and suffering the most excruciating pain in the head, stomach, and bowels. He placed her upon the bed, and applied frictions over the chest and limbs, without giv- ing relief. Although it roused her a little, she remained in the same state until seven o'clock, when* Mr. Hubbard chanced to meet me, and informed me that Mrs. S. was dangerously ill ; but he did not ascribe it to magnetism. I went forthwith to her room, where I found her as above described. I placed one hand upon her forehead, and the other upon her waist, and in ^.ve minutes she was entirely restored. General Smith should have informed me, as I had particularly requested him to, as soon as she was taken ill at dinner time. October 7th, Albany. Miss S******, fair complexion, hair and eyes. I drew my hand for two minutes from the shoulder of the left arm to the ends of the fingers, slightly touching them. She complained of great sense of weakness APPENDIX. 193 in the arm. On the next Monday, at nine o clock in tne morning, there was a pain in the muscle of the left fore arm. This had continued from the time I had magnetized it on Saturday ; so that she was not able to raise any small weight or to use it. I restored the arm in five minutes, af- ter a continued paralysis of thirty-six hours. While in Albany, I got acquainted with Dr. March, who, as you well know, lectures on anatomy, and whose anatom- ical collection, by the by, is an exceedingly fine one. My friend, Mr. G., threw Dr. March's little daughter, seven years old, into a magnetic sleep in about ten minutes, with- out touching her, and without using the manipulations, lo ascertain what effect could be produced at a distance, Mr. G. and professor McKee being at the temperance hotel, and Dr. March being with the little girl at his own house, about fifty rods distant, he put her into somnambulism in five minutes. . . This was only the fourth time of magnetizing her ; and she not only did not know of the attempt, but Dr. March kept her reading. She dropped her book and fell asleep. . . A. K. Hadley, Esq. and another gentleman, a physician, both from Troy, were present. She has since been magnetized in the presence of Drs. James and George McNaughton, Dr. Peck, and about twenty others, of the first respectability. Dr. March put her to sleep easily. Mr. G. also magnetized Mr. John Perry, in the presence of Governor Marcy, Mr. Attorney-General Butler, and sev- eral physicians, among whom was Dr. March. Sitting at the distance of six feet from Mr. Perry, he began to mag- netize him mentally. In five minutes his eyes were set wide open, but he took no notice of things. In seven min- utes he closed them, and began to tremble nervously and his whole frame to shake. The convulsions were violent, stamping and striking with his fists, and they continued about half an hour. By placing the hand upon the bare neck and breast, and the upper part of the stomach, he B 1^4 APPENDIX. finally succeeded in waking him, after carrying him out into the street.* At the second sitting, I threw him into the same state, in presence of professor McKee and Dr. March, and the ef- fects were about the same. When spoken to, he would not answer. He is an active, healthy, intelligent young man. Judge Spreicker was also magnetized four times. He was so much affected as not to be able to answer any one but Mr. G. The judge was an unbeliever even after see- ing a case of somnambulism. He is now ready to testify to the power of this agent. At the house of Rev. Mr. Wycoff, in the presence of the Principal of the Female Academy, Dr. James McNaughton, and others, I magnetized Miss Van N., about seventeen years of age ; light hair, light eyes, and good health through life. She settled down from mirth and laughter, in five minutes, to a vacant stare, without winking. In a few minutes more, she closed her eyes. There was a slight trembling of the frame. In fifteen minutes she would an- swer no one but myself. She was awaked by reversed motions in thirty seconds. Yours, AMERICUS V. POTTER. Mr. Thomas C. Hartshorn. * Mesrner maintained that these convulsions were useful. He endeavored to produce them, and the great power with which he was endued was thus exhibited in an extraordinary degree. Expe- rience, however, has shown that they are sometimes attended with effects which are bad, though neither fatal nor permanent. At present the magnetizers use their influence soothingly, and find its effects salutary. Then* patients are however sometimes thrown in- to convulsions when the action is too great, or not sustained by firm- ness of purpose. The Messrs. Potter are abundantly able to prove the existence of the magnetic power. But to ascertain the true value of it as a means of alleviating and curing the sick, demands incessant practice. They have been several times successfully em- ployed by physicians in this city to magnetize their patients. APPENDIX. 195 Note 37.— Page 185. Deleuze says that the influence of the magnetizer will be felt even in the waking state. I have evidence of a very curious nature in proof of this assertion. Every one who takes the true way to convince himself of the existence of the agent called magnetism, that is, by attempting the proofs on individuals whose state of health he desires to benefit, will find nothing more common than this influence over somnambulists. Georget seems not to have known this, for he might have prevented the repug- nance which his patients manifested when they were served with moxas and blisters of their own prescription. The reader is referred to the letter of Dr. Robbins at the twenty- eighth note, for some curious results. In a subsequent letter that gentleman states that he does not find the plan equally efficacious with all. An inveterate attachment to tobacco in its various shapes, has been entirely destroyed, though the patient, a young medical student of about twenty years of age, knew nothing of the cause of it while in the ordinary state. Many weeks have elapsed, but I am in- formed that the attachment has not yet revived. It is not therefore so extraordinary that any article of food, when magnetized with the design of changing its taste, and presented to the somnambulist, should retain its induced qualities long after he is awakened from sleep. Any per- son who is merely put in communication with one, may do this to his own satisfaction, without saying a word of his intention even to the patient. I have tried this successfully, changing a piece of wheat bread into cake, a part of which was eaten immediately and pronounced to be cake, and the next day the rest was eaten while the patient, who is blind, was in the ordinary state, and did not know that she had had the piece in her hand. How far the experiment would suc- ceed with one who possesses vision, I have never yet availed myself of my opportunities to ascertain. I have in the same manner imparted a peculiar taste to water. Dr. Robbins has tried experiments of the same kind. One of these he relates in a recent note to me, which ex- 196 APPENDIX. hibits this power of transfusing tastes in a very striking de- gree. He gave one of his somnambulists a clove to eat, and told her to recollect after waking that she had eaten a piece of cinnamon. On waking she had some of it remain- ing in her mouth, and thought it was in reality cinnamon, while another clove which she eat had its proper taste. At another time, when she was asleep, he gave her a piece of aloes, not telling her what it was* and told her to have it taste on her awaking like liquorice. Observing it upon the table after waking, she mistook it for opium ; but on being told to taste it, she did so, and recognised at once the naus- eous sweet of liquorice. Such is one of the powers of this unknown agent which we call magnetism. It changes the most disgusting bitter in the whole materia medica into the most intense sweet. If any one thinks these experiments were not made with sufficient care, it is easy for him to repeat them in many ways, if he can obtain the privilege of being put in communication with a somnambulist. There is another power closely allied to this which is no less astonishing. You can induce a desire for a particular species of foqd at a particular hour of the day. A trial of this was recently made by Dr. Cleveland, of Pawtuxet. The patient, without knowing any thing about the influence which had been exerted the day before, called for the sev- eral articles which had been specified for each of the three daily meals. The patient's want of appetite for several weeks in succession was the reason for pursuing this course, and it was completely successful. Dr. Cleveland once called upon another of his patients, who enjoyed a good appetite and was anticipating a choice article of food for dinner. He advised her to sleep an hour before dinner ; and while she was in the magnetic sleep, he told her that she must not eat of the dish she was antici- pating, but of another one which he specified. On her awaking, no one being present but the nurse, who knew the Doctor's intention, she refused to partake of the viand, though it was urged upon her as being well prepared and palatable, but she called for the substituted food, on which AlTENDiX. 197 she dined with relish, without suspecting the cause of the change wrought in her appetite. Dr. Cleveland has also succeeded in several other exper- iments of a highly useful nature, the particulars of which I have in some letters from him which are now before me. One of these was to induce a spirit of charitable feeling towards an individual who had rendered himself an object of the patient's hatred and indignation. Thus far the spirit of forgiveness still prevails, although the somnambulist knows nothing about the influence exerted by the magneti- zer to produce this happy result. Some other experiments have been made by him upon several somnambulists to excite cheerfulness, hope, and or- der, respectively; which were attended with success the most complete. I state these things not to excite the marvellousness of the reader, but with the design of enforcing the precepts of Deleuze, wherein, to the minds of men who are not suffi- ciently acquainted with the subject, he seems to be over cautious ; for instance, in the chapter on somnambulism, and especially in his chapter on the choice of a magnetizer. That one could take advantage of the magnetic sleep, in some instances, to subserve an evil purpose, seems now to me unquestionable. But the physician has drugs of most potent effect, a drop or two of which would be immediate in its action, whether the recipient be in good or in bad health ; while by the aid of magnetism, the process is slow, uncertain, and tedious, and seldem effective on persons who are not already prostrated by disease. The physician is one on whom we bestow our confidence in an especial man- ner, and therefore we are careful in the first place to choose one on whom we can depend. Having regard not wholly to his skill, but to certain qualities of the head and the heart which vindicate our choice. If the physician we have chosen, proposes to try magnetism in aid of his remedies, we do not require the exertion of greater confidence than we already repose in him, if we have been governed by the right motive, and have made no mistake, in our choice. He is the proper person to employ this agent, provided he R* 108 APPENDIX. is in good health, and has the good sense to make a trial in spite of his prepossessions against it. Yet there are certain requisites in a magnetizer, which we do not find in some physicians. I cannot do better than to recommend the reading of the two chapters referred to above. The principles advanced in them derive support from the facts embraced in this note, and from the experi- ence of many physicians with whom I have conversed. Many men of science are heartily engaged in the investiga- tion, not, I trust, with partisan feelings, but with the sincere desire of doing good ; and at this very time, though the first excitement is nearly over, there are more somnambulists and more patients under treatment than at any previous period. They may be stated at several hundreds in this and the adjoining States. The number of somnambulists referred to in this appendix is upwards of sixty, leaving out those who are merely thrown into the magnetic state, who are much more numerous. CONTENTS. Introduction, 3 CHAPTER I. General Views and Principles, 9 CHAPTER II. Of the Processes, 19 Meaning of being in communication, 23 To magnetize a patient who is in bed, . . . .25 Processes not indifferent, 31 Case of H***, .34 M. le Chevalier de Barbarin, 35 CHAPTER III. ' Of the Effects, and their Indications, .... 37 When you should not magnetize, 43 Convulsive motions produced, 46 Case of Oudin, 51 CHAPTER IV. Of Somnambulism, and its Uses, 55 Danger in charging the head much, 59 Moral influence over somnambulists, .... 64 Susceptibility of somnambulists, 67 Prescribe remedies for themselves, 71 Case at the Saltpetriere Hospital, 79 How to wake the patient, 81 Insensibility of somnambulists, 84 Magnetic exaltation, 85 Retracing the ideas of infancy, 92 200 CONTENTS. How to test their prescriptions, 102 Dr. Bertrand's work, 104 CHAPTER V. Of Precaution in the Choice of a Magnetizer, . . 107 Madame Champon de Montaux, ..... 109 To magnetize one's self, . . . . . . 116 The Marquis de Puysegur and his valet, . . . .119 Prodigious power of some magnetizers, .... 120 Le Compte de G***s, 121 M. N***'s clinic, 123 CHAPTER VI. Of the Application of Magnetism to Diseases, and its Con- nexion with Medicine, 127 Rules for practice, B 131 Magnetism not a specific for all diseases, . . . .133 Inflammation of the stomach, ..... 140 Case of M. Boismarsas, 141 Inveterate diseases, 144 Dropsy ; glandular enlargements, 146 Scrofula. — Ulcers, a case, ...... 147 Asthma. — Nervous diseases, &c 150 Epilepsy, 151 Histeria and hypochondria, 154 Paralysis, sixty cases mentioned, 155 Mental alienation, 156 Diseases of women, 157 Rheumatism, 160 Diseases of the eye, 162 Deafness. — Various diseases, . . . . . . 164 Experiment of M. Thiriat, 166 Children easily affected, 167 Curvature of the spine, . . . . . . . 168 Testimony of two hundred and fifty physicians mentioned, 169 Tic douloureux, 171 Acting at a distance, . . . ... . . 173 Vertigo and chorea, 176 CONTENTS. 201 CHAPTER VII. Of the Inconveniences, Abuses, and Dangers of Magnetism, 179 Of the moral dangers, how avoided, . 180 Of the physical dangers, how avoided, .... 187 Gutta serena ; interrupted treatment, .... 1 Qm Health essential to the magnetizer, He may communicate disease, . . . • Somnambulism not to be prolonged, , . . • • Avoid having too much confidence in your somnambulists, 199 Somnambulists by profession, . " Consulting for absent persons. Put at fault by skeptics, How to be sustained, Rules for consulting them, Natural somnambulism, CHAPTER VIII. Of the Means of Developing in Ourselves the Magnetic Faculties, Perceiving the seat of diseases, * Effects upon the magnetizer, De Lausanne's directions, Magnetic currents, Babst, CHAPTER IX. Of the Accessory Means of Increasing the Magnetic Ac TION, AND OF THOSE BY WHICH THE DlRECT ACTION IS SUP- PLIED ' 2 33 Magnetized water, " Reservoirs, how constructed, 24-2 The chain, how formed, CHAPTER X. Of the Studies by which a Person may Perfect Himself in a Knowledge of Magnetism, 245 Directions to magnetizers, Principles of Puysegur, 202 CONTENTS. APPENDIX. Note 1.— Life of Deleuze. His reputation as a man. . . 1 Note 2.— Letter from Charles Poyen de St. Sauveur. . . 8 Note 3.— Scene in a school-room. Children possess the power of magnetizing. Three instances related by the translator, Somnambulism at the first trial without manipulation. . 9 Note 4.— Power over the imagination. Various experiments. Magnetized water 22 Note 5. —Clairvoyance. Explanation of the term. In what manner some somnambulists examine objects. Reading a sealed letter. Note from Mr. Isaac Thurber. Experiment by a young lady. Experiment by the translator. Extract from the Salem Gazette. A somnambulist examines one of Dr. B.'s patients. Post mortem examination. Note from Dr. B 29 Note 6.— -Degree of control exercised over somnambulists by the magnetizer # oq Note 7.— Coincidence of experience in this country and in Eu- rope in relation to the magnetic practice. . .21 Note 8.— Awaking a somnambulist. Men more eager to wit- ness the curious phenomena of magnetism, than to see its utility tested 91 Note 9.— Paralysis produced in somnambulism by the volition of the magnetizer. In the natural state by manipulation. Letter from Dr. Webb. Notice of Gassner. Exorcism. Mesmer's extraordinary power 22 Note 10.— Cutting out a cancer, the patient being in a som- nambulic state. Insensibility to pain 27 Note ll.-Letter from Dr. Capron. Case of Miss BrackeU. Blindness. Curious magnetic phenomena. Statement of Mr. Henry Hopkins. Of Mr. Jesse Metcalf. ... 30 Note 12.-Experiments by M. B. L. Magnetizing at a distance.' 37 Note 13. -Experiments by Mr. A. V.Potter. Notions of time. 47 Note 14.— Somnambulism. Pliny. Hermotimus Clazomenius. EliYarnall. The magnetizer. Examining the sick. Ex. tract from the Marquis de Puysegur. ... 51 CONTENTS. 203 Note 15. — Travelling somnambulists. Mistakes and illusions. Letter from Dr. Hartshorn. From Rev. Mr. Farley. From Dr. John Flint 57 Note 16. — Reading sealed letters. Note from Dr. Capron. . 67 Note 17. — Dexterity of somnambulists 68 Note 18. — Instance of wit 69 Note 19.— -Letter from Lafayette to Washington. . . 69 Note 20. — Effects upon superstition 70 Note 21. — Transmission of pain. 72 Note 22. — The fluid. Argument. Paralysis. . .73 Note 23.— Scrofula. Mr. Daniel Greene. ... 76 Note 24. — Epilepsy. Communication at a distance. . . 76 Note 25. — Blindness. M. Hebert. Marchioness des Rousses. Prevision. Sight at a distance 78 Note 26. — Writing and reading in somnambulism. . .87 Note 27. — Letters from physicians. Case of nervous affection. Tic douloureux. Liver complaint. Hypochondriasis. Mag. netization at a distance. Somnambulic examinations of the sick. Case of Eleazer Barrett. Paralysis. Miss Mc- Intyre. Local action. Curing paralysis in two instances without somnolence. Inducing functional disease. Cu- taneous disease. Mrs. Fern. Fever and ague. Affection of the head, with fever. Epilepsy. Spasmodic cough. Toothache. Bowel pains. Affection of the hip and back. Neuralgia. Blindness. 88 Note 28. — Letter from Dr. Robbins on the correction of the habits of somnambulists. 106 Note 29. — Operations in dentistry by Dr. Esten, Dr. Harwood, and Dr. Washburn, on persons in somnambulism. . 110 Note 30. — Letter from E. L. Frothingham, Esq. From Mons. Bagard. From Rev. E. B. Hall. Principles by which this subject should be examined. Improbability of deception. Reality of the magnetic sleep. Experiments in distant and near clairvoyance. From the Rev. Mr. Kent. Influence upon the imagination. Distant somnambulic visit. From Mr. Joseph Harrington, Jr. From Mr. Frederic S. Church. Distant clairvoyance . .114 204 CONTENTS. Note 31.— Account of Georget. Foreknowledge of organic action. Somnambulic prescriptions. ... 150 Note 32,— From Moses B. Lockwood. Case of croup. Mag- netizing without the patient's knowledge by volition. Tra- cing the magnetizer 155 Note 33.— Letters from physicians. From Dr. Cutter. Neu- ralgia. Delirium tremens ; case of Mr. L. Bronchitis. Dyspepsia and spinal irritation. Partial paralysis. Head- ache and dyspepsia. Hepatitis and cephalalgia. Inflamma- ? tion. Magnetizer should be acquainted with anatomy. Paralysis. From Dr. Cleveland. Inflammation of the chest. Case of scrofulous affection. From Dr. Utley. Details of a curious case. From Dr. Toothaker. Idiocy. Clairvoyance. Examining the sick. Various cases. From Mons. Bugard. Tic douloureux, several cases. Demol- ishing skepticism. From Dr. Haskell. Magnetism to be used only as a remedial agent. . . . . ■ 157 Note 34. — Seeing through opaque substances. Letter from Isaac Thurber, Esq. From Mr. George Hunt. From Dr. Knox/ 180 Note 35.— Insensibility to pain. Letter from Dr. Esten. . 186 Note 36.— Letter from Mr. A. V. Potter. Various experiments at. Albany and Saratoga. . . . • • 188 Note 37. — Post-somnambulic influence. Curious proofs. Choice of physicians and magnetizers 195 Errata.— At the 49th page of the Appendix, for vivacity, read veracity. At the 73d page, in the third and eleventh line from the bottom, for delusion, read illusion. The statement in note twenty-six, is incorrect. Miss B. does not write during somnambulism. A friend, on whose authority I relied, misunderstood. *<2* 'P-V v ^ ... * 6 ... V ^Oft I o A V c " « t ' a M ,0 ^^ Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process ^ A Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: Nov. 2004 PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER m PAPER PRESERVATION 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066 (724)779-2111 1 * o ^ n> r : sW-V ^••^•V v-*s?V K* ,4 <^ : ,4 °«*v . <**_ o " < r *^ v^ aX *^ «r» - *3 v\\\ ?s \\ ///) © ^ » v 6*